Home

CS 180 CS 220 - HPI Technologies

1.
2. la N U ar ioi O O O O O O C O O O O ga 8770 z970 e eng SIMS 8IMS iMS IMS INS LMS veMS OMS SIMS SINS Q Q Q s9 BEMS vale seg aa Q Qzha Qena e1aQ 19107 19710 m szua 0410 vind OMNES 6 esa 992090 Qua era Cg 5 O O O sa Q Q Q 1100 zog Q 12102210 270 Qona V naQ EEMS 62MS vZMS za 0 10 0 O O 9LMS Y Y Y Qua EIMS LEMS S isla 6910 Ev 106 d e qna o O O O O que 100 sro arta SMS 0LMS YMS ZEMS La 2100 Q ZEMS 8ZMS ZMS i wwa ed vate D 3 za ssa 0710 Leia Q Q eg cans vola esta 6e7a 0710 ER 3 SR 2 S Y Y v 29710 O O O IEMS ZMS ZZMS Q Ere wQ SMS EMS ZMS _ Oo 9110 za 1910 9970 s910 wQ sla ole log o LIMS Q Q Q SEMS 92MS LZMS 2107 Q Q LOA n 0 slid 91d L Figure 2 3 4 Operation PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 14 Connector Signal Voltage 2KL 2KK Description YC1 Connected to the main engine PWB AN OO Ud as OON o 5V BUZERDRN SCAN SCAN6 SCANS SCAN4 SCAN3 SCAN2 SCAN1 SCANO 5 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 5 V DC power input from MEPWB OPWB buzzer signal Scan signal 7 Scan signal 6 Scan signal 5 Scan signal 4 Scan signal 3 Scan signal 2 Scan signa
3. INYZ T TOSAN i i i 1 snosa P les re i Ad3NOL Z z MI SOL 89A anos egi gfi z z N10934 SOA 1 108 plz BEND 994 anos L L e e anos 194d zit lt NL194 NMSGdLO Z Z Z 2 ad MSd Liz LLL LAvz zas ras ZOA plz n af amag K M MSMddMW b E Acer zit e z zi msmaa HE e 11 anos YOA MSY A E v or Mso3s S A AAA LE 6 z s S i Fi 3 9 8 Niro 5 To4dna FE r s 5 3 2 uondo z ziv 2 2 larves az 2 eud d d yun efe ele 8 9 qos ZOo22990290559 i di MSOddna zz viz 6 s NMSdd BRQOSGSS SEES xajdng T8L3IDSDIISI 1 LIL sil OL ZAS ZTIOUSIAMZA 1 DZ2070080 EEE EEE TII LLO NCOROS 5 t E ele ile 5 anos 152232322352 2555955 z MSddW z z zz Mead LU Dm mom ou ONIS 289go9go20253 DE els EL 1 onse SEooscpgpuolo ENMMOHGENESTO ORE SESNN OA lt R257r200n6n1 lt 0 M O O1 AVI aa 33 PaaS 2DeOuoacoaaNN Aia 2292820 LOA nn z Nuaznva NENA CAS CNO z 1 tavesznvs PA es eue HIO0TLT0AZAHONTAA T T ee 283290328225 dE s59e2856902625390 7 AqusdOl Lv it HO ZSYOssza5 245 e13SdOl zv z gMd Jeuez lt NYe l Mere Sz282839022 5407 pe E OfrQvAHLZAVZ z z OPQVAHL ZAVZ 302259208 no ao ov lia OPGVAHWI NYGAHL Sly S v OPAWAHW NYGAHL og 79 7 5 10SdO7 9v 9 3 NHGAHW NHGAHS 7 9 1 9 NHOAHW NHGAHS 2 oasaot zy 2 g OMTOAHINTASIAHS 6 8 6 8 OY 19AHQ N T3SIAHS 3 anos ev 8
4. Po Zo INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DUPLEX UNIT Supplied parts A Duplex unit sacs n iia ias B M3x 08 screw Pi ces fournies A Unit recto verso C Guide c ble C Wire guide B VIS MI KOI oiis aces Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning material from supplied parts Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh sive et ou les mat riaux de rembourrage des pi ces fournies Aseg rese de despegar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas Procedure Be sure to turn off the main switch of the main body of the copier or MFP and disconnect the power plug of the main body from the wall outlet before starting to install the Duplex Unit Proc dure Veillez bien mettre l interrupteur principal du corps principal du copieur ou du MFP hors tension et d brancher la fiche d alimentation de la prise murale avant de commencer l installation de l unit recto verso Procedimiento Aseg rese de apagar el interruptor principal del cuerpo principal de la copiadora o MFP y de Partes suministradas desconectar el enchufe del recept culo de A Unidad d plex 1 pared antes de empezar a instalar la Unidad B Tornillo M3 x 08 i 2 D plex C Guia para el cable 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Verfahren Gelieferte Teile A Du
5. O After maintenance always check that all the parts screws connectors and wires that were removed have been refitted correctly Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector trapped wire and missing screws i Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling Replace with new ones if necessary Q Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below sesssss o Use only a small amount of solvent at a time being careful not to spill Wipe spills off completely Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power switch on Always wash hands afterwards Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire inia f rmace etc cdi d ci e lebe latis ou aan i cade eut N Should smoke be seen coming from the copier remove the power plug from the wall outlet imme e Ud ini ia i i dd diri 3 Miscellaneous WARNING Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol other than the specified refiner it may generate toxic gas N This page is intentionally left blank 2KL 2KK CONTENTS 1 1 Specifications ST A ine aio eat ee reheat ao liz
6. Press the interrupt key Press the start key to output a test pattern Change the setting value using the zoom keys For output example 1 decrease the value For output example 2 increase the value Leading edge registration 20 1 0 mm Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 1 Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U034 cont 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U066 U071 P 1 3 20 P 1 3 24 Adjustment center line adjustment 1 Select group 2 using the image mode selection key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure Description Setting Initial Change in indicator range setting value per step Exp 1 lit Paper feed from cassette 7 0 to 10 0 2 4 0 1 mm Exp 2 lit Paper feed from MP tray 7 0 to 10 0 0 0 0 1 mm Exp 3 lit Paper feed from optional first 7 0 to 10 0 0 0 0 1 mm paper feeder Exp 4 lit Paper feed from optional second 7 0 to 10 0 0 0 0 1 mm paper feeder Exp 5 lit Paper feed from optional third 7 0 to 10 0 0 0 0 1 mm paper feeder Exp 1 flashing Duplex mode 7 0 to 10 0 0 0 0 1 mm Press the interrupt key Press the start key to output a test pattern Change the setting value using
7. Defective drive motor Replace the drive motor 1 4 17 2KL 2KK Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Drum motor problem A stable state does not continue for 1 s from 1 s after the drum motor is acti vated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 on the main engine PWB and the connector on the drum motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation Defective drum motor Replace the drum motor Scanner carriage problem The home position is not correct when the power is turned on or at the start of copying using the table Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC5 on the main engine PWB and the connector on the home position switch and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective home position switch Replace the home position switch Defective scanner motor Replace the scanner motor The mirror frame exposure lamp or scanner wire is defective Check if the mirror flames and exposure lamp a
8. Controls the other PWBs electrical components and optional devices Controls the operation panel and laser scanner unit 2 Power source PWB PSPWB Generates 24 V DC controls the fuser heaters 3 High voltage PWB HVTPWB Main charging Generates high voltages for transfer and high voltages for separation 4 Inverter PWB INPWB Controls the exposure lamp 5 CCD PWB CCDPWB Reads the image of originals 6 Operation unit PWB OPWB Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs 7 LCD PWB LCDPWB ene Controls LCD indication 8 APC PWB APCPWB Generates and controls the laser beam 9 PD PWB PDPWB Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam 10 Cassette PWB CPWB Relays wirings from electrical components 11 Printer PWB PRNPWB Controls the printer functions Option 2 2 1 2KL 2KK List of correspondences of PWB names Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Main engine PWB MEPWB Power source PWB PSPWB High voltage PWB HVPWB Inverter PWB INPWB CCD PWB CCDPWB Operation PWB OPWB LCD PWB LCDPWB APC PWB APCPWB PD PWB PDPWB Cassette PWB CPWB Printer PWB PRNPWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A H O 2 2 2 PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY SP PARTS LVU100 M SP PARTS LVU200 M SP PARTS HVU SP
9. Defective eject motor Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper ates If not replace the eject motor Defective main engine PWB Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper ates If not replace the main engine PWB 3 The scanner motor or cooling fan motor 1 2 does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Broken motor coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the motor 4 The paper feed clutch registration clutch or duplex feed clutch does not oper ate 1 4 28 Broken clutch coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the clutch Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective cassette PWB Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the cassette PWB goes low If not replace thecassette PWB Paper feed clutch YC7 2 on the cassette PWB Registration clutch YC6 2 on the cassette PWB Duplex feed clutch YC5 6 on the cassette PWB Defective main engine PWB Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the main engine PWB goes low If not replace the main engine PWB Paper feed c
10. FR A CONS Rss sr teint 1 B HAMIXB iii s nr dnb 4 C EAM X da a 1 D Dey IAZIAM ii iii 1 o AS A e RUNE 3 Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning material from supplied parts Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh sive et ou les mat riaux de rembourrage des pi ces fournies Aseg rese de despegar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dampfungsmaterial vollst ndig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite NN un Fe Ay TER DE SNS gt EA ES 7 AREA DO CW AR Ha E Procedure Be sure to turn off the main switch of the main body of the copier or MFP and disconnect the power plug of the main body from the wall outlet before starting to install the Duplex Unit Proc dure Veillez bien mettre l interrupteur principal du corps principal du copieur ou du MFP hors tension et d brancher la fiche d alimentation de la prise murale avant de commencer l installation de l unit recto verso Procedimiento Aseg rese de apagar el interruptor principal del cuerpo principal de la copiadora o MFP y de desconectar el enchufe del recept culo de pared antes de empezar a instalar la Unidad D plex Verfahren Schalten Sie unbedingt den Hauptschalter der Haupteinheit des Kopierers oder MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzsteck
11. Maintenance cycle Replace if the problem occurs Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Clean with alcohol Replace if claw is flawed deformed or worn Points and cautions P 1 5 40 P 1 5 48 P 1 5 42 P 1 5 47 Eject section Section Eject roller Eject pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley Maintenance part location Check or clean Check or clean Check or clean Check or clean User call User call User call User call Maintenance cycle Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty Points and cautions Covers Section Covers Original cover Maintenance part location Method Every service Every service Maintenance cycle Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Points and cautions Other 2 4 4 Image quality Check and adjust Every service Chart of image adjustment procedures 2KL 2KK Adjusting Maintenance mode Item Image Description Original Page R
12. RET 1158 1 ABbvZULYZOD218EAZA Uh 12 5 amp fk 2 Hh 12 EX 13 IHAL A RY PUY 11 2 A 7031 0 RD F2 HAM 0 nj s Insert the angle adjusting plate C and fit it using M4 x 14 screw E Ins rez la plaque de r glage d angle C et fixez la l aide d une vis M4 x 14 E Inserte la placa de ajuste de ngulo C y fije con el tornillo M4 x 14 E Den Winkeleinstellhalter C einsetzen und mit einer M4 x 14 Schraube E befestigen Inserire la piastra di regolazione dell angolo C e fissarla con una vite M4 x 14 E 1 Merz M4 X 14 E WET E HEBR C HAL EA MA X 14 E LAC ETD INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR PAPER FEEDER Additional step during PF 420 installation Additional parts B MIX 8 SCEW i 1 F Connector cover ssssessenenseeseeenreeseeeee 1 After installing the PF 420 fasten the connector cover F in place using an M3 x 8 screw B Note This step is not required for 22 ppm MFP models printer based models since the connector cover F is already attached Op ration suppl mentaire pour l installation de PF 420 Pi ces suppl mentaires B Vis MI X 8 icon aep eee dins 1 F Couvercle du connecteur 1 Apr s avoir install le PF 420 fixer le couvercle du connecteur F en position l aide d une vis M3 x 8 B Remarque Cette op ration n est pas n
13. Retirez la bague d arr t 2 et la courroie 3 du c t arri re D posez la bague d arr t 4 et la courroie 5 sur le c t avant Ouvrez le couvercle gauche 1 jusqu ce qu il soit plac horizontalement Abra la cubierta izquierda 1 Desmonte el anillo de tope 2 y la correa 3 del lado trasero Quitar el anillo de tope 4 y la correa 5 del lado delantero Abra la cubierta izquierda 1 hasta que lo ponga horizontalmente Aprire il coperchio sinistro 1 Rimuovere l anello di bloccaggio 2 e la cinghietta 3 dal lato posteriore Entfernen Sie den Anschlagring 4 und den Riemen 5 von der Vorderseite Aprire il coperchio sinistro 1 finch non in posizione orizzontale Aprire il coperchio sinistro 1 Rimuovere l anello di bloccaggio 2 e la cinghietta 3 dal lato posteriore Rimuovere l anello di bloccaggio 4 e la cinghietta 5 dal lato fronta Aprire il coperchio sinistro 1 finch non in posizione orizzontale HA Mo HB a WU Ey 2 AA T 3 EI FATE 4 FUR TSE 5 FFF citi D PATIRE I 1 EF BRIDA KY 7077 2 BEWA RF YZ 3 ZBIT IDA bY 70727 4 BERUA hy 5 EMI EII D ERIC Turn the wire guide section 6 on the duplex unit A in the direction of the arrow until you hear a click Faites tourner la partie guide c ble 6 de l unit recto verso A dans la direction de la fl che jusqu au clic
14. Printer Printer left margin right margin 2 5 1 0 mm 2 5 1 0 mm Printer trailing edge margin 3 0 1 0 mm Figure 1 3 17 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U403 U404 P 1 3 51 P 1 3 52 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Pressthe start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure D Setting Initial Change in Logs escription indicator range setting value per step Exp 1 Scanner left margin 0 0to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm Exp 2 Scanner leading edge margin 0 0to 10 0 3 0 0 5 mm Exp 3 Scanner right margin 0 0to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm Exp 4 Scanner trailing edge margin 0 0to10 0 2 0 0 5 mm Press the interrupt key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Change the setting value using the zoom keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Scanner leading edge margin 3 0 2 5 mm Scanner gt
15. Valore di riferimento Entro 20 2 5 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a OR XE e cH JEDE vocal 5 0 40 0 LESA SR 0 1mm FUMA TAR HI RE AEDR 2 783 AIMAR ARE EI aN A 1 EE FSE CB 20 2 5mm IA a RIGHE III AEP YAW b mossa EU S ESTI c ROA SEE FU S ARIE 5 0 10 0 LAF vy FORCE 0 1mm ET AANA LH ETS AEP YS MORO BEARD ET FI 2 3 2 VIET EXE 20 2 5mm DIN EY a a iff fv Y If the operation panel is an LCD type Adjusting the center line 1 Run maintenance mode 034 Select ADJ LSU OUT TIMING and press the Start key Select LSU DUP Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern in duplex mode and check the image lt Reference value gt Within 3 0 mm copy example a image If the gap between the center of the paper dotted line and the copy example line 2 is larger than the reference value perform the following adjustment Si le panneau de commande est du type LCD R glage de la ligne centrale 1 1 Ex cutez le mode de maintenance 034 S lectionnez ADJ LSU OUT TIMING et appuyez sur la touche de d part copie S lectionnez LSU DUP Appuyez sur la touche d interruption pour produire le motif de test en mode recto verso et v rifiez l image Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de
16. 1 3 21 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U068 1 3 22 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the zoom keys Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Scanning position 17 to 17 0 0 17 mm Increasing the value moves the image backward and decreasing it moves the image forward Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the interrupt key Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U070 Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the optional DP is used Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Exp 1 Magnif
17. 2 3 16 Maintenance parts list Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part No Alterna tive part zm oa 2KL 2KK Paper feed pulley Separation pulley Forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley MP separation pad Left registration roller Right registration roller PULLEY PAPER FEED PULLEY SEPARATION PULLEY LEADING FEED PULLEY BYPASS PARTS BYPASS PAD ASSY SP PARTS ROLLER REGIST LEFT SP RIGHT ROLL REGIST 2AR07220 2AR07230 2AR07240 302KK08210 302KK94450 302KK94230 302KK24140 2KK08210 2KK94450 2KK94230 2KK24140 wm Slit glass Contact glass Mirror 1 Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Lens Reflector Exposure lamp Optical rail Original size detection sensor Laser scanner unit CONTACT GLASS ADF CONTACT GLASS MIRROR A MIRROR B LENS REFLECTOR SCANNER PARTS LAMP SCANNER SP RAIL SCANNER SENSOR ORIGINAL LK 460 20912280 20912250 302KK17320 302KK17330 2C912110 302KK94220 2C927090 302KK93060 2KK17320 2KK17330 2KK94220 2KK93060 N N DO 00 010 FTW CO Transfer roller Separation electrode ROLLER TRANSFER PLATE STA ELIMINATION 302C917011 2C917080 2C917011 Developing unit DV 460 302KK93020 2KK93020 Main charger unit MC 460 302KK93080 2KK93080 Fuser unit Heat roller Press roller Heat roller separation claw FK 460 A FK 460 E PARTS ROLLER HEAT SP PARTS ROLLER PRESS SP SEPA
18. Bevor das Bild vom DP gepr ft wird ist das Bild von der Maschine zu pr fen und einzustellen Einzelheiten sind der Wartungsanleitung der Maschine zu entnehmen BON Controllo del funzionamento 1 Per controllare il funzionamento della macchina preparare un originale di formato A3 a dove sono state tracciate quattro linee b a 20 mm dai bordi e una linea c centrale Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione della macchina alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e accendere l interruttore principale di alimentazione Collocare l originale a nel DP e fare una copia di prova per controllare il funzionamento della macchina e l esempio di copia Se la differenza tra l originale a e la copia di prova supera il valore di riferimento eseguire le regolazioni Per la procedura leggere le seguenti pagine Prima di controllare l immagine dal DP controllare e regolare l immagine dalla macchina Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d istruzioni della macchina TEERBIA 1 ER If A3 OTRA EE 20mm WRA 4 4 amp E b USER A a EAT 1 8 0 2 RENE PL ERG riri od Ade nnt JIJF3E BASTA Y A3 ACNE AE 3 MIRAR a JE DP E EFT EE Af BEER ET P ARE 4 p E suis Ca AMENA EE EAT CRETA AJA MU AL ELH PR VAX DP BEATA EDREAL HET TFT RON SVE TEES 1 A3 4A ADAMO S 20mm DEE b 4 AL AAD UD ICR c 1 4S ESL TE METER OA a META
19. Chn Chinese specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 The machine automatically returns to the same status as when the power is turned on Supplement The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below To change the initial settings in those items be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destina tion Initial setting according to the destinations Maintenance Title Japan Inch Europe Metric item No Asia Pacific China 253 Switching between double and Single Double Double single counts 344 Setting the low power mode ENERGY ENERGY GEEA STAR STAR Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters Purpose According to user copy service provider request select if A3 Ledger paper is to be counted as one sheet single count or two sheets double count Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the zoom keys Display Description Sin Single count for all size paper b4 Double count for B4 size or larger A3 Double count for A3 Ledger paper only Fo Double count for Folio Legal size or larger Initial setting A3 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 45 2KL 2KK Maint
20. Defective registration Switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding Switch is not light Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 1 to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 1 Check see page 1 4 28 Problem Causes check procedures 2KL 2KK Corrective measures 5 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from second paper feeder Jam code 13 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley separation pulley or for warding pulley is deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulley Broken cassette feed switch 1 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective cassette feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn cassette feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch is not light Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 2 to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 2 Check see service manual of
21. Fuser section 1 4 4 40 Misfeed in fuser section MP tray The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms 41 Misfeed in fuser section cassette The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms 42 Misfeed in fuser section first paper feeder The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms 43 Misfeed in fuser section second paper feeder The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms Section Description Conditions 2KL 2KK Specified time Fuser section 44 Misfeed in fuser section third paper feeder The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms 45 Misfeed in fuser section duplex section The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms Eject section 50 Misfeed in eject section The eject
22. MP paper feed pulley MP paper guide Stop ring Figure 1 5 20 10 Push the inserted parts of the MP separation pad and remove the pad from the machine 11 Replace the MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pad and refit all the removed parts MP separation pad Figure 1 5 21 1 5 13 2KL 2KK 5 Detaching and refitting the left registration roller Follow the procedure below to replace the left registration roller Procedure 1 Remove the paper conveying unit see page 1 5 9 Left registration roller unit 2 Release the stoppers at the front and rear side and then remove the left registration roller from the paper conveying unit Figure 1 5 22 3 Remove two stoppers gear and two Gear bushes 4 Replace the left registration roller and refit all the removed parts Qa ES Stopper Bush Left registration roller Bush Stopper Figure 1 5 23 1 5 14 6 Detaching and refitting the right registration roller 2KL 2KK Follow the procedure below to replace the right registration roller Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit see page 1 5 34 2 Remove the rear cover see page 1 5 6 3 Remove the connector and remove the reg istration clutch 4 Remove the stop ring 5 Remove the right registration roller from the machine Registration clutch Figure 1 5 24 Stop ring Right registration roller Figure 1 5 25 1 5 15 2KL 2KK 6 Remove two bushes and ge
23. Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello a 7 segmenti Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo principale 1 Avviare il modo manutenzione 034 Premere il tasto di modo della qualit dell immagine finch Text non si illumina gruppo 1 Cassetto del 2 livello Premere il tasto di esposizione finch exp3 non si illumina modo 3 Cassetto del 3 livello Premere il tasto di esposizione finch exp4 non si illumina modo 4 Cassetto del 4 livello Premere il tasto di esposizione finch exp5 non si illumina modo 5 Premere il tasto di interruzione per stampare i modelli di prova e controllare l immagine stampata Valore di riferimento Entro 20 2 5 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a Se lo scostamento tra il bordo della carta e la linea dell esempio di copia 1 maggiore rispetto al valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione IRMETMINA 7 seg BAT DES 1 PATE 034 e ILE XC EEED piu PREUVE RE AE exp3 ETE gt RIE VA EEE exp4 UMAR es FAR Ee REE oxp5 ji BEN FT AMAA REMI E TED 20 2 5 m ee a RARE AGI An REACHES A A CD MERK T f WAN F ESEISAJLAS Tseg 4 FOLGE Hime 4 2 VU THE 1 AVFFYAE FU034 ETTA AE RKI TALE SRT EUS 71 71 A Hk2RHB IRE dE oc exp3 ATI F 3 HEY bh 3 AA RENE exp4 Ze kp 2 RA Hey h4 Ay puis xpo ERTSE D CU F5 HO ADA EML TAR RAT 26017 LC GE MERS D GEY 20 2 5mm LAPS
24. Topystar Kyocera Technology CS 180 CS 220 SERVICE Published in June 2009 2KLSM940 CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal ATTENTION IL Y AUN RISQUE D EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUC TIONS DONNEES Il peut tre ill gal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d gout municipales V rifiez avec les fonc tionnaires municipaux de votre r gion pour les d tails concernant des d chets solides et une mise au rebut appropri e Revision history This page is intentionally left blank Safety precautions This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities Safety warnings and precautions Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property These symbols are described below
25. bo tH HEY R 2BEA LSU T ERTS HEY R 3 BEA LSU T2 3 3 2 HEY h4BHR LSU T3 RTA HO ARE RMLTX RR AREA LT HR AER 2 JEME E 2 Omm AN EV a H amp R ODE YA MER EACH YTV OEE 2 OT MARIN OS E RO ET I 12 A 2 is larger than the reference value perform the following adjustment 2 For the image in copy example b Increase the value For the image in copy example c Decrease the value Setting range 7 0 10 0 Changing the value by one moves the center line by 0 1 mm 3 Output the test pattern again 4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 until the line 1 in the copy example is within the reference value lt Reference value gt Within 2 0 mm copy example a 2 Pour l image dans l exemple de copie b augmenter la valeur Pour l image dans l exemple de copie c diminuer la valeur Plage de param tres 7 0 10 0 Lorsqu on change la valeur d une unit la ligne centrale se d place de 0 1 mm 3 Produisez nouveau le motif de test 4 R p tez les op rations 2 et 3 jusqu ce que la ligne 1 dans l exemple de copie soit dans les limites de la valeur de r f rence lt Valeur de r f rence gt Dans les limites de 2 0 mm image a d un exemple de copie 2 Para la imagen en la copia de muestra b aumentar el valor Para la imagen en la copia de muestra c disminuir el valor Gama de ajustes 7 0 10 0 Un cambio de valor en una unidad mueve la l nea de centro en 0 1 mm 3 Haga salir nuev
26. 10 No paper feed from MP tray The registration switch RSW does not turn on within the specified time of paper MP solenoid MPSOL turning on and cannot be detected at the same timing even after retry 11 No paper feed from cassette The registration switch RSW does not turn on within the specified time of paper paper feed clutch 1 PFCL1 turn ing on and cannot be detected at the same timing even after retry 1327 ms 12 No paper feed from first paper feeder The registration switch RSW does not turn on within the specified time of cassette paper paper feed clutch 1 CPFCL1 turning on and cannot be detected at the same timing even after retry 13 No paper feed from second paper feeder Cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 does not turn on within the specified time of cassette paper paper feed clutch 2 CPFCL2 turning on and cannot be detected at the same timing even after retry 1953 ms 14 No paper feed from third paper feeder Cassette feed switch 2 CFSW2 does not turn on within the specified time of cassette paper paper feed clutch 3 CPFCL3 turning on and cannot be detected at the same timing even after retry 1953 ms 15 Misfeed in vertical paper conveying sec tion 1 The registration switch RSW does not turn on within specified time of cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 turning on 2243 ms Cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 does not turn off within specified time of cassette f
27. 10700 pulses 78 Document processor cover open The document processor or document processor top cover is opened during original feeding The original set switch OSSW or original size length switch OSLSW turns on when starting the original paper feed 1 4 7 2KL 2KK 3 Paper misfeeds Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 1 A paper jam in the paper feed convey ing or eject section is indicated as soon as the main power Switch is turned on A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around registration switch eject switch or feedshift Switch Check visually and remove it if any Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Registration switch eject switch feedshift switch 2 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from MP tray Jam code 10 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the MP paper feed pulley is deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulley Broken registration switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective registration Switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Check if the MP solenoid malfun
28. 2KL 2KK 1 4 1 Paper misfeed detection 1 Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903 To remove paper jammed in the machine open the front cover left cover or pull the cassette out To remove original jammed in the optional DP open the document processor top cover To remove the jammed paper in optional document finisher detach the finisher from the machine Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on Figure 1 4 1 Misfeed in paper feed section Misfeed in paper conveying section 3 Misfeed in document processor Misfeed in paper feeder 1 4 1 2KL 2KK 2 Paper misfeed detection conditions 2 1 4 igure F 1 4 2 Section Description Conditions 2KL 2KK Specified time System 00 No paper feed The power is turned on when a sensor in the conveying system is on The document processor is opened while originals fed from the document processor are scanned 04 Cover open Cover is open during copying 05 Secondary paper feed does not start Secondary paper feed does not start within specified time of arrival of paper at the registration section Paper feed section
29. 9 TRAE 11 RAE A MA 12 KERR TEA E 10 UR ROA ER A LOL B 11 BRA PE EF 12 PTE RE IT A 1 e E 9 fts y bh 11 SE may bh A OAK 12 ZAR BET I 10 EIA F 0 eA oo 3A AGR 13 14 DIR 3A T9 11 0 RUI Bs Ze ci 0 IR ANTA 12 ffe y b D BLOAAAN 1 ZAC Checking the operation Connect the power plug of the machine to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on V rification du fonctionnement Ins rer la fiche d alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension Verificaci n del funcionamiento Conecte el enchufe el ctrico de la m quina en un tomacorriente de la pared y conecte el interruptor principal berpr fen des Betriebs Den Netzstecker der Maschine in die Steckdose stecken und den Betriebsschalter einschalten Verifica di funzionamento Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione della macchina alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e accendere l interruttore principale di alimentazione FRETA RDS EPL EI EE FAA MT FT SE Rese ERARO BIRT Tea ey MI LIA BAA VAL YF ENTS 202 5mm If the operation panel is a 7 segment type Adjusting the leading edge timing 1 Run maintenance mode 034 Press the image quality mode key until Text is lit group 1 Press the exposure key until exp1 is flashing mode 6 Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern in duplex mode and check
30. Girar en la direcci n de la flecha la secci n de la gu a para el cable 6 en la unidad d plex A hasta escuchar un clic Drehen Sie das Kabelf hrungsteil 6 an der Duplex Einheit A in der Pfeilrichtung bis es h rbar einrastet Ruotare la sezione di guida cavi 6 sull unit Duplex A nella direzione della freccia finch non si sente un clic FUR AA SEP OO 191 31 77 1 ED SE Mo y ABM BM mHz y b A DEBRA Fid 6 amp R F NL HF y DAD E CA SII HI Me Mf S Ts 6 Mount the duplex unit A on the conveying guide 7 and push the upper section in the direction of the arrow so that the 4 latches 8 fit over the pawls 9 6 Montez l unit recto verso A sur le guide d entrainement 7 et poussez la partie sup rieure dans la direction de la fl che de sorte que les 4 verrous 8 s encastrent sur les cliquets 9 6 Montar la unidad d plex A en la gu a de transporte 7 y empujar la porci n superior en la direcci n de la flecha de forma tal que los 4 pestillos 8 encajen sobre los trinquetes 9 6 Montieren Sie die Duplex Einheit A an der F rderf hrung 7 und dr cken Sie den oberen Teil in der Pfeilrichtung so dass die 4 Rasten 8 ber die Klauen 9 greifen 6 Montare l unit Duplex A sulla guida di trasporto 7 e spingere la sezione superiore nella direzione della freccia in modo che 4 fermi 8
31. Presione la tecla de modo de calidad de imagen hasta que se enciendan Text y Photo grupo 2 Presione la tecla de exposici n hasta que destelle exp1 modo 6 Presionar la tecla de interrupci n para imprimir el patr n de prueba en modo d plex y controlar la imagen Valor de referencia Dentro de 3 0 imagen de copia de muestra a Si la separaci n supera el valor de referencia realizar el siguiente ajus Wenn es sich um eine 7 Segment Bedienungstafel handelt Einstellen der Mittellinie 1 1 F hren Sie den Wartungsmodus 034 aus Dr cken Sie die Bildqualit tsmodustaste bis Text und Photo aufleuchten Gruppe 2 Dr cken Sie die Belichtungstaste bis exp1 blinkt Modus 6 Dr cken Sie die Unterbrechungstaste um das Testmuster im Duplexmodus auszugeben und berpr fen Sie das Bild Bezugswert Binnen 3 0 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Falls der Abstand zwischen der Mittenlinie des Papiers Punktierte Linie und der Kopienmusterlinie 2 gr Rer als der Bezugswert ist ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello a 7 segmenti Regolazione della linea di centro 1 1 Awiare il modo manutenzione 034 Premere il tasto di modo della qualit dell immagine finch Text e illuminano gruppo 2 Premere il tasto di esposizione finch expl inizia a lampeggiare modo 6 Premere il tasto di interruzione per eseguire i modelli di prova nel modo duplex e controllare l immagine
32. MURET HE 0 HES RILA LCD 44 FOIRE 42 354 VARI 1 AVFFVAL F034 ZETTA ADJ LSU OUT TIMING ERL 14 Ft REP LSU DUP ENT 2 E OA AR Ze HILL Billie BOF ARAB eH LT BUE ERR E YER 3 0mm UN 2 E LM a ER ODE v WRR e 11 47 TAO 2 OF Tv25 ERE OE IL KO mee BORD 2 e Po bI HAI EE o CHRIS RE WE YEAR 7 0 10 0 LEAS he 0 1mm FUR MET AEN RAVER 2 3 HBA Pee 5 Eee CL TRE EA T5 B1 9 CBAR 3 Omm LAPS a BRA SEE as H AEP YAW b HROWE He LIPS ESHIT c BOSSES SRE GA 7 0 10 0 LAF y 7 DCE 0 1mm HT ZX pZ EIET al 4 TIMOR 2 DAMA ITZA ET FI 2 344 VIT EYEE 3 Omm LAN 3 3 7 77 a MG fv Y INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR Printing System 2 English INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE Printing System Z GUIDE D INSTALLATION DU Printing System Z GUIA DE INSTALACION PARA EL Printing System Z Supplied part A Printer board Option B USB interface IB 110 Contenu standard A Carte d imprimante Option B Interface USB IB 110 ndice general A Tarjeta de impresora Opci n B Interfaz USB IB 110 Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning material from supplied parts Before installing the p
33. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth P 1 5 11 P 1 5 15 Section Maintenance part location Maintenance cycle Points and cautions 2KL 2KK Optical section Slit glass Contact glass Mirror 1 Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Reflector Exposure lamp Optical rail Original size detection sensor Laser scanner unit Maintenance Check or replace Check or grease Check or clean Check or clean Every service Every service User call User call User call User call User call User call User call User call Maintenance Clean with a dry cloth do not clean with a wet cloth or alcohol Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the print image Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the print image Clean with a dry cloth only if verti cal black lines appear on the print image Clean with a dry cloth only if verti cal black lines appear on the print im
34. Valore di riferimento Entro 3 0 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazio Photo non si FRENA 7 segBUR fub B s 1 SAHHEIEBESNO34 EXE Sce RET MI RTS mie CH2 TREIA MERA expl DK BIO ALII ARA Pom h A CARS SZ 3 Omm UA a ARAB Basil NA SRE O AA AA JV E ESESTRILA seg 44 TOBA 142454 VAR 1 RVFIVAET EUM Ef S Bret PEC EON ER ART SS 71 72 Ue EE C expl amp APR EAS E F 6 HO AAA Ze HILL lite FETTA PSY UE HE UC BUE ERR GE MEM 3 Omm DIN CE VV a HR LO DA TRE La EF PORE 2 OPNE RAIE KO MATA o Po For the image in copy example b Increase the value For the image in copy example c Decrease the value Setting range 7 0 10 0 Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0 1 mm Make a test copy again Repeat steps 2 to 3 until the line 1 in the copy example is within the reference value lt Reference value gt Within 3 0 mm copy example a image Pour l image dans l exemple de copie b augmenter la valeur Pour l image dans l exemple de copie c diminuer la valeur Plage de param tres 7 0 10 0 Lorsqu on change la valeur d une unit le bord avant se d place de 0 1 mm Effectuez nouveau une copie de test R p tez les op rations
35. ib LAMPN 3 YC16 4 gt YC5 B8 h OPSWN Reading image data YC27 MEPWB YC5 B2 YC15 1 YC15 2 YC15 3 YC15 4 L ORGLSWN ISMDA ISMDB ISMDNA ISMDNB 2 1 4 Figure 2 1 4 Image scanner section block diagram 2KL 2KK 2 Laser scanner section The image data scanned by the CCD PWB CCDPWB is processed on the main PWB MPWB and transmitted as image printing data to the laser scanner unit LSU By repeatedly turning the laser on and off the laser scanner unit forms a latent image on the drum surface Figure 2 1 5 Laser scanner section APC PWB APCPWB 2 Laser diode 3 Cylindrical lens 4 Polygon motor PM 5 Polygon mirror 6 fO lens f0 lens 8 PD sensor mirror 9 Cylindrical correcting lens 10 PD PWB PDPWB 2KL 2KK 2 1 6 PDPWB Laser scanner unit LSU PLGCLKN Sh PLGRDYN oo Polygon PLGDRN mirror d IA a ml A I A LT Li Laser diode APCPWB ry A PDN OUTPEN SAMPLEN VDON VDOP Figure 2 1 6 Laser scanner section block diagram 2KL 2KK 2 1 3 Drum section The drum section consists of the drum main charger section cleaning section and cleaning lamp The main charger section consists of main charger wire and main charger grid and the drum is charged by a high voltage applied to the main charger
36. the image lt Reference value gt Within 20 2 5 mm copy example a image If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment Si le panneau de commande est du type 7 segments R glage de la synchronisation du bord avant 1 Ex cutez le mode de maintenance 034 Appuyez sur la touche de mode de qualit d image jusqu ce que Text s allume groupe 1 Appuyez sur la touche d exposition jusqu ce que exp1 clignote mode 6 Appuyez sur la touche d interruption pour produire le motif de test en mode recto verso et v rifiez l image Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 20 2 5 mm image a d un exemple de copie Si l cart entre l axe du papier ligne pointill e et le trait de l exemple de copie 2 est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Si el tablero de controles es de tipo 7 segmentos Ajuste de la sincronizaci n del borde superior 1 Active el modo de mantenimiento 034 Gas 0 la tecla de modo de calidad de imagen hasta que se encienda Text grupo 1 Presione la tecla de exposici n hasta que destelle exp1 modo 6 Presionar la tecla de interrupci n para imprimir el patr n de prueba en modo d plex y controlar la imagen lt Valor de referencia gt Dentro de 20 2 5 mm imagen de copia de muestra a Si la separaci n supera el valor de referencia realizar el siguiente ajuste Wenn es sich um eine 7 Segment Bedienungstafel handelt Einstellen
37. tion Dirty main charger wire 5 A white line appears longitudinally Copy example Causes Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 36 Check procedures corrective measures Dirty main charger wire Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 36 Foreign matter in the developing unit Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly Replace the developing unit if any foreign matter see page 1 5 37 Dirty shading plate Clean the shading plate 1 4 23 2KL 2KK 6 A black line appears longitudinally Causes Copy example Check procedures corrective measures Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Dirty or flawed drum Clean the drum or if it is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 34 Dirty scanner mirror Clean the scanner mirror Dirty main charger wire 7 A black line appears laterally Copy example Causes Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 36 Check procedures corrective measures Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Dirty or flawed drum Clean the drum or if it is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 34 Dirty developing section Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developing
38. ud 6 FIA CAE UTE EA 8 LAC ARI 2 5 9 METIS RA CAD fedi C100 f AERE C110 fn 7 Plug the connector 10 for the cassette A into the connector socket 11 Raccordez le connecteur 10 de la cassette A avec l embase 11 Enchufe el conector 10 del casete A en el enchufe del conector 11 Den Steckverbinder 10 f r die Kassette A in die Steckverbinderbuchse 11 stecken Collegare il connettore 10 per il cassettone A nella presa del connettore 11 E HEY b DIRA 10 ERKOARZ 2 01 CT 5 9 Plug the connector 13 for the lower cassette A into the connector socket 14 in the upper cassette A only when stacking 2 or more cassettes 8 Remove the connector cover 12 from the cassettes other than the lowest cassette A only when stacking 2 or more cassettes 9 Raccordez le connecteur 13 de la cassette inf rieure A avec 8 D posez le couvercle du connecteur 12 des cassettes autres que la cassette A l embase 14 de la cassettes sup rieure A dans le cas d un empilage de 2 cassettes ou plus uniquement dans le cas d un empilage de 2 cassettes ou plus uniquement 8 Desmonte la cubierta del conector 12 de todos los casetes excepto 9 Enchufe el conector 13 del casete inferior A en el enchufe del conector 14 del casete superior A solo cuando se apilan 2
39. 1 en la copia de muestra se encuentre dentro del valor de referencia lt Valor de referencia gt Dentro de 20 2 5 mm imagen de copia de muestra a F r das Bild im Kopienmuster b Den Wert erh hen F r das Bild im Kopienmuster c Den Wert verringern Einstellbereich 5 0 10 0 Durch Andern des Werts um eins wird die Vorderkante um 0 1 mm verschoben Machen Sie eine erneute Probekopie Die Schritte 2 und 3 wiederholen bis die Linie 1 im Kopienmuster innerhalb des Bezugswerts liegt lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 20 2 5 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Per l immagine nell esempio di copia b aumentare il valore Per l immagine nell esempio di copia c ridurre il valore Gamma di impostazione 5 0 10 0 Cambiando il valore di una unit si sposta il bordo di entrata di 0 1 mm Fare di nuovo una copia di prova Ripetere i passi da 2 a 3 finch la linea 1 nell esempio di copia non sia entro il valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento Entro 20 2 5 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a DEI Neun pe e cf RAMA WE YUH 5 0 10 0 LP META E 0 1mm PIRATA HI EZRA 2 7 3 ABACK AER 1 ED Bl 1 fF BE A J ic Ev Fal PY B ZH 20 2 5mm UW a BRA ZA AES TW b ROA A RUE EU S AEP YW c MEDAR EMA FIPS ARIE SA 5 0 10 0 LAF vy FORCE 0 1mm EF ANE YH
40. 2KL 2KK REGCLM C1PDSWN FCLTN REGSW YC5 10 BPWSW YC5 12 MPPWSW BPPESW YC5 2 Figure 2 1 2 Paper feed section block diagram 2 1 2 2KL 2KK 2 1 2 Optical section The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner section for printing 1 Image scanner section The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp EL and scanned by the CCD PWB CCDPWB in the image scan ning unit via the three mirrors the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner When the DP is used the scanner and mirror frames stop at the DP original scanning position to start scanning ul l _ I 7 5 4 14 15 8 Figure 2 1 3 Image scanner section 1 Mirror 1 frame 9 CCD PWB CCDPWB 2 Exposure lamp EL 10 ISU cover 3 Mirror 1 11 Contact glass 4 Scanner reflector 12 Slit glass 5 Mirror 2 frame 13 Home position switch HPSW 6 Mirror 2 14 Original detection switch ODSW 7 Mirror 3 15 Original size detection sensor OSDS 8 ISU 2KL 2KK Original CCDPWB La CCD image sensor z INPWB D o TE Y LO
41. 3 0 mm image a d un exemple de copie Si l cart entre l axe du papier ligne pointill e et le trait de l exemple de copie 2 est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Si el tablero de controles es de tipo LCD Ajuste de la l nea central 1 Active el modo de mantenimiento 034 Seleccione ADJ LSU OUT TIMING y presione la tecla de inicio Seleccione LSU DUP Presionar la tecla de interrupci n para imprimir el patr n de prueba en modo d plex y controlar la imagen Valor de referencia gt Dentro de 3 0 mm imagen de copia de muestra a Sila separaci n entre el centro del papel l nea de puntos y la l nea de la copia de muestra 2 es mayor que el valor de referencia realizar el siguiente ajuste Wenn es sich um eine LCD Bedienungstafel handelt Einstellen der Mittellinie 1 1 F hren Sie den Wartungsmodus 034 aus Wahlen Sie ADJ LSU OUT TIMING und dr cken Sie die Starttaste W hlen Sie LSU DUP Dr cken Sie die Unterbrechungstaste um das Testmuster im Duplexmodus auszugeben und berpr fen Sie das Bild Bezugswert Binnen 3 0 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Falls der Abstand zwischen der Mittenlinie des Papiers Punktierte Linie und der Kopienmusterlinie 2 gr Rer als der Bezugswert ist ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD Regolazione della linea di centro 1 1 Awiare il modo manutenzione 034 Selezionare ADJ
42. AADANGER High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol WARNING Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol CAUTION Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol Symbols The triangle A symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol A General warning A Warning of risk of electric shock A Warning of high temperature Q indicates a prohibited action The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol General prohibited action Disassembly prohibited eo indicates that action is required The specific action required is shown inside the symbol General action required Remove the power plug from the wall outlet GAS Always ground the copier 1 Installation Precautions WARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified Avoid multiple connections to one outlet they may cause fire or electric shock When using an extension cable always check that it is adequate for the rated current ss Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock Connecting
43. AE gt 4HTN a Wi MOFA D T VOR 1 OF TERI OR AL KROME b LR ew b RUBIN J dna ee KI aet ay b E For the image in copy example b Increase the value For the image in copy example c Decrease the value Setting range 5 0 10 0 Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0 1 mm Output the test pattern again Repeat steps 2 to 3 until the line 1 in the copy example is within the reference value lt Reference value gt Within 20 2 5 mm copy example a image Pour l image dans l exemple de copie b augmenter la valeur Pour l image dans l exemple de copie c diminuer la valeur Plage de param tres 5 0 10 0 Lorsqu on change la valeur d une unit le bord avant se d place de 0 1 mm Produisez nouveau le motif de test R p tez les op rations 2 et 3 jusqu ce que la ligne 1 dans l exemple de copie soit dans les limites de la valeur de r f rence Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 20 2 5 mm image a d un exemple de copie Para la imagen en la copia de muestra b aumentar el valor Para la imagen en la copia de muestra c disminuir el valor Gama de ajustes 5 0 10 0 Un cambio de valor en una unidad mueve el extremo gu a en 0 1 mm Das Testmuster erneut ausgeben Repetir los pasos 2 a 3 hasta que la l nea 1 en la copia de muestra se encuentre dentro del valor de referencia Va
44. CES 2 Ga 2 NA EARN D EX Fix C190 IN HDI FRI HE zi CA Js ARO MEESI ai i o 14 d FERE OD 1E v N A DIt gt FSI amp HT 2 EU ERED A 15 7 27 18 2 MTI UL 213 19 ZB IY 2 EL EXE REO A IIS 19 Uc REH E V QUE DFE DICH LRA 14 16 Secure each cassette using an M3 x 8 screw B 17 Re attach the removed components 16 Fixez chaque cassette l aide d une vis M3 x 8 B 17 Reposez les pi ces d pos es 16 Asegure cada uno de los casetes por medio de un tornillo M3 x 8 B 17 Vuelva a instalar los componentes desmontados 16 ede Kassette mit einer M3 x 8 Schraube B sichern 17 Die abgenommenen Komponenten wieder anbringen 16 Fissare ciascun cassetto usando una vite M3 x 8 B 17 Ricollegare i componenti rimossi 16 FA M3 x 8 182 B AERA HAE 17 EE PERE 16 BIE y PE UA M x 8 B 1 ATEET Do 17 RY A Le ib iin Ze cil V LEO ST ex 18 Stick cassette size labels D onto each cassette according to the paper size to be used 18 Collez les tiquettes au format cassette D sur chaque cassette en fonction du papier utilis 18 Pegue las etiquetas de tama o de los casetes D en cada uno de ellos de acuerdo al tama o de papel a utilizar 18 Kassettengr Ben Etiketten D entspr
45. CINO ONO LLOL LLOL GNDd GNDd AdZAS 6v 6 S8Md LAH BOA ON9S 1a a AdzAs za z S ON NeEMSTIALO g 9 L v 3An zNIO NZMSldlO va y s z e ENID anos ca s vie z z MSld z zinoo NIMS1dL9 98 9 ely bye noo 13dNOO1 29 4 es MSW anos 88 8 E id on les o aMdSd r nen 694 zlz uondo e anos ely MSGOL cS1d ISLA Jejunoo Kay Z lt NOAA L L bApe HW l ZLOA ZOA Hels ot lal on dIF1S NIYHN 2 1 92 d331S W3HHN molziz iler anoa ONOS A3YHS v e v s ONO N3UHS a a1 9 9 bu loi AaiWaa SSOVOZINIVAVIIY 9 6 UE SSOHOZ NSHAV T3H ix nivo S S erler ONOd Znve 2 ZAve wud xov zi zi rTowaa SX a E LE LL waemaa Aver b k ge NS ZAvz 8 9 ano ONDA 2 S an9 8 8 ON Liz 9 v Ave NO 1 L Age VMAVCe S Abz qi 9 9 ADANWAN QN9d a Ave NIVO S S S s nee LAve ano wa AD H t t Woman Ave Z DA NIYNON Ave V QNO Z Z z z GNOd MSSO4A Ave bb L L ZAVZ LLOA Foo 99A amp aly aNawoo SFO Wa aje e z vnanoo MSS91 vlelz z aawoo v vt L vawoo ELOA TZ NINOOL vWN3HL 68 7 Li AFER GNovWs3HL sa zu 5 NLASvUI za l 191 Veo Nzasvua sel z z za T Do SS ON saj S eu s anos LAYZ ASVUA ral 9 ejt i 4 I v ON zAs 3noL ea 2 Te Tal ns e axuaa TINJ3NOL zal 8 z z zw 840 v I z axLaa QN93NOL la 6 eli eg S sad onion eviev uz i 929A LAbZ LNVS IN LIT A nuainvs v
46. ERA AA 6 DUE EM SRO 9 HERO A 6 ARRET EBREA BRIE Adhering the labels 10 After cleaning with alcohol adhere operation label A G or B H of the corresponding language Apposition des tiquettes 10 Apr s avoir nettoy avec de l alcool apposez l tiquette de pr cautions Veillez ne pas laisser d originaux dans le bac d jection F l tiquette de pr cautions Face vers le Haut G et l tiquette Proc dure d utilisation H dans la langue voulue Pegado de etiquetas 10 Despu s de limpiar con alcohol pegue la etiqueta de precauci n No deje documentos en el equipo F etiqueta de precauci n Cara Arriba G y la etiqueta Procedimiento de funcionamiento H del correspondiente idioma Anbringen der Aufkleber 10 Nach der Reinigung der Klebeflachen mit Alkohol den Warnaufkleber Lassen Sie keine Originale auf dem Ger t liegen F den Warnaufkleber Vorderseite Oben G und den Aufkleber Bedienungsverfahren H der entsprechenden Sprache anbringen Applicazione delle etichette 10 Dopo avere pulito con alcol applicare l etichetta di avvertenza Non lasciare i documenti sul dispositivo F l etichetta di avvertenza Faccia Ins G e l etichetta Procedure di funzionamento H redatte nella lingua corrispondente Ws EE 10 FT RUE D EE RAE G D gt 2JLORRU tt lt 10 FV a iE MT 2 Sab MEZ v AG EFAN BH Z die o AICA
47. Figure 1 2 5 Tape Scanner pin Figure 1 2 6 1 2 5 2KL 2KK Install other optional devices 1 Install the optional devices duplex unit and or printer kit etc as necessary Install the toner container Open the front cover 2 Hold the toner container vertically and tap the upper part five times or more Turn the toner container upside down and tap the upper part five times or more 3 Shake the toner container up and down five times or more Turn the toner container upside down and shake it five times or more 4 Shake the toner container approximately five times in the horizontal direction to stir toner 1 2 6 Toner container Figure 1 2 7 n 1 1 container L D D Figure 1 2 8 Toner container Figure 1 2 9 2KL 2KK 5 Gently push the toner container into the machine Push the container all the way into the machine until it locks in place Toner container Figure 1 2 10 Install the waste toner box 1 Install the waste toner box in the machine 2 Close the front cover Waste toner box Figure 1 2 11 1 2 7 2KL 2KK Load paper 1 Load paper in the cassette Connect the power cord 1 2 C
48. HINWEIS Wenn 2 oder mehr Kassetten gestapelt werden sind zuerst alle Kassetten zu stapeln bevor man die Haupteinheit auf die Kassetten setzt possibile impilare fino a tre cassettoni Per i modelli MFP da 22 ppm non possono essere impilati pi di due cassettoni NOTIFICA Quando si impilano 2 o pi cassettoni assicurarsi che tutti i cassettoni siano impilati prima di posare il corpo principale sui cassettoni RE HS MAR 22 ppm MFP HI HT HES 2 74g HE HS 2 Dik 2 NU LEA MARIAE CERE Tren ara Wey REX 3 BE CA he MFP Z Y 277 MERE D 22 BOIL 2 Bee CE aa FY HE UE HEY he 2 BU ERT BEN ACET DAY be HAT ABE UC 5 Aio THE Place the main body directly down onto the cassettes by aligning the positioning insertion sections 2 of the top cassette with the positioning pins 1 at the rear of the bottom cassette A only when stacking 2 or more cassettes When placing the main body on the cassettes take care not to hit the main body against the cassette pins or ground plate Placez directement le corps principal sur les cassettes en alignant les sections d insertion de positionnement 2 de la cassette sup rieure avec les goupilles de positionnement 1 l arri re de la cassette A dans le cas d un empilage de 2 cassettes ou plus uniquement Lorsque le corps principal est plac sur les cassettes attention ne pas le cogner le corps principal contre les goupilles ou la plaque d
49. Innerhalb 1 5 Simplexkopie innerhalb 2 0 mm Duplexkopie Simplexkopie innerhalb 2 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 4 0 mm innerhalb 4 0 mm innerhalb 2 0 mm innerhalb 3 0 mm Bei Verwendung des Originals f r die Einstellung k nnen die automatischen Einstellungen f r Vergr erung Vorderkanten Timing und Mittellinie gleichzeitig durchgef hrt werden Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 21 lt lt Controllo di immagine dal DP Verificare che la regolazione avvenga nel seguente ordine Altrimenti la regolazione non potr essere seguita correttamente Per controllare l angolo del bordo principale vedere pagina 8 Per controllare l angolo del bordo di uscita vedere pagina 11 Per controllare l ingrandimento vedere pagina 15 Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale vedere pagina 17 Per controllare la linea centrale vedere pagina 19 Valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento Copia simplex entro 3 0 mm Copia duplex entro 4 0 mm Copia simplex entro 3 0 mm Copia duplex entro 4 0 mm Entro 1 5 Copia simplex entro 2 0 mm Copia duplex entro 2 0 mm Copia simplex entro 2 0 mm Copia duplex entro 3 0 mm Quando si utilizza l originale per la regolazione la regolazione automatica dell ingrandimento della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e della linea centrale
50. NC LAMPN PGND PGND 24V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to INPWB 24 V DC power output to INPWB Not used EL On Off Ground Ground Connected to the power source PWB left cover safety switch and front cover safety switch 24V 24V 24V1 PGND 24VIL1 24VIL1 PGND 24VIL2 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24 V DC power input from PSPWB 24 V DC power input from PSPWB 24 V DC power output to LCSSW Ground 24 V DC power input from LCSSW 24 V DC power output to FCSSW Ground 24 V DC power input from FCSSW YC18 Connected to the power source PWB MHREM SLEEP SHREM SGND RELAYREM ZCROSS 24V2 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 24 V DC FH M On Off Sleep signal On Off FH S On Off Ground Relay signal Zero cross signal 24 V DC power input from PSPWB Connected to the paper feeder 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 PGND 24V1 24 V DC Ground 24 V DC power output to paper feeder 2 3 7 2KL 2KK Connector Voltage Description YC27 Connected to the CCD PWB AN OO Ud A O N ci E AN ES 0035 2X a A O N o O 5V NC TG GND RS GND CP GND PHY2 GND GND Vout1 Vout2 GND NC CCDPWR 5VDC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 12 V DC 5 V DC power output to CCDPWB Not used CCD c
51. Not used Not used Connector Signal Voltage 2KL 2KK Description YC6 Connected to the drive motor and drum motor ON DOA pa WD 24V2 PGND MDMREM MDMCLK 3 3V MDMRDY 3 3V NC 24V2 PGND DDMREM DDMCLK PGND DDMRDY PGND NC 0 24 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC power output to DM Ground DM On Off DM clock signal 3 3 V DC power output to DM DM ready signal 3 3 V DC power output to DM Not used 24 V DC power output to DRM Ground DRM On Off DRM clock signal Ground DRM ready signal Ground Not used Connected to the cas sette PWB 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 N N a da da lo 2 OOO DAN DOA Aa O N Oo TEMP HMCLK1 HMCLK2 HUMID C1PWSWN C1PDSWN 5V2 TONEPY SGND BPWSW REGSWN ICLTN IPPSWN BPPESW SGND BSOLN FCLTN REGCLN 24V1 24V1 3 3V Analog 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse Analog 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 5 VDC Analog 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 3 3 V DC HUMS detection signal HUMS clock signal HUMS clock signal HUMS detection signal PWSW On Off PSW On Off 5 V DC power output to CPWB TCS detection signal Ground MPPWSW On Off RSW On Off DUPFCL On Off DUPPCSW On Off MPPSW On Off Ground MPSOL On Off PFCL On Off
52. TUI 4 WPA 7 M 8 PUMA DP A ELE FARE CB ARO EZ 8 OD FIR 2 CHU ALES 6 ATV RYO HITS AXN YOFII 7 8 DEED fiv v b B amp DP ATE A 2 5 E CO RL IIB IC HEY Er v RBA HEREDA S LE 13 14 3mm 4mm Make a proof copy again Repeat steps 1 to 6 until line 2 of copy example shows the following the reference values lt Reference value gt For simplex copying Within 3 0 mm For duplex copying Within 4 0 mm Effectuez nouveau une copie de test R p tez les tapes 1 6 jusqu ce que la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de r f rence suivantes Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 3 0 mm max Copie recto verso 4 0 mm max Haga otra copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 6 hasta que la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist lt Bezugswert gt F r Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm F r Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la linea 2 dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento Valore di riferi
53. al INHO aMdodv ig la9 N1noai Izod svi s o2 z18 118 As aNalao anosa iv 9 oue anos 1 018 68 NLAS GNOS NYa9Id evi 2 293 EE Nad z z 88 8 QNOS AS NAG397d zv 8 z622z2 3 Ls el L 98 58 GNOS AS ea NA199 1d CE 6 ues mus DA uondo za 1a ANOS AS T 15 Jeu elv las dinoa7 ARR i i ZIVILIV QNOS NSN3 SAMIAD nee E OLV 6W NYIDIAZO NADSAZO davosum Ze 8VILV ASASAZI OSDIAZO ISUMDIOS vis 9visv IS93dzordlasdzo NISYS ONOS 9 2 IVIEV NICOMSVINOd NICDI IdINVS VIL NLSHAZO NIGOGd TIA SEDA zas s s ano L L anod 130108091 v v MSSH zino z z NMSLX3 anos MSI Lino z e e NMSdas Ne Ice A L v v vn Ninsov YLA 612A zig on z ia ON ora ON sona on ele r 6a anos MSGO elc S ga NMSdO SNO s pr 9 2a bns ES 3882882 53528 ele 2 9a anos Dh MSdH z z 8 sa NMSdH z plo 6 bajbns aMdO LOA NONVOS NENVOS 01 6 01 6 NONVOS NENVOS ele ot ea anos NZNVOS NENVOS 8 2 8 1 NENVOSINENVOS saso z z LL Za NMS TONO NPNVOS NSNVOS 9 s 9 NFNVOS NSNVOS kl zi La vas NONVOS NZNVOS vit vIe NONVOS NZNVOS NHON3ZRS AS 2 1 z NIOYIZNE AS 0EDA Aver L z Lev Lnbz ZOA 311 tt e ov anod ano z ev anod 00311037 81 21 Le oaa viam z e s av vas 203VE031 91 51 ely zax vega AMdIN vaa sas viet s 9 vaa vsaa1 194 a o oF 90314037 21 11 1 8 903714031 uondo a st s 8a316031 01 6 6 01 8037 6031 Josseooud
54. and left cover 1 9 Ouvrez l unit d entrainement 11 et connectez le connecteur 12 de l unit recto verso A au corps principal 10 Glissez le guide c ble C dans le verrou 13 puis dans le verrou 14 de l unit principale 11 Remettez les pieces enlevees a leurposition d origine 12 Fermez l unit d entrainement 11 et le couvercle gauche 1 9 Abra la unidad transportadora 11 y conecte el conector 12 de la unidad duplex A en el cuerpo principal 10 Encajar la gu a para el cable C en el pestillo 13 y a continuaci n en el pestillo 14 de la unidad principal 11 Vuelva a instalar las piezas desmontadasen sus posiciones originales 12 Cerrar la unidad transportadora 11 y la cubierta izquierda 1 9 Die F rdereinheit ffnen 11 und den Steckverbinder 12 der Duplex Einheit A an die Haupteinheit anschlieBen 10 Schieben Sie die Kabelf hrung C in die Raste 13 und dann die Raste 14 an der Haupteinheit 11 Die entfernten Teile wieder an ihrenursprunglichen Positionen anbringen 12 Schlie en Sie die F rdereinheit 11 und die linke Abdeckung 1 9 Aprire l unit convogliatore 11 e collegare il connettore 12 dell unit duplex A al corpo principale 10 Inserire la guida cavi C nel fermo 13 e quindi il fermo 14 sull unit principale 11 Rimontare le parti rimosse nelle loroposizioni originali 12 Chiudere l unit convogliatore 11 e il coperchio sinistro 1
55. gt Cantidad de cambio de escala Aprox 0 5 mm Einstellen des DP 1 Den DP ffnen und die zwei Einstellschrauben 3 des rechten Scharniers l sen 2 Die Position des DP einstellen F r Kopienmuster d Den DP absenken F r Kopienmuster e Den DP anheben gt Anderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich Ca 0 5 mm Regolazione del DP 1 Aprire il DP e allentare le due viti di regolazione 3 della cerniera destra 2 Regolare la posizione del DP Per un esempio di copia d Muovere il DP verso il basso Per un esempio di copia e Muovere il DP verso l alto gt Variazione graduale Circa 0 5 mm AO p Realice las tareas descritas en los pasos 7 y 8 de la p gina 4 Quite brevemente la plancha de original B de la unidad principal DP A y a continuaci n vuelva a colocar la plancha de original B de acuerdo al siguiente procedimiento Die zwei Einstellschrauben 3 wieder festziehen Die Arbeiten der Schritte 7 und 8 auf Seite 4 ausf hren Die Originalmatte B kurz aus der DP Haupteinheit A herausnehmen und dann die Originalmatte B wieder mit folgenden Schritten anbringen Stringere le due viti di regolazione 3 Effettuare i lavori riportati nei punti 7 e 8 a pagina 4 Rimuovere temporaneamente il coprioriginale B dall unit principale del DP A e quindi ricollocare il coprioriginale B seguendo i passi 183 DP 1 FT FF DP AS 2 AU 3 2 AAS DP AL ELS J
56. on the contact glass Press the start key and make a test copy at 100 magnification Remove the contact glass Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame For copy example 1 move the frame in the direction of s the image correct the white arrow lt gt For copy example 2 move the frame in the direction of the black arrow m End Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 5 56 Screws Figure 1 5 57 1 5 33 2KL 2KK 1 5 4 Drum section 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unit Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit Cautions Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit Procedure 1 2 3 Open the front cover and left cover Remove the waste toner box and toner container Remove the screw holding the developing release lever Pull the developing release lever and release the developing unit Remove the screw and the connector and then remove the drum unit Replace the drum unit and refit all the removed parts when the periodic maintenance perform maintenance mode U251 clearing the maintenance count see page 1 3 44 1 5 34 Developing release lever Figure 1 5 58 Figure 1 5 59 2 Detaching and refitting the drum separat
57. siinseriscano sui nottolini 9 MER E TASCA I EE ESR I8 fe TARER AA FI GENO MA 6 mmy B ARIAS N 7 KE EME RAMO AA UT HO AE 8 4 Te 9 Hb ES E B 7 A cv Pad 7 Fit the projections 10 into the duplex unit A 8 Secure the duplex unit A with two M3 x 08 screws B 7 Ins rez les saillies 10 dans l unit recto verso A 8 Fixez l unit recto verso A avec les deux vis M3 x 08 B 7 Instalar los resaltos 10 en la unidad d plex A 8 Asegure la unidad duplex A con los dos tornillos M3 x 08 B 7 Setzen Sie die Vorspr nge 10 in die Duplex Einheit A ein 8 Die Duplex Einheit A mit den zwei Schrauben M3 x 08 B befestigen 7 Inserire le sporgenze 10 nell unit Duplex A 8 Fissare l unit duplex A a mezzo delle due viti M3 x 08 B 7 XE BB 2 10 Ze SE TA A TA o 8 JH24 M3 x 08 24 B A fal MUS A la TORA 10 me b A MIA do 8 EAM x 08 B 2 4 Ciim y b A AMES ax o 9 Open the conveyer unit 11 and connect the connector 12 of the duplex unit A to the main body 10 Slot the wire guide C into latch 13 and then latch 14 on the main unit 11 Reattach the removed parts to their original positions 12 Close the conveyer unit 11
58. und berpr fen Sie das Druckbild lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 2 0 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Falls der Abstand zwischen der Mittenlinie des Papiers Punktierte Linie und der Kopienmusterlinie 2 gr er als der Bezugswert ist ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello a 7 segmenti Regolazione della linea di centro 1 1 Awiare il modo manutenzione 034 Premere il tasto di modo della qualit dell immagine finch Text e Cassetto del 2 livello Premere il tasto di esposizione finch exp3 non si illumina modo 3 Cassetto del 3 livello Premere il tasto di esposizione finch exp4 non si illumina modo 4 Cassetto del 4 livello Premere il tasto di esposizione finch exp5 non si illumina modo 5 Premere il tasto di interruzione per stampare i modelli di prova e controllare l immagine stampata Valore di riferimento Entro 2 0 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a Se lo scostamento fra il centro della carta linea tratteggiata e la linea dell esempio di copia 2 maggiore rispetto al valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione REHIA 7 seg BUR CFD RAT 1 Jr HE BEN 034 HI PR IEC RAE JL T ED A A REED risu CH 2 AA FAURE BERE exp3 x RI 3 58 A RICE EEG expt RI 4 SR UMAR LPR SEAL MERE Mc M Bit 5 DI RE ONCE SESSI iA E UR RE TAE E TN E lt B75 gt m LIA Ca EE SEE E
59. 1 1 Ex cutez le mode de maintenance 034 S lectionnez ADJ LSU OUT TIMING et appuyez sur la touche de d part copie Cassette de 2 me niveau S lectionnez LSU T1 Cassette de 3 me niveau S lectionnez LSU T2 Cassette de 4 me niveau S lectionnez LSU T3 Appuyez sur la touche d interruption pour imprimer un motif de test et v rifiez l mage imprim e Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 2 0 mm image a d un exemple de copie Si l cart entre l axe du papier ligne pointill e et le trait de l exemple de copie 2 est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Si el tablero de controles es de tipo LCD Ajuste de la l nea central 1 Active el modo de mantenimiento 034 Seleccione ADJ LSU OUT TIMING y presione la tecla de inicio Casete de 2 nivel Seleccione LSU T1 Casete de 3 nivel Seleccione LSU T2 Casete de 4 nivel Seleccione LSU T3 Presione la tecla de interrupci n para imprimir un patr n de prueba y compruebe la imagen impresa Valor de referencia Dentro de 2 0 mm imagen de copia de muestra a Si la separaci n entre el centro del papel l nea de puntos y la l nea de la copia de muestra 2 es mayor que el valor de referencia realizar el siguiente ajuste Wenn es sich um eine LCD Bedienungstafel handelt Einstellen der Mittellinie 1 1 F hren Sie den Wartungsmodus 034 aus Wahlen Sie ADJ LSU OUT TIMING und dr cken Sie die Starttaste Kassette 2 Stufe W hlen
60. 2 BEBO ERTI 7 ea ey ICH LIAR ERI AT FE NITTI HEY bLBAICAS MEANS 3 RAR a DP OJEGRT 7 MIE Y ALLA RIE EBS DM ES LV CV ATAR 2 4 Fifi a En EFI MOT RITA DIN CU 25898 A 38 2h 5 GER MA VAR RAS o BL RE RES LOWE KI 720 CA DP OBS SESR amp da 72 2 o SERIES RO Y C Av T VER lt lt Checking image from the DP gt gt Be sure to adjust in the following order If not the adjustment cannot be performed correctly For checking the angle of leading edge see page 8 For checking the angle of trailing edge see page 11 For checking the magnification see page 15 For checking the leading edge timing see page 17 For checking the center line see page 19 When using the original for adjustment automatic adjustment of lt Reference value gt Simplex copying within 3 0 mm Duplex copying within 4 0 mm lt Reference value gt Simplex copying within 3 0 mm Duplex copying within 4 0 mm Reference value Within 1 5 Reference value Simplex copying within 2 0 mm Duplex copying within 2 0 mm Reference value Simplex copying within 2 0 mm Duplex copying within 3 0 mm magnification leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a time For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment see page 21 lt lt V rification de l image sur le DP Veillez effectuer le r glage en proc dant dans l
61. 2 flashing Transfer charging output OFF timing 0 to 255 Exp 3 flashing Transfer charging output ON timing 0 to 255 O AAC Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit Separation control voltage 0 to 255 Tum Exp 2 lit Separation charging output ON timing 0 to 255 O ET Text Exp 3 lit Separation charging output OFF timing 0 to 255 Exp 4 lit Separation control mode 0 to 3 o Off 9 On 3 Change the setting using the zoom keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the interrupt key Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 35 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U110 Checking the drum count Description Displays the drum counts for checking Purpose To check the drum status Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Setting range Initial setting Exp 1 First 3 digits 000 to 999 000 Exp 2 Last 3 digits 000 to 999 000 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 36 Initial setting for the developing unit Description Replenishes toner to the developing unit to a certain level from th
62. 2 0 AAG Be GER GAZ EAN ZR C2 MEA E INCA MIET Na AE IREI SRILA Tseg 4 TOBA 41434 VAR 1 RVFIVAET F U34 TTS ue PEA TAPE RUFE GG SUD 71 72 bt gt vt2EHA ARIES oxp3 ZAT EtA F3 DE y b 3 BEA WERK exp amp AIT EtA E RA HEY b 4 BEA REX expo amp KIT SES E F5 58 0 AA EL TZ RS HI UT MRE MEET EME AE L7 a iB KDE 2 BBD LA EPA TF VOR 2 OF Yu Heft o5 a 1 10 2 Omm LAPS Photo non si illuminano gruppo 2 ROBE ITS Aw ELT b ERORA For the image in copy example b Increase the value For the image in copy example c Decrease the value Setting range 7 0 10 0 Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0 1 mm Output the test pattern again Repeat steps 2 to 3 until the line 1 in the copy example is within the reference value lt Reference value gt Within 2 0 mm copy example a image Pour l image dans l exemple de copie b augmenter la valeur Pour l image dans l exemple de copie c diminuer la valeur Plage de param tres 7 0 10 0 Lorsqu on change la valeur d une unit le bord avant se d place de 0 1 mm Produisez nouveau le motif de test R p tez les op rations 2 et 3 jusqu ce que la ligne 1 dans l exemple de copie soit dans les limites de la valeur de r f rence Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 2 0 mm image a d un exemple de copie
63. 2 et 3 jusqu ce que la ligne 1 dans l exemple de copie soit dans les limites de la valeur de r f rence Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 3 0 mm image a d un exemple de copie Para la imagen en la copia de muestra b aumentar el valor Para la imagen en la copia de muestra c disminuir el valor Gama de ajustes 7 0 10 0 Un cambio de valor en una unidad mueve el extremo gu a en 0 1 mm Vuelva a hacer una copia de ensayo Repetir los pasos 2 a 3 hasta que la l nea 1 en la copia de muestra se encuentre dentro del valor de referencia lt Valor de referencia gt Dentro de 3 0 mm imagen de copia de muestra a F r das Bild im Kopienmuster b Den Wert erh hen F r das Bild im Kopienmuster c Den Wert verringern Einstellbereich 7 0 10 0 Durch Andern des Werts um eins wird die Vorderkante um 0 1 mm verschoben Machen Sie eine erneute Probekopie Die Schritte 2 und 3 wiederholen bis die Linie 1 im Kopienmuster innerhalb des Bezugswerts liegt lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 3 0 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Per l immagine nell esempio di copia b aumentare il valore Per l immagine nell esempio di copia c ridurre il valore Gamma di impostazione 7 0 10 0 Cambiando il valore di una unit si sposta il bordo di entrata di 0 1 mm Fare di nuovo una copia di prova Ripetere i passi da 2 a 3 finch la linea 1 nell esempio di copia non sia entro il valore di riferimento Valor
64. 220 V Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh sive et ou les mat riaux de rembourrage des pi ces fournies F Pel cula G Etiqueta A especificaciones de 120 V especificaciones de 220 V 240 V 1 H Etiqueta B especificaciones de 220 V MOV 1 Asegurese de despegar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas Pu PIMS ear ass 1 G Aufkleber A f r 120 V Spezifikationen f r 220 V 240 V Spezifikationen 1 H Aufkleber B f r 220 V 240 V pezifikationen 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder D mpfungsmaterial vollst ndig von den mitgelieferten Teilen EF Pelicula er Rete 1 G Etichetta A specifiche solo per 120V specifiche solo per 220 V 240 V esteri 1 H Etichetta B specifiche solo per 220 V 240 Viana iaa 1 Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite F JA 1 G ERZ ACI20V JUR fh 220V 240V SUP 1 H ER B 220V 240V XR PI RD 1 ae EE i AE EN ZIA By TATI A EE ji G FAVA 120V EEk 220V 240V FER 1 H 7 4 B 220V 240V FH 1 FEAR in C Fd 7 GEB AMICOS EF RFO AE L Procedure Before installing the document processor be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off and unplug the power cable from the wall
65. 3 DP leading edge registration 32 to 32 0 2 mm second side Exp 4 DP trailing edge registration 42 to 32 0 2 mm second side Press the interrupt key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Change the setting value using the zoom keys For copy example 1 decrease the value of exp 1 For copy example 2 increase the value of exp 1 Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 12 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U071 U404 P 1 3 52 Completion Press the stop clear key while a selection item is displayed The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U072 Adjusting the DP center line Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure Description Setting Change in indicator range value per step Exp 1 DP center line first side 6 6 to 6 6 0 15 mm Exp 2 DP center line second side 3 0 to 3 0 0 15 mm Press the interrupt key Place an o
66. 40 C 104 F and at a relative humidity not higher than 9096 RH Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum Do not touch the drum surface with any object Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil clean it 3 Toner Store the toner container in a cool dark place Avoid direct light and high humidity 1 5 1 2KL 2KK 4 How to tell a genuine Kyocera Mita toner container As a means of brand protection the Kyocera Mita toner container utilizes an optical security technology to enable visual validation A validation viewer is required to accomplish this Hold the validation viewer over the left side part of the brand protection seal on the toner container Through each window of the validation viewer the left side part of the seal should be seen as follows A black colored band when seen through the left side window A shiny or gold colored band when seen through the right side window The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera Mita branded toner container otherwise it is a coun terfeit See through See through the left window the right window O marking Smarking Validation viewer Validation viewer t r Q a 2 a Frort side ANANTERA AW ERA Brand protection seal Brand protection seal A black colored band when A shiny or gold colored band when Seen through the lef
67. 5 M4 x 6 chrome TP screws P N B4A04060 Two 2 M4 x 10 chrome TP screws P N B4A04100 Supplied parts of key counter wire set Key counter wire P N 302KK46300 Two 2 Wire saddles P N One 1 Edging P N 2KL 2KK Procedure 1 Tum the main power switch off and unplug M4 x 6 screw Key counter retainer the power cable from the wall outlet B4A04060 A sl qu 2 Fitthe key counter socket assembly to the x BAAD4060 key counter retainer using two screws and E nut 7BC1003055 H01 SI ES Key counter 3 Fit the key counter mount to the key counter lt IE mount cover using two screws 3066060041 9 M4x6 screw d 4 Fit the key counter retainer to the key B4A04060 JY o counter mount using two screws Si ate m i NE Ss N M3 x 6 flat head screws 7BB003306H M4 x 6 screw B4A04060 Key counter socket assembly 3029236241 Key counter cover 3066060011 Figure 1 2 13 1 2 11 2KL 2KK 5 Remove five screws and remove the rear cover 6 Cut out the aperture on the right middle cover using nippers 1 2 12 Rear cover Figure 1 2 14 Aperture N Mi Right middle cover Figure 1 2 15 7 Fit the wire saddle and the edging to machine 8 Pass the key counter wire through the wire saddle edging and hole of the wire guide 2KL 2KK Edging Wire saddle be Figure 1 2 16 Wire saddle Key coun
68. A de HIGH FULL Remarque Si le IB 110 n est pas utilis laisser le commutateur DIP en position HIGH 2 Mover el interruptor DIP 3 de la tarjeta de impresora A de la posici n HIGH a la posici n FULL Nota Si no va a utilizar el IB 110 el interruptor DIP debe permanecer en la posici n HIGH 3 Connect the connector which has a ferrite core of the power cable E supplied with IB 110 to the printer board and connect the other side to IB 110 4 Connect the USB cable F supplied with IB 110 to the printer board and connect the other side to IB 110 Note Be sure to use the supplied power cable and USB cable 3 Brancher le connecteur qui poss de un noyau en ferrite du cordon d alimentation E fourni avec l IB 110 sur la carte d imprimante et brancher l autre c t l IB 110 4 Brancher le c ble USB F fourni avec l IB 110 sur la carte d imprimante et brancher l autre c t l IB 110 Remarque Veiller utiliser le cordon d alimentation et le c ble USB fournis 3 Conecte el conector con un n cleo de ferrita del cable el ctrico E entregado con la IB 110 a la tarjeta de impresora y conecte el otro lado a la IB 110 4 Conecte el cable USB F entregado con la IB 110 a la tarjeta de impresora y conecte el otro lado a la IB 110 Nota Aseg rese de utilizar el cable el ctrico y el cable USB entregados Installieren der USB Schnittstell
69. Check if YC8 7 on the main engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U100 is run If not replace the main engine PWB 9 No developing bias is output The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective high voltage PWB Check if developing bias is output when CN1 9 on the high volt age PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Defective main engine PWB Check if YC8 9 on the main engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run If not replace the main engine PWB 1 4 29 2KL 2KK Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 10 Transfer charging is not performed The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective high voltage PWB Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1 4 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Defective main engine PWB Check if YC8 4 on the main engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run If not replace the main engine PWB 11 The original size is not detected cor rectly Ori
70. D 2 EX D2ZAENU IUS 3 Insert the pins D into the hinge holes 2 of DP A and slide the DP A toward the front side to install it A B5 RE II BERI 19 TY IL Bi IA AS 4 Fix the DP A using four M4 x 14 screws E Right One Left Three 3 Ins rez les goupilles D dans les orifices de charni re 2 du DP A puis faites glisser le DP A vers l avant pour l installer 4 Fixez le DP A l aide de quatre vis M4 x 14 E C t droit Une C t gauche Trois 3 Inserte los pasadores D en los orificios de bisagra 2 del DP A y deslice el DP A hacia el lado frontal para instalar 4 Fije el DP A utilizando cuatro tornillos M4 x 14 E Derecho Uno Izquierdo Tres 3 Die R ndelschrauben D in die Scharnierl cher 2 des DP A einf hren und den DP A zum Installieren nach vorn schieben 4 Den DP A mit vier M4 x 14 Schrauben E befestigen Rechts Eine Links Drei 3 Inserire i perni D nei fori della cerniera 2 del DP A e fare scorrere il DP A verso il lato anteriore per installarlo 3 ARE D di DP A B GEL 2 TER HUTA E DP A 3 DP ATK A DEV VHBOR 2 LES D E B IZA 71 FLTROFANTA RA LDP A4 A 4 m 4 Fissare il DP A utilizzando quattro viti M4 x 14 E Destra Una Sinistra Tre 4 4 42 MA X 14 E ME DP A dii 1 Zl 3 4 CA MA X 14 E 4 RT DP A MET 5 48181 1 AS Fe f
71. Display the service call code to clear the count 2 Press the reset key The count is cleared Clearing all service call counts 1 Display CLE using the exposure adjustment keys 2 Press the start key The counts are cleared Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 55 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U905 1 3 56 Checking counts by optional devices Description Displays the counts of DP or finisher Purpose To check the use of DP and finisher Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the count group No to be checked using the image mode selection key 3 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Image mode LED Exposure group No indicator Copy quantity display count value 1 O T AR Text amp Photo Exp 1 First 3 digits of the no of single sided originals O ff lPhoto that has passed through the DP fT Text Exp 2 Last 3 digits of the no of single sided originals that has passed through the DP O T Text amp Photo Exp 1 First 3 digits of the no of double sided originals GalPhoto that has passed through the DP CT Text Exp 2 Last 3 digits of the no of double sided originals that has passed through the DP Off 9 On Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Descrip
72. ITS Checking the operation 1 To check the machine operation prepare an A3 size original a where four lines b are drawn 20 mm from the edges and one line c is drawn at the center 2 Connect the power plug to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on Load A3 paper into the 1st level cassette 3 Set the original a on the DP original table and run a proof copy Check the operation and the copy example 4 If the gap between the original a and the copy example exceeds the reference value perform adjustments For the procedure see the following pages Before checking image from the DP check and adjust image from the machine For details see the service manual of the machine V rification du fonctionnement 1 Pour v rifier le fonctionnement de la machine pr parez un original de format A3 a sur lequel quatre lignes b ont t trac es 20 mm des bords et sur lequel une ligne c a t trac e au centre 2 Ins rer la fiche d alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension 3 Placez l original a dans le DP et effectuez une copie de test pour v rifier le fonctionnement et l exemple de copie 4 Si l cart entre l original a et l exemple de copie est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez les r glages n cessaires Pour la marche suivre reportez vous aux pages suivantes Avant de v rifier l image sur le DP v rifier et r
73. OK key Setting range 1 lightest to 7 darkest Text photo mode density adjustment Adjusts the density to be used when text and photo original is selected for the image mode 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 08 Text Ph Dens and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the OK key Setting range 1 lightest to 7 darkest Photo density adjustment Adjusts the density to be used when photo original is selected for the image mode 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 09 Photo Density and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the OK key Setting range 1 lightest to 7 darkest Text density adjustment Adjusts the density to be used when text original is selected for the image mode 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 10 Text Density and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the OK key Setting range 1 lightest to 7 darkest Processing to reduce black lines Reduces black lines that may be caused when the DP is used 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 11 ReduceStreaks and press the OK key 3 Select OFF Weak or Strong and press the OK key Photo processing Select the image processing method for photo origi nals 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 12 OptimezePhoto and press the OK key 3 Select ErrorDiffusion or Dither Matrix a
74. PWB Defective main engine PWB Check if YC16 4 on the main engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U061 is run If not replace the main engine PWB 3 Image is too light Copy example Causes 2KL 2KK Check procedures corrective measures Insufficient toner If the display shows the message requesting toner replenish ment replace the container The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Defective transfer charging Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable output Defective high voltage PWB Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1 4 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Defective main engine PWB Check if YC8 4 on the main engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the main engine PWB Dirty main charger wire Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 36 Dirty main charger grid 4 Background is visible Clean the grid or if it is extremely dirty replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 36 Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures The developing bias voltage is not properly Replace the high voltage PWB and check for correct opera
75. Para la imagen en la copia de muestra b aumentar el valor Para la imagen en la copia de muestra c disminuir el valor Gama de ajustes 7 0 10 0 Un cambio de valor en una unidad mueve el extremo gu a en 0 1 mm Das Testmuster erneut ausgeben Repetir los pasos 2 a 3 hasta que la l nea 1 en la copia de muestra se encuentre dentro del valor de referencia lt Valor de referencia gt Dentro de 2 0 mm imagen de copia de muestra a F r das Bild im Kopienmuster b Den Wert erh hen F r das Bild im Kopienmuster c Den Wert verringern Einstellbereich 7 0 10 0 Durch Andern des Werts um eins wird die Vorderkante um 0 1 mm verschoben Das Testmuster erneut ausgeben Die Schritte 2 und 3 wiederholen bis die Linie 1 im Kopienmuster innerhalb des Bezugswerts liegt lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 2 0 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Per l immagine nell esempio di copia b aumentare il valore Per l immagine nell esempio di copia c ridurre il valore Gamma di impostazione 7 0 10 0 Durch Andern des Werts um eins wird die Vorderkante um 0 1 mm verschoben Eseguire di nuovo i modelli di prova Ripetere i passi da 2 a 3 finch la linea 1 nell esempio di copia non sia entro il valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento Entro 2 0 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a AGI RA BURMA gu 7 0 10 0 ALES 0 Imm PIETRA Ro RENE 2 amp 3 HEM ge S A AR 1 AY BA AFS EE AY lt 2
76. RBIS IEG YT VOM 2 SIUS E CEFA 2 AR VRT dili 1 5 LIA Checking the leading edge timing Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment Reference value For simplex copying Within 2 0 mm For duplex copying Within 2 0 mm V rification de la synchronisation du bord avant V rifiez l cart entre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 2 0 mm max Copie recto verso 2 0 mm max Cambio de la sincronizaci n de borde superior Verifique la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra Si la superaci n supera el valor de referencia haga el siguiente ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 2 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 2 0 mm Uberpr fen des Vorderkanten Timings Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters pr fen berschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren lt Bezugswert gt F r Simplexkopie Innerhalb 2 0 mm F r Duplexkopie Innerhalb 2 0 mm Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale Controllare la differenza tra la linea 1 dell origina
77. RCL On Off 24 V DC power output to CPWB 24 V DC power output to CPWB 3 3 V DC power output to CPWB 2 3 5 2KL 2KK Connector Signal Voltage Description YC8 Connected to the high voltage PWB AN O Ud as OON O 24V2 24V2 THVADJC THVDRN MHVADJC SHVDRN MHVDRN SHVISELN DHVCLKC PGND PGND o o ooo ooo o 24V DC 24V DC Analog 0 3 3 V DC Analog 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 24 V DC power output to HVTPWB 24 V DC power output to HVTPWB Transfer high voltage control signal Transfer high voltage On Off Main charger high voltage control signal Separation high voltage On Off Main charger high voltage On Off Separation high voltage switching signal Developing bias clock signal Ground Ground Connected to the paper feeder paper size length switch and toner con tainer detec tion switch WU0UUWOUOUuwvoOoo gt gt gt gt gt S gt O6ER6CO gt 0 JO dl BR N O WON DO KR ON a LOPSRDY LOPSEL2 LOPSEL1 LOPSELO LOPSCLK LOPSDI LOPSDO SGND 5V2PF SGND 5V2PF C1PLSW3N C1PLSW2N SGND C1PLSW1N TCONDET SGND NC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 5 VDC 5 VDC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC Paper feeder ready signal Paper feeder select signal 2 Paper feeder select signal 1 Paper feeder select signal 0 Paper feeder clock signal Paper feeder ser
78. Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Image mode LED Exposure C tity displ t val group No indicator opy quantity display count value 1 O erii Text amp Photo Exp i A3 display the A3 size O f amp Photo Exp 2 li First 3 digits of A3 size copy count ET Text Exp 3 li Last 3 digits of A3 size copy count Exp 4 li Clearing the count CLE O Tl ff Text amp Photo Exp 1 li b4 display the B4 size O falPhoto Exp 2 li First 3 digits of B4 size copy count ET Text Exp 3 li Last 3 digits of B4 size copy count Exp 4 li Clearing the count CLE O Ir Ci Text amp Photo Exp 1 li A4 display the A4 size O falPhoto Exp 2 li First 3 digits of A4 size copy count CI Text Exp 3 li Last 3 digits of A4 size copy count Exp 4 li Clearing the count CLE T Text amp Photo Exp 1 li b5 display the B5 size O Photo Exp 2 li First 3 digits of FOLIO size copy count OC e Text Exp 3 li Last 3 digits of FOLIO size copy count Exp 4 li Clearing the count CLE T 45 Text amp Photo Exp 1 li A5 display the A5 size 0 AF Photo Exp 2 li First 3 digits of Legal size copy count Text Exp 3 li Last 3 digits of Legal size copy count Exp 4 li Clearing the count CLE Exp 1 li A6 display the A6 size Exp 2 li First 3 digits of Letter size copy count Exp 3 li Last 3 digits of Letter size copy count Exp 4 li Clearing the count
79. Simplexkopie Innerhalb 2 0 mm F r Duplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia Ripetere i passi da 1 a 2 fino a che la linea 2 dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento Valore di riferimento Per copia simplex Entro 2 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 3 0 mm PURA TOMA SERT o SGAE 2 MEE 2 ABRA lt A gt Ram UAL T E ETAPRIUABIID EZFAIMRO E AAA Y 2 BEENDET Al 2N kT FLYER gt HORA E 2 0mm LAP Mm OBA 3 Omm LIP x E 149 1mm 149 x 5mm 74 1mm Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment Before performing this adjustment be sure to adjust the angle of leading edge and the angle of trailing edge see pages 8 and 11 1 Set the mode to Maintenance Mode U076 and cut off the trailing edge of the adjustment original Then place it on the DP main unit original table with the side on which F and R are printed facing upwards 2 Press the Start button to feed in the loaded original The magnification leading edge timing and center line are then automatically adjusted 3 If the results are OK and the operation panel is a Mea Ha type The following is displayed Item 1 Gd Item 2 0 Item 3 0 Item 4 0 Adjustments of the DP magnification DP leadin e timing and DP center line are
80. THERMAGND THERMA 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC Analog PM clock signal PM ready signal PM On Off Ground 24 V DC power output to PM CFM1 On Off 24 V DC power output to CFM1 Not used Not used Ground OFS On Off 5 V DC power output to OFS 24 V DC power output to CL Not used CL On Off CL On Off Ground FTH detection signal Connected to the docu ment pro cessor original size detection sensor home posi tion sensor and original detection switch 2 3 4 ORGTIMN DOPRDY DOPSEL SGND DOPCLK DOPSDI DOPSDO 5V4 PGND PGND 24V1 NC 5V4 ORGLSWN SGND 5V4 HPSWN SGND 5V4 OPSWN SGND NC NC NC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 5VDC 24 V DC 5VDC 0 3 3 V DC 5VDC 0 3 3 V DC 5 V DC 0 3 3 V DC Original scanning interval signal Document processor ready signal Document processor select signal Ground Document processor clock signal Document processor serial communication data signal Document processor serial communication data signal 5 V DC power output to document processor Ground Ground 24 V DC power output to document processor Not used 5 V DC power output to OSDS OSDS On Off Ground 5 V DC power output to HPSW HPSW On Off Ground 5 V DC power output to ODSW ODSW On Off Ground Not used
81. To check the developing count Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Setting range Initial setting Exp 1 Exp 2 First 3 digits Last 3 digits 000 to 999 000 to 999 000 000 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U161 Setting the fuser control temperature Description Changes the fuser control temperature Purpose Normally no change is necessary However can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper or solve a fuser problem on thick paper Setting 1 Press the start key 1 Select the item to be set using the exposure adjustment keys 2 Change the setting using the zoom keys Initial setting Exposure indicator Exp 1 lit Exp 2 lit Exp 3 lit Exp 4 lit Exp 5 lit Number of sheets for fuser control 1 to 99 1 Description Setting range Primary stabilization fuser temperature 120 to 185 C 145 Secondary stabilization fuser temperature 120 to 185 C 165 Copying operation temperature 1 160 to 220 C 175 Copying operation temperature 2 160 to 220 C 185 Exp 1 flashing Number of sheets for fuser control thick paper 1 to 99 2 Copying operation temperature 1 Temperature in copying operation at the st
82. Y AFD 2 AA PRAV CH UTER HRS EE loy m wZckwA 4wgmE2 ADMICK OR DNS 3 FATED OK OYE RIE 7 seg 24 TOMA KOK IICRRSNS CHA 1 6d HA 2 0 RA 3 0 A 4 0 HER LCD A 7 DIA CONVEY SPEED LEAD BDGE ADJ DP CENTER f AIR SIVET 4 RITA NG did BAT seg FA TOMA nGl n62 n63 E JE EI 1 CRABS A ARIE LCD 24 TOME DATA NGI NG2 Em vx Jf OE v MEXE HDR 22 5 GERI EXT7 2T7 AM 21 Adjusting the DP open close angle To adjust the DP open close angle to 60 degrees 1 Insert the angle adjusting plate C and fit it using M4 x 14 screw E R glage de l angle d ouverture fermeture du DP Pour r gler l angle d ouverture fermeture du DP 60 degr s 1 Ins rez la plaque de r glage d angle C et fixez la l aide d une vis M4 x 14 E Ajuste del ngulo de apertura cierre del DP Para ajustar el ngulo de apertura cierre del DP a 60 grados 1 Inserte la placa de ajuste de ngulo C y fije con el tornillo M4 x 14 E Einstellen des DP Offnungs SchlieBungswinkels _ Einstellung des DP Offnungs SchlieRungswinkels auf 60 Grad 1 Den Winkeleinstellhalter C einsetzen und mit einer M4 x 14 Schraube E befestigen Regolazione dell angolo di apertura e chiusura del DP Per regolare l angolo di apertura e chiusura del DP a 60 gradi 1 Inserire la piastra di regolazione dell angolo C e fissarla con
83. add an optional language Method Press the start key Setting 1 Change the setting using the zoom keys Setting Description Setting Description 0 No selection 7 Finnish Dutch 8 Portuguese Turkish 9 Czech Norwegian 11 Greek 1 2 3 Polish 10 Hungarian 4 5 Swedish 12 Lithuanian 6 Danish 13 Hebrew Initial setting O 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears 1 3 47 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U332 Setting the size conversion factor Description Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 Letter size The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4 Letter size and to display the result in user simulation Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 Letter size for copying and printing respectively Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the zoom keys Description Setting range Initial setting Size conversion factor 0 0 to 3 0 1 0 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Description Sets a paper feed location specified for printer
84. adjusting tab Paper length adjusting tab Left cover handle Figure 1 1 1 MP tray MP tray extension Slider Contact glass Original size indicator plates Left cover Front cover 2KL 2KK Toner container release lever Toner container Charger cleaner rod Waste toner box Handles for transport Main power switch Main power switch cover 2KL 2KK 2 Operation panel 36 33 30 27 25 23 18 9 37 34 31 28 26 24 19 7 6 5 3 tout mur Ej CRI e t FA Maintenance A S e II eL3 el El Add Toner ij O O O Ma gin Borde Erase Combine Attention 1 e gt e E A MT Collate Program Eg 4a Photo e A A Ledger Cr 1 fe N Stop Cra am fa dom mp cai Ea 2 gt A Letter Cr lt ao LL ree DD Original gt custom2 4 Media Type Spit j 2sided F gt Darl gt LIL Size p Other 4 CD ED si Cat 35 32 29 17 20 Figure 1 1 2 1 Start key 20 EcoPrint key 2 Stop Clear key 21 Auto density key 3 Resetkey 22 Density adjustment key Density display 4 Numeric keys 23 Attention indicator 5 Energy saver key 24 Error Indi
85. des Vorderkanten Timings 1 F hren Sie den Wartungsmodus 034 aus Dr cken Sie die Bildqualit tsmodustaste bis Text aufleuchtet Gruppe 1 Dr cken Sie die Belichtungstaste bis exp1 blinkt Modus 6 Dr cken Sie die Unterbrechungstaste um das Testmuster im Duplexmodus auszugeben und berpr fen Sie das Bild lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 20 2 5 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Uberschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello a 7 segmenti Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo principale 1 Avviare il modo manutenzione 034 Premere il tasto di modo della qualit dell immagine finch Text non si illumina gruppo 1 Premere il tasto di esposizione finch expl inizia a lampeggiare modo 6 Premere il tasto di interruzione per eseguire i modelli di prova nel modo duplex e controllare l immagine Valore di riferimento Entro 20 2 5 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione HEHA 7 seg Ay ane HAT AMBRE O34 o E iie po SERI SE AD DRE expl DJER i 36 ac PARE LOUER FU EUR BETA lt 5 H gt 2042 5mm UA a RMB SLE PD AREAS AR C SE BSE FE WE dt TE Bt VIVIS 7seg 4 TOBA ime 1 SUTRA 1 AVF FY AE KU031 ERITH 5 Wet REO OP BRIT SS INV 1 RE
86. direction of arrow 2 14 Sortez les cassettes sauf la cassette inf rieure A dans le cas d un empilage de 2 cassettes ou plus uniquement 15 Lib rez les 2 crochets 18 et enlevez la capot 19 dans le cas d un empilage de 2 cassettes ou plus uniquement D posez le capot 19 en poussant dans la direction de la fl che 1 et en tournant dans la direction de la flche 14 Extraiga los casetes excepto el inferior A solo cuando se apilan 2 casetes o m s 15 Desenganche los 2 ganchos 18 y desmonte la cubierta 19 solo cuando se apilan 2 casetes o m s Quite la cubierta 19 empuj ndola en la direcci n de la flecha D y girndola en la direccin de la flecha 2 14 Die Kassetten mit Ausnahme der untersten Kassette A herausziehen nur bei Stapeln von 2 oder mehr Kassetten 15 Die 2 Haken 18 aushaken und die Abdeckung 19 abnehmen nur bei Stapeln von 2 oder mehr Kassetten Die Abdeckung 19 abnehmen indem man sie in der Pfeilrichtung D drckt und in der Pfeilrichtung dreht 14 Estrarre i cassetti tranne quello del cassettone A pi in basso solo quando si impilano 2 o pi cassettoni 15 ganciare i 2 ganci 18 e rimuovere il coperchio 19 solo quando si impilano 2 o pi cassettoni Rimuovere il coperchio 19 spingendolo nella direzione della freccia D e ruotandolo nella direzione della freccia 14 fr RES RA CAD LIMA CR ES 2 Ga 2 NA EMA 15 FAIT 2 AFRI 18 AGORA 19 o
87. direction of the arrow 6 Secure the connector cover 9 using the screw 8 removed in step 4 4 D posez la vis 8 au dos du corps principal 5 Faites glisser le couvercle du connecteur 9 se trouvant l int rieur du couvercle arri re du corps principal dans la direction de la fl che 6 Fixez le couvercle du connecteur 9 l aide de la vis 8 d pos e l tape 4 4 Quite el tornillo 8 de la parte posterior del cuerpo principal 5 Deslice en la direcci n que muestra la flecha la cubierta del conector 9 en el interior de la cubierta posterior del cuerpo principal 6 Asegure la cubierta del conector 9 por medio del tornillo 8 desmontado en el paso 4 4 Die Schraube 8 an der R ckseite der Haupteinheit abnehmen 5 Die Steckverbinderabdeckung 9 an der Innenseite der hinteren Haupteinheitsabdeckung in der Pfeilrichtung verschieben 6 Die Steckverbinderabdeckung 9 mit der in Schritt 4 entfernten Schraube 8 sichern 4 Rimuovere la vite 8 sulla parte posteriore del corpo principale 5 Slittare il coperchio del connettore 9 all interno del coperchio posteriore del corpo principale nella direzione della freccia 6 Fissare il coperchio del connettore 9 usando la vite 8 rimossa nel punto 4 4 UF EU IRE 8 o 5 AAA T EP Ur si C VA DURO PH IT RC C9 6 ATELIER 4 EX FHR 8 BE C9 4 AKT illo EA 9 1 ZR RAF 5 ARG NAMIC SARI AI 9 xESKREIIS ICA TA F
88. duplex paper conveying switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Registration switch cassette feed switch 1 duplex paper convey ing switch 15 A paper jam in the fuser section is indi cated during copying misfeed in fuser sec tion Jam codes 40 41 42 43 44 and 45 Check if the front fuser guide is deformed Check visually and replace Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed Clean or replace if necessary Check if the heat roller sep aration claws are dirty or deformed Clean or replace if necessary Check if the heat roller and its separation claws contact each other Check visually and replace Broken eject switch or feed shift switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Eject switch feedshift switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 4 28 16 A paper jam in the eject section is indi cat
89. edge registration 2 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 2 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 Setting folio size Length Width 330 210 Adjusting the deflection in the paper 30 20 0 20 20 20 1 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed 0 3 0 7 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 0 3 Optical Adjusting the scanner input properties 12 Turning the exposure lamp on Adjusting the shading position 0 Adjusting the scanner magnification Main scanning direction Auxiliary scanning direction 0 10 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration 0 Adjusting the scanner center line 10 1 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP 0 Adjusting the DP magnification 0 0 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0 0 0 0 Adjusting the DP center line 0 0 1 Checking scanner operation Adjusting the DP input light luminosity 11 Adjusting the DP automatically Setting DP reading position modification operation ON 35 Setting the input filter moire reduction mode Off Outputting a MIP PG pattern Adjusting the scanner automatically Setting the exposure density gradient Text text and photo photo mode 0 0 0 1 Adjusting original size detection 170 30 240 1 Initial setting for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for execut
90. feeder copy count GalPhoto Exp 2 Last 3 digits of the second paper feeder copy count OCT Text Exp 3 Clearing the count CLE O T 4 Text amp Photo Exp First 3 digits of the third paper feeder copy count 0 Ai Photo Exp 2 Last 3 digits of the third paper feeder copy count A Text Exp Clearing the count CLE Exp First 3 digits of the duplex unit copy count Exp 2 Last 3 digits of the duplex unit copy count Exp Clearing the count CLE la O Eris Gal Text amp Photo 0 Gal Photo sir cerea Off On Flashing When no optional paper feed device is installed the counts corresponding to optional paper feed devices will not appear Clearing copy counts by paper feed locations 1 Select the paper feed location to clear the count Paper feeder copy count cannot be cleared 2 Light exp 3 using the exposure adjustment key 3 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 54 Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U903 Checking clearing the paper jam counts Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations Purpose To check the paper jam status Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Display the jam code to check the count using the exposure adjustment keys 3 Press the start key The ja
91. indicator range setting Exp 1 Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 Exp 2 Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller Image density Setting 3 Setting O Dark 4 i i d Set to LIGHTER Set to DARKER mi Light i 3 x 4 i Density adjustment Light i Center Dark Density adjustment range Normal Density adjustment range Special area Figure 1 3 15 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the interrupt key Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 31 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U099 1 3 32 Adjusting original size detection Description Checks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value Purpose To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensor mal functions frequently due to incident light or the like Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys 3 Press the start key The machine enters the execution mode Display Description dA Displayi
92. la copia de muestra Si la superaci n supera el valor de referencia haga el siguiente ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm berpr fen des Winkels der Hinterkante Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters pr fen berschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren lt Bezugswert gt F r Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm F r Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Controllo dell angolo del bordo di uscita Controllare la differenza tra la linea 1 dell originale a e la linea 2 della copia di esempio Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione Valore di riferimento Per copia simplex Entro 3 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 4 0 mm a a amp 1 AED PEE 2 104 REEERE DEIT VE o CERE gt MA TRI 3 Omm LAPY MUS 4 Omm DA Py f inda REZA RS a Dik D Lae UT VOR 2 OF v ERI TUSCE OE THES BORD ERE gt Fri OYE 3 0mm LIP HORA 4 Omm LIP 11 Adjusting the DP 1 Open the DP and release two latches 4 using a flat head screwdriver R glage du DP 1 Ouvrez le DP et lib rez les deux verrous 4 l aide d un tournevis t te plate Ajuste del DP 1 Abra el DP y suelte los dos pestillos 4 utilizando un dest
93. mm vaccae sq tren BEN VOTI AU KRPE Hil HEE PE exp 1 st WAU UA EZ ED IS P E o MENE mp MRR WED CE BE figu xEH 1 KE 2 0 2mm RARE WE FRW Edd ED EES RILAT seg 4 TOBA 1 AVFFYAE FUT BEY PURE m LAGER fe LF BU AT 5 HAE ALTA Ra EL TH MERE TS A EZ2V DM OBA REE FITS ESHTI k OBE REE LIPS LAF 7 ORBLE 0 2mm SEX IC EY 17 If the operation panel is an LCD type 1 Set the mode to Maintenance Mode U071 select LEAD1 and use image magnification and paper cassette level selection to adjust the upper and lower limits Then press the Interrupt key and check the image in the proof copy For copy example j Decrease the setting value For copy example k Increase the setting value Amount of change per step 0 2 mm Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD 1 Passez en mode de maintenance U071 s lectionnez LEAD1 puis ajustez les bords sup rieur et inf rieur l aide des fonctions d agrandissement de l image et de s lection du niveau de la cassette papier Appuyez sur la touche d interruption et v rifiez l image l aide d une copie de test Pour l exemple de copie j Diminuez la valeur de r glage Pour l exemple de copie k Augmentez la valeur de r glage Quantit de changement par pas 0 2 mm Si el tablero de controles es del tipo LCD 1 Entre en el modo de mantenimiento e ingrese en el item de mantenimiento U071 s
94. optional first 5 0 to 10 0 i 0 1 mm paper feeder Exp 4 lit Paper feed from optional second 5 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm paper feeder Exp 5 lit Paper feed from optional third 5 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm paper feeder Exp 1 flashing Duplex mode 5 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm Press the interrupt key Press the start key to output a test pattern Change the setting value using the zoom keys For output example 1 decrease the value For output example 2 increase the value Leading edge registration 20 1 0 mm Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 4 6 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 14 Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U035 Setting folio size Description Changes the image area for copying onto folio size paper Purpose To prevent the image at the trailing edge or right or left side of the paper from not being copied by setting the actual size of the folio paper used Method Press the start key Setting 1 Select the item to be set using the exposure adjustment keys 2 Change the setting using the zoom keys Exposure indicator Setting Setting range Initial setting Exp 1 Length 330 to 356 mm 330 Exp 2 Width 200 to 220 mm 210 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop cl
95. ordre suivant Sinon il Pour v rifier l angle du bord avant reportez vous la page 8 Pour v rifier l angle du bord arri re reportez vous la page 11 Pour v rifier l agrandissement reportez vous la page 15 Pour v rifier la synchronisation du bord avant reportez vous la page 1 Pour v rifier la ligne m diane reportez vous la page 19 sera impossible d obtenir un r glage correct Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul Valeur de r f rence 1 596 max 7 lt Valeur de r f rence gt Copie recto seul lt Valeur de r f rence gt Copie recto seul 4 0 mm max 4 0 mm max 3 0 mm max copie recto verso 3 0 mm max copie recto verso 2 0 mm max 3 0 mm max 2 0 mm max copie recto verso 2 0 mm max copie recto verso Lorsque vous utilisez l original pour effectuer le r glage vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le r glage de l agrandissement de la synchronisation du bord avant et de la ligne m diane en une seule fois Pour le r glage automatique en utilis lt lt Verificaci n de la imagen del DP ant l original pour effectuer le r glage reportez vous la page 21 Aseg rese de ajustar en el siguiente orden De lo contrario el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente Para verificar el ngulo del borde superior vea la p gina 8 Para verificar el ngulo del borde inferior vea la p gina 11 Para verificar el cambio
96. output Purpose To use a paper feed location only for printer output A paper feed location specified for printer output cannot be used for copy output Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the paper feed location for the printer using the exposure adjustment keys 3 Select on or oFF using the zoom keys Display Description Exp 1 Cassette Exp 2 Optional first paper feeder Exp 3 Optional second paper feeder Exp 4 Optional third paper feeder 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U342 Setting the ejection restriction 1 3 48 Description Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously When the restriction is set the number of sheets that can be ejected continuously will be limited to 250 Purpose According to user request sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select on or oFF using the zoom keys Display Description on The number of sheets restricted oFF The number of sheets not restricted Initial setting on 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U343 Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Description Switches the Initial setting betwee
97. paper feed pulley Procedure 1 Remove the lower paper feed unit see page 1 5 3 2 Remove the drum unit see page 1 5 34 3 Remove five screws and remove the rear cover Rear cover Figure 1 5 8 4 Remove the connector of the paper feed clutch 5 Remove the paper feed clutch stop ring and bush Stop ring Paper feed clutch Figure 1 5 9 1 5 6 2KL 2KK 6 Remove the screw and remove the registra tion guide Registration guide Screw Figure 1 5 10 7 Remove the screw and remove the upper paper feed unit Upper paper feed unit Screw Figure 1 5 11 1 5 7 2KL 2KK 8 Remove the springs stop ring and bush and then remove the shaft holder from the upper paper feed unit 9 Remove the forwarding pulley from the upper paper feed unit 10 Remove the paper feed pulley shaft from the upper paper feed unit 11 Remove the collar and the paper feed pulley from the upper paper feed shaft 12 Replace the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley and refit all the removed parts 1 5 8 Shaft holder Bush Spring Stop ring Upper paper feed unit Figure 1 5 12 Paper feed pulley Collar Paper feed pulley shaft Forwarding pulley Figure 1 5 13 3 Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit Follow the procedure below to maintenance of the paper feed section Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit see page 1 5 34 2 Remove the lower paper f
98. pulleys at the left of the scanner unit winding from below to above sise 3 13 Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame winding from above 10 beloW nire rtt DE ERO on en pictae eei iUd sad itr ente 4 14 Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire guides at the left of the scanner unit 5 15 Hook the round terminals onto the scanner wire springs 6 49 9 DE O y to Figure 1 5 43 1 5 24 16 Remove two scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools 17 Focusing on the locating ball of the wire drum move aside the wires to inside 18 Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position 19 Put the mirror 1 frame on the scanner rail and move it toward the left side of the machine 20 Insert the frame securing tools into the posi tioning holes leftmost holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit and screw the mirror 1 frame while securing both the mirror 1 frame and the mirror 2 frame 21 Remove two frame securing tools 22 Refit all the removed parts 2KL 2KK Frame securing tool Frame securing tool Mirror 2 frame Mirror 1 frame Figure 1 5 44 1 5 25 2KL 2KK 3 Detaching and refitting the ISU reference Follow the procedure below to replace the ISU Procedure 1 Remove
99. range setting Exp 1 Detection sensor threshold value 0 to 255 170 Exp 2 Original size judgment time 0 to 100ms 30 Exp 3 Threshold value in the main scan direction for 220 240 mm 240 A4R detection Exp 4 Original size detection position display mm 0to 350mm Exp 5 Detected original size display 0 to 63 3 To change the original size detection threshold light exp 1 2 or 3 and change the setting using the zoom keys 4 Press the start key The value is set 5 Press the stop clear key The selected item appears Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 33 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U100 Setting the main high voltage Description Changes the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage Also performs main charging Also changes the setting of main charging copy quantity correction Purpose To set the surface potential or check main charging Also used when reentering data after initializing the set data Start 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Exp 1 lit Changing the grid control voltage Exp 2 lit Turning the main charger on Exp 3 lit Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off Exp 4 lit Main charging copy quantity correction copy interval Exp 5 lit Main charging copy
100. refitting the main charger unit 1 5 36 Developing SCHON eL 1 5 37 1 Detaching and refitting the developing unit 1 5 37 Transfer Section z roroi aer aein e eri 1 5 38 1 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller 1 5 38 F ser SeCtlon P EM 1 5 40 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit ss 1 5 40 2 Detaching and refitting the press roller 1 5 42 3 Detaching and refitting the fuser heater emere 1 5 44 4 Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claWS nenene 1 5 47 5 Detaching and refitting the heat roller su 1 5 48 6 Detaching and refitting the fuser thermistor essem eem 1 5 50 7 Detaching and refitting the fuser thermostat enne 1 5 51 8 Adjusting front position of the fuser unit adjusting lateral squareness 1 5 52 SII IM EN eran a 1 5 53 1 Detaching and refitting the eject UNIt emere 1 5 53 2 Direction of installing the principal fan motors 1 5 55 1 6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1 6 1 Upgrading the firmware nana dae ne anali 1 6 1 1 6 2 Adjustment free variable resistors VR cnn cnn nan nn nan enne 1 6 2 1 6 3 Remarks on main engine PWB replacement ss 1 6 2 2 1 Mechanical construction 22121 Paperteed SOCIO cir ina Rai lati alati itat t at 2 1 1 2 1 2Optical S ction x2 25 85e ire a M 2 1 3 1 Imag
101. reverse rotation of the eject motor Figure 2 1 16 Eject and switchback sections 1 Feedshift guide 2 Eject roller 3 Eject pulley 4 Switchback roller 5 Switchback pulley 6 Feedshift guide 7 Eject switch ESW Feedshift switch FSSW 2 1 15 2KL 2KK MEPWB YC13 2 YC13 3 YC13 4 YC13 1 COMDA COMDB COMDNA EXTSWN us SEPSWN v014 3 COMDNB ESW Figure 2 1 17 Eject and switchback sections block diagram 1 16 2KL 2KK 2 1 8 Duplex section In duplex mode after copying on to the reverse face of the paper the paper is reversed in the switchback section and con veyed to the duplex unit The paper is then conveyed to the paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex feed rollers Figure 2 1 18 Duplex section 1 Feedshift guide 2 Duplex feed pulley 3 Upper duplex feed roller 4 Duplex feed pulley 5 Lower duplex feed roller 6 Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW 2 1 17 2KL 2KK MEPWB YC7 YC1 IPPSWN YC5 5 YC5 8 ICLTN CPWB Figure 2 1 19 Duplex section block diagram 1 18 2KL 2KK 2 2 1 Electrical parts layout 1 PWBs Ld Bo o C Machine front A Machine inside E Machine rear Figure 2 2 1 PWBs 1 Main engine PWB MEPWB
102. sheets min A4R LetterR 13 sheets min A3 Ledger 10 sheets min B4 Legal 11 sheets min B5 20 sheets min B5R 13 sheets min ASR 10 sheets min First copy time in 5 7 s or less Warm up time Room temperature 22 C 71 6 F 60 RH Power on 17 2s Low power mode 10 s Sleep mode 17 2s Paper capacity Cassette 300 sheets 80 g m 150 sheets 90 g m or more MP tray 100 sheets A4 Letter or less 25 sheets B4 Legal or more Output tray capacity Top tray 250 sheets 80 g m Continuous copying 1 to 999 sheets Light source n Inert gas lamp Scanning system Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor Photoconductor OPC drum diameter 30 mm Image write system Semiconductor laser Charging system Single positive corona charging Developing system Single component developing system Toner magnetism toner Toner replenishing Automatic from a toner container Transfer system Transfer roller Separation system Curvature separation and separation electrode Cleaning system Blade and cleaning roller 1 1 1 2KL 2KK Charge eras ing system Fusing system neeese Main Me
103. switch ESW does not turn off within specified time of the registration switch RSW turning off 2766 ms The eject switch ESW does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms Feedshift section 52 Misfeed in feedshift section MP tray The job eject switch JBESW does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on 2056 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation 1364 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on 5907 ms 53 Misfeed in feedshift section cassette The job eject switch JBESW does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on 2056 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation 1364 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on 5907 ms 54 Misfeed in feedshift section first paper feeder The job eject switch JBESW does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning o
104. the contact glass see page 1 5 17 2 Remove four screws and remove the ISU cover 3 Remove the CCD wire from the CCD PWB 1 5 26 Screws ISU cover Figure 1 5 45 CCD PWB Figure 1 5 46 DUO Qd Remove each screw and remove two plates Remove three screws and remove the ISU Replace the ISU Refit all the removed parts 2KL 2KK Screw Screw e Plate P Screws Y q Plate iena Figure 1 5 47 1 5 27 2KL 2KK 4 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit Procedure 1 Remove the original cover or the document processor 2 Remove the rear cover see page 1 5 6 Remove the front left cover see page 1 5 40 Remove the right upper cover contact glass rear upper cover and front scanner cover see page 1 5 17 Remove the left middle cover left upper cover and slit glass see page 1 5 19 Remove the right middle cover see page 1 5 22 3 Remove the screw and release three hooks and then remove the front right cover Front right cover Front right cover Hook Figure 1 5 48 1 5 28 2KL 2KK 4 Remove two screws and release six hooks and two both and then remove the right middle cover Right lower cover L o o x Right lower cover ANNONA 70777 TORRE DUT g CE Figure 1 5 49 5 Remove YC5 YC15 YC16 and YC27 con nector
105. the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock Never connect the ground cable to any of the following gas pipes lightning rods ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities ici tt et t t up tee qat Ee dd pe Ere tet peat Eger dd AACAUTION Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface the copier may tip over causing injury N Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place This may cause fire or electric shock N Do not install the copier near a radiator heater other heat source or near flammable material This may Cao E N Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance N Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it s sesssessesseesrrsseeerrssseerrrssres Q Always use anti toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple leading to injury i Q Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively Protect the eyes If toner or developer is acciden tally ingested drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immedi ately If it gets into the eyes rinse immediately with copious amounts of water an
106. the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Copy quantity display Exp 1 First 3 digits of the lamp on time minutes Exp 2 Last 3 digits of the lamp on time minutes Exp 3 Clearing the lamp on time CLE Clearing 1 Light exp 3 2 Press the start key The accumulated time is cleared Setting 1 Change the accumulated time using the numeric or zoom keys 2 Press the start key The accumulated time is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 63 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U991 Checking the scanner count Description Displays the scanner operation count Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Copy quantity display count value Exp 1 First 3 digits of the scanner count Exp 2 Last 3 digits of the scanner count Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 64 Outputting a VTC PG pattern Description Selects and outputs a VTC PG pattern created in the machine Purpose When performing respective image printing adjustments used to check the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non scanned output VTC PG pattern Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the VTC PG pattern to be outp
107. the machine number Method 1 Press the start key 2 Change the indication of the copy quantity display using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Copy quantity display Exp 1 lit 1st digit of machine number Exp 2 lit 2nd digit of machine number Exp 3 lit 3rd digit of machine number Exp 4 lit 4th digit of machine number Exp 5 lit 5th digit of machine number Exp 1 flashing 6th digit of machine number Exp 2 flashing 7th digit of machine number Exp 4 flashing 9th digit of machine number Exp 3 flashing 8th digit of machine number Exp 5 flashing 10th digit of machine number Code Corresponding Table 30 A 41 K 4B 31 B 42 L 4C 32 C 43 M 4D 33 D 44 N 4E 34 E 45 O 4F 35 F 46 P 50 36 G 47 Q 51 37 H 48 R 52 38 I 49 S 53 39 J 4A T 54 oor oak ND Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 6 Maintenance item No Description 2KL 2KK U005 Copying without paper Description Simulates the copy operation without paper feed Purpose To check the overall operation of the machine Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated using the exposure adjustment keys Display Operation P P d Only the machine operates Both the machine and DP operate continuous operation Press the i
108. the setting and press the OK key Portrait 1 Portrait 2 Landscape 1 Landscape 2 Combine mode borderline Selects the type of borderline to be used in the layout mode 1 Press combine key for 3 s 2 Select 46 Combine Border and press the OK key 3 Select the Off Solid or Dotted and press the OK key Rotate collate setting Sets whether or not to perform rotate sorting when the sort mode is selected 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 47 Rotate Offset and press the OK key 3 Select On or Off and press the OK key Selecting auto rotation Sets whether the automatic rotation by default 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 48 Auto Rotation and press the OK key 3 Select On or Off and press the OK key Silent mode transition time Set the silent mode transition time after copying 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 49 Silent mode and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the OK key 0 sec 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec 30 sec 2KL 2KK Auto clear setting Sets whether the auto clear function is available 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 50 Auto Clear and press the OK key 3 Select On or Off and press the OK key Auto sleep setting Sets whether the auto off function is available 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 51 Auto Sleep and press the OK key 3 Selec
109. to make sure that A4 Letter size paper is loaded in the cassette 3 Select YES and press the OK key Report is printed out Message language Selects the language displayed on the message dis play 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 02 Language and press the OK key 3 Select the language and press the OK key Original image quality Selects the image quality at power on 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 03 Image Quality and press the OK key 3 Select text ph Dens Photo Density or Text Density and press the OK key Initial density Selects the exposure mode at power on 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 04 Initial Dens and press the OK key 3 Select Manual or Auto and press the OK key EcoPront Selects the EcoPrint mode at power on 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 05 EcoPrint and press the OK key 3 Select On or Off and press the OK key Density steps Sets the number of density steps for the manual den sity mode 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 06 Density steps and press the OK key 3 Select 1 step or 0 5 step and press the OK key Auto density adjustment Adjusts the density for the auto density mode 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 07 Auto Density and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the
110. to the toner container sensor 5V2 TONEPY SGND 5VDC Analog 5 V DC power output to TCS TCS detection signal Ground YC5 Connected to the MP paper Switch duplex paper con veying Switch duplex feed clutch regis tration switch and MP paper size width switch 2 3 12 ON DAF ON Ba oR COE 0l oN O 5V2 BPPESW SGND 5V2 IPPSWN SGND 24V1 ICLTN 5V2 REGSW SGND BPWSW 3 3V 5 VDC 0 3 3 V DC 5 VDC 0 3 3 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 5 VDC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPPSW MPPSW On Off Ground 5 V DC power output to MPPCSW DUPPCSW On Off Ground 24 V DC power output to DUPFCL DUPFCL On Off 5 V DC power output to RSW RSW On Off Ground MPPWSW On Off 3 3 V DC power output to MPPWSW Connector Signal Voltage 2KL 2KK Description YC6 Connected to the regis tration clutch 24V1 REGCLN 24V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to RCL RCL On Off YC7 Connected to the paper feed clutch 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFCL PFCL On Off YC8 Connected to the MP solenoid 0 24 V DC 24V DC MPSOL On Off 24 V DC power output to MPSOL 2 3 13 2 3 4 Operation PWB 2KL 2KK
111. una vite M4 x 14 E BE DP HAE E 60 E DP FAAET 1 AJH C H 1 R22 M4 X 14 E MATE o DP RAPA E COO RR SE i PA HE 60 RET SHA E C HAL EA M4 X 14 E 1 AT METZ 22 To adjust the DP open close angle to 30 degrees 1 Remove two stop rings 11 and pull the shaft 12 out 2 Insert the shaft 12 into the holes 13 and refit two stop rings 11 Pour r gler l angle d ouverture fermeture du DP 30 degr s 1 Retirez deux bagues d arr t 11 et tirez l arbre 12 vers l ext rieur 2 Ins rez l arbre 12 dans les orifices 13 et remettez les deux bagues d arr t 11 en place Para ajustar el ngulo de apertura cierre del DP a 30 grados 1 Desmonte los dos aros de tope 11 y tire del eje 12 hacia fuera 2 Inserte el eje 12 en los orificios 13 y vuelva a colocar los dos aros de tope 11 Einstellung des DP Offnungs SchlieBungswinkels auf 30 Grad 1 Die zwei Sicherungsringe 11 entfernen und die Achse 12 herausziehen 2 Die Achse 12 in die L cher 13 einf hren und die zwei Sicherungsringe 11 wieder anbringen Per regolare l angolo di apertura e chiusura del DP a 30 gradi 1 Rimuovere i due anelli di arresto 11 ed estrarre l albero 12 2 Inserire l albero 12 nei fori 13 e fissare nuovamente i due anelli di arresto 11 VUE 30 EA DP ABR 1 HER 2 EA 11 IR FAN 12 2 HAN 12 AFL 13 FH 2 MEZI 11 Tig Fe o DP BER fS EE 30
112. wire The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade and cleaning roller that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer process and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner box The cleaning lamp CL consists of LEDs which remove residual charge from the drum surface Figure 2 1 7 Drum section Cleaning blade Cleaning lamp CL 1 Drum 2 Drum separation claws 3 Main charger unit 4 Main charger wire 5 Main charger grid 6 Cleaning roller 7 Cleaning spiral 2 1 7 2KL 2KK 2 1 8 OW Zener PWB ERASE2N YC3 B6 ERASE1N Main charging high voltage YC3 B7 MHVDRN CN1 7 YC8 7 HVTPWB MEPWB TONEEUL liga DDMREM vce 4 Figure 2 1 8 Drum section block diagram 2 1 4 Developing section The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container The developing unit consists of the developing sleeve where a magnetic brush is formed the magnetic toner blade and the developing spirals that agitate the toner Also the toner container sensor TCS checks whether or not toner remains in the toner container Figure 2 1 9 Developing section 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 Developing unit Developing sleeve Magnetic toner blade Left developing spiral Right developing spiral Toner container Toner c
113. within 20 s of the START signal turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC3 on the main engine PWB and laser scanner unit and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective polygon motor Replace the laser scanner unit Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation Polygon motor steady state problem Stable OFF is detected for 5 s continu ously after polygon motor stability Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC3 on the main engine PWB and laser scanner unit and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective polygon motor Replace the laser scanner unit Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation BD steady state problem ASIC detects a BD error for 600 ms after the polygon motor rotation has been sta bilized Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC3 on the main engine PWB and laser scanner unit and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation Fuser heater break The temper
114. 1 G S Gray scale Exp 2 0 setting value Mono level 0 to 255 0 Exp 3 FFL 256 level Exp 4 1 d 1 dot level 3 Press the interrupt key 4 Press the start key A MIP PG pattern is output Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 29 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U092 1 3 30 Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Makes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original Adjusting the scanner center line U067 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration U066 Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction U065 When this maintenance item is performed the settings in U065 U066 and U067 are also changed Purpose Used to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner Method 1 Place the specified original P N 302FZ56990 on the contact glass 2 Press the start key on appears 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When adjustment is complete Gd appears 4 Display each setting value after adjustment using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Exp 1 Execution result Exp 2 Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction Exp 3 Scanner leading edge registration Exp 4 Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction Exp 5 Scanner center line If a problem occurs during auto adjustment
115. 10 4 Collegare il cavo USB F fornito in dotazione con IB 110 alla scheda stampante e collegare l altra estremit a IB 110 Nota Assicurarsi di usare il cavo di alimentazione e il cavo USB forniti in dotazione fel RA IX R USB HO 18 110 34434 43185 18 110 Bt 1 ZM TB 110 WA A ZE C REA 18 110 R 1 f IB 110 EMERI 4 ABBA D Wide os AUS E 2 IAT EN CA E DIP HX 3 M HIGH RE FULL TE 4 E WA EE IB 110 Bo DIP FXT HIGH JL 3 34 TB 110 EMI RS ER E ER CAER ERAS ER E DERE TB 110 fai ft USB 2 E MERE FETT Ei E MERA IB 110 E E o 4 1 IB 110 El EE SAFE Fe 9 FEL YZ FU USB USB 7472 r ZA IB 110 4 FLV av ENT 18 110 e fite CHAT S48 1 IB 110 ICM BST 5 MEE amp AY F O ERO F2 18 110 E E CHAT S48 1 IB 110 ICA RTS BAA D 4 ME ROME CHO FINTA 2 FU IR RADO A Y AL YF 3 amp HIGH 225 FULL UJ 7 2 HE IB 110 ZEH L72 Ver YF HIGH ICTS Ea 3 IB 110 cheats EU 77w E 7 x74 RATIO CWSHMO ART ZTFI AAR N CBE LD 5 HE IB 110 Liegi 2 4 IB 110 1244 87 5 USB 4 7V F 47 U VAR RICHE LE 5 FX IB 110 I Belge 4 Ta ATES BD EVR Tv amp USB Dv ee hie 2009 2 303MY56710 KYOCERA MITA EUROPE B V Hoeksteen 40 2132 MS Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Home page http ww
116. 2KK 1 3 1 Maintenance mode The copier is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine 1 Executing a maintenance item Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys Enter the maintenance item number using the zoom keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is entered The maintenance item is selected Y Press the start key Y The selected maintenance item is run Y Press the stop clear key Repeat the same maintenance item Run another maintenance item Enter 001 using the zoom keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited and press the start key End 1 3 1 2KL 2KK 2 Maintenance mode item list Section Content of maintenance item Initial setting General Outputting an own status report Exiting the maintenance mode Setting the factory default data Checking the machine number Copying without paper Displaying the ROM version Initialization Initializing all data Initializing memories Drive paper feed and paper convey ing system Checking motor operation Checking switches for paper conveying Checking clutch operation Adjusting the print start timing Adjusting the leading edge registration Adjusting the center line Adjusting the trailing edge margin Adjusting the leading
117. 44 FAX 973 882 6000 New York Branch 1410 Broadway 23rd floor New York NY 10018 TEL 917 286 5400 FAX 917 286 5402 Northeastern Region 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 TEL 973 808 8444 FAX 973 882 4401 Midwestern Region 201 Hansen Court Suite 119 Wood Dale Illinois 60191 TEL 630 238 9982 FAX 630 238 9487 Western Region 14101 Alton Parkway Irvine California 92618 7006 TEL 949 457 9000 FAX 949 457 9119 KYOCERA MITA CANADA LTD 6120 Kestrel Road Mississauga Ontario L5T 158 Canada TEL 905 670 4425 FAX 905 670 8116 KYOCERA MITA MEXICO S A DE C V Av 16 de Septiembre 407 Col Santa In s Azcapotzalco M xico D F 02130 M xico TEL 55 5383 2741 FAX 55 5383 7804 2009 KYOCERA MITA Corporation http www kyoceramita com tl KYOCERG is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation Southeastern Region 1500 Oakbrook Drive Norcross Georgia 30093 TEL 770 729 9786 FAX 770 729 9873 Southwestern Region 2825 West Story Road Irving Texas 75038 5299 TEL 972 550 8987 FAX 972 252 9786 National Operation Center amp National Training Center 2825 West Story Road Irving Texas 75038 5299 TEL 972 659 0055 FAX 972 570 5816 Latin America Division 8240 N W 52nd Terrace Dawson Building Suite 108 Miami Florida 33166 TEL 305 421 6640 FAX 305 421 6666 Printed in U S A
118. 5 34 Defective fuser unit Check the heat roller and press roller Wrong types of paper 15 Image is partly missing Copy example Causes Check if the paper meets specifications Replace paper Check procedures corrective measures Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Paper creased Change the paper Dirty or flawed drum Clean the drum or if it is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 34 Dirty transfer roller 16 Fusing is poor Copy example Causes Clean the transfer roller Check procedures corrective measures n Wrong types of paper Check if the paper meets specifications Replace paper Defective pressure springs Replace the pressure springs Flawed press roller Replace the press roller see page 1 5 42 Flawed fuser heater 17 Image is out of focus Copy example Causes Replace the fuser heaters see page 1 5 44 Check procedures corrective measures 4 1 4 26 Defective image scanning unit Replace the image scanning unit see page 1 5 26 Drum condensation Clean the drum 2KL 2KK 18 Image center does not align with the original center Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Misadjusted image center line Run maintenance item U034 to readjust the center line
119. 65 2KL 2KK 2 Job accounting Job accounting on off setting 1 Press logout key and both of the density adjust ment keys for 3 s 2 Select 01 JobAccounting and press the OK key 3 Select ON or OFF and press the OK key Department ID code registration 1 Press logout key and both of the density adjust ment keys for 3 s 2 Select 02 Register code and press the OK key 3 Entera department ID code using the numeric keys and press the OK key Setting range 0 to 99999999 Deleting department ID codes 1 Press logout key and both of the density adjust ment keys for 3 s 2 Select 03 Delete code and press the OK key 3 Enter the department ID code to be deleted using the numeric keys 4 Select YES or NO and press the OK key Clearing the job accounting count 1 Press logout key and both of the density adjust ment keys for 3 s 2 Select 04 Count Clear and press the OK key 3 Select YES or NO and press the OK key Outputting the job accounting list 1 Press logout key and both of the density adjust ment keys for 3 s 2 Select 05 Print list and press the OK key Check to make sure that A4 Letter size paper is loaded in the cassette 3 Select YES and press the OK key List is printed out 1 3 66 3 Default setting User status report Prints the details of the default settings 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 01 Copy Status and press the OK key Check
120. A I AEP YS VOR 1 B R ET FI 2 3 2 DIET EME 20 2 5mm DIN al 77 a EA If the operation panel is a 7 segment type Adjusting the center line 1 1 Run maintenance mode 034 Press the image quality mode key until Text and Photo are lit group 2 Press the exposure key until exp1 is flashing mode 6 Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern in duplex mode and check the image lt Reference value gt Within 3 0 mm copy example a image If the gap between the center of the paper dotted line and the copy example line 2 is larger than the reference value perform the following adjustment Si le panneau de commande est du type 7 segments R glage de la ligne centrale 1 Ex cutez le mode de maintenance 034 Appuyez sur la touche de mode de qualit d image jusqu ce que Text et Photo s allument groupe 2 Appuyez sur la touche d exposition jusqu ce que exp1 clignote mode 6 Appuyez sur la touche d interruption pour produire le motif de test en mode recto verso et v rifiez l image lt Valeur de r f rence gt Dans les limites de 3 0 mm image a d un exemple de copie Si l cart entre l axe du papier ligne pointill e et le trait de l exemple de copie 2 est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Si el tablero de controles es de tipo 7 segmentos Ajuste de la l nea central 1 Active el modo de mantenimiento 034
121. AR R Tja B USB4 77 72 AZ IB 110 FER S ES Y R SAVY CW S RE 334053 RO REO VES AT 5 B FU CECI TO MURA Y FA OFF KL EMT Z ZOT DIEETAZE HT JZu 435 FONUfU 1 EX D24 HL X 7 Q ED AT BEN AR RO ERE CHA UL PI 1 CHU ALE A 2 ACH y gt 2009 2 303MY56710 Installing the USB interface IB 110 optional Installation de l interface USB IB 110 en option Instalaci n de la interfaz IB 110 opcional di N N N N N Installing IB 110 vertically 1 Attach the vertical stand C supplied with IB 110 Installation verticale de l IB 110 1 Fixer le support vertical C fourni avec l IB 110 Instalaci n vertical de la IB 110 1 Coloque el soporte vertical C entregado con la IB 100 Installing IB 110 horizontally 1 Attach the four rubber bases D supplied with IB 110 as indicated in the figure Installation horizontale de l IB 110 1 Fixer les quatre bases en caoutchouc D fourni avec l IB 110 comme indiqu sur l illustration Instalaci n horizontal de la IB 110 1 Coloque las cuatro bases de goma D entregadas con la IB 110 como se indica en la figura 2 Move the DIP switch 3 on the printer board A from HIGH to FULL Note If the IB 110 will not be used the DIP switch must be left at HIGH 2 Amener le commutateur DIP 3 de la carte d imprimante
122. Ail Photo Exp 2 lit Change history of the engine PWB AT Text Exp 3 lit Number of the engine ROM Exp 4 lit Number of the engine ROM sub Exp 5 lit Change history of the engine PWB BOOT Exp 1 flashing Number of the engine PWB BOOT T c Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit L Part Code Language Photo Exp 2 lit Change history of the standard language Text Exp 3 lit Number of the standard language ROM Exp 4 lit Change history of the optional language Exp 5 lit Number of the optional language ROM T 45 Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit C Part Code Cassette O f lPhoto Exp 2 lit Number of the optional first paper feeder ROM SO Text Exp 3 lit Number of the optional second paper feeder ROM Exp 4 lit Number of the optional third paper feeder ROM O jt FA Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit d Part Code DP 0 dal Photo Exp 2 lit Number of the optional DP ROM 0D Text 50 THE Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit P Part Code Printer 0 f Photo Exp 2 lit Change history of the optional printer 50 etext Exp 3 lit Number of the optional printer ROM Off 9 On Flashing When the optional equipment is not installed non is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U020 Initializing all data Description Initializes all the backup
123. CLE Li En al Text amp Photo ol Photo vy LOC Gil Text T 45 Text amp Photo Exp 1 li Fo display the FOLIO size GalPhoto Exp 2 li First 3 digits of FOLIO size copy count OCT text Exp 3 li Last 3 digits of FOLIO size copy count Exp 4 li Clearing the count CLE f T amp Text amp Photo Exp 1 li Ld display the Ledger size Jef EA Photo Exp 2 li First 3 digits of Ledger size copy count SOC ATI Text Exp 3 li Last 3 digits of Ledger size copy count Exp 4 li Clearing the count CLE Exp 1 li Lg display the Legal size Exp 2 li First 3 digits of Legal size copy count Exp 3 li Last 3 digits of Legal size copy count Exp 4 li Clearing the count CLE I een i Text amp Photo E Photo ceca Text Off 9 On Flashing 1 3 58 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No U911 cont Description Image mode LED Exposure group No indicator Copy quantity display count value Lt display the Letter size First 3 digits of Letter size copy count Last 3 digits of Letter size copy count Clearing the count CLE 10 T 4 Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit GalPhoto Exp 2 lit 0 tex Exp 3 lit Exp 4 lit T 4 Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit St display the Statement size ce Photo Exp 2 lit First 3 digits of Statement size copy count JC ET Text Exp 3 lit Las
124. Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Caution The following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this maintenance item Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode U093 Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode Turning the exposure lamp on Description Turns the exposure lamp on Purpose To check the exposure lamp Method 1 Press the start key on appears 2 Press the start key The exposure lamp lights 3 To turn the exposure lamp off press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 18 Adjusting the shading position Description Changes the shading position Purpose Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate To prevent this problem the shading position should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the zoom keys Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Shading position 5to5 0 0 17 mm Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine left and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine right 3 Press the start key The v
125. Contents Factory setting U253 U254 U260 U277 U342 U343 U344 1 2 10 Switching between double and single counts Turning auto start function on off Selecting the timing for copy counting Setting auto application change time Setting the ejection restriction Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Setting the low power mode DOUBLE COUNT A3 LEDGER ON After ejection 30s ON OFF ENERGY STAR inch specifications GEEA metric specifications 1 2 3 Installing the key counter option Installing the key counter requires the following component Key counter P N 3025418011 Key counter set P N 302A369708 Key counter wire set P N Key counter mounting plate P N 2C960100 Supplied parts of key counter set Key counter socket assembly P N 3029236241 Key counter cover P N 3066060011 Key counter mount P N 3066060041 Key counter retainer P N 302GR03020 Key counter cover retainer P N 302GR03010 Two 2 Edgings P N 7YZM210006 H01 One 1 Band P N M21AH010 One 1 M3 x 8 tap tight P screw P N 5MBTPB3008PW R Two 2 M4 x 10 tap tight P screws P N 5MBTPB4010PW R Two 2 M4 x 10 tap tight S screws P N 5MBTPB4010TW R Two 2 M3 x 6 bronze flat head screws P N 7BB003306H One 1 M4 x 20 tap tight S screw P N 7BB100420H One 1 M3 bronze nut P N 7BC1003055 H01 One 1 M3 x 8 bronze binding screw P N B1B03080 One 1 M4 x 30 tap tight S screw P N B1B54300 Five
126. DE k IN Hic 1 RASE Z 0 2mm ESRI LOD 4 FOE 1 a FUO7I E y RL LEADI BER Life E Fa BERNIE E V E FIRE Ze TUNER AXE ML TX pa PIT EVGA 2 ap Xwgw DEA EE FIPS AFA TT k OBS REM EU LAF Y TOBA E 0 2mm STE EXE JU AX XE 18 EE 1 2 Make a proof copy again Repeat steps 1 to 2 until line 2 of copy example shows the following the reference values lt Reference value gt For simplex copying Within 2 0 mm For duplex copying Within 2 0 mm Effectuez nouveau une copie de test R p tez les tapes 1 2 jusqu ce que la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de r f rence suivantes Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 2 0 mm max Copie recto verso 2 0 mm max Haga otra copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 2 hasta que la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 2 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 2 0 mm Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen Die Schritte 1 bis 2 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist lt Bezugswert gt F r Simplexkopie Innerhalb 2 0 mm F r Duplexkopie Innerhalb 2 0 mm Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia Ripetere i passi da 1 a 2 fino a che la linea 2 dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento Valore di rifer
127. DIENB 5V3 LDOUTN GDI 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 5VDC 0 3 3 V DC Ground Ground PRNPWEB control signal PRNPWEB control signal 5 V DC power output to PRNPWB PRNPWEB control signal 2KL 2KK 2 3 3 Cassette PWB a YcAs T 1 Ta 1 YC1 23 3 ne LC Jm Ld Figure 2 3 3 Cassette PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 11 2KL 2KK Connector Signal Voltage Description YC1 Connected to the main engine PWB AN DOA ON D L2 a 2 0 AN Da asa 0 NN O TEMP HMCLK1 HMCLK2 HUMID C1PWSWN C1PDSWN 5V2 TONEPY SGND BPWSW REGSWN ICLTN IPPSWN BPPESW SGND BSOLN FCLTN REGCLN 24V1 24V1 3 3V Analog 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse Analog 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 5 VDC Analog 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC Analog 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 3 3 V DC HUMS detection signal Not used HUMS clock signal HUMS detection signal PWSW On Off PSW On Off 5 V DC power input from MEPWB TCS detection signal Ground MPPWSW On Off RSW On Off DUPFCL On Off DUPPCSW On Off MPPSW On Off Ground MPSOL On Off PFCL On Off RCL On Off 24 V DC power input from MEPWB 24 V DC power input from MEPWB 3 3 V DC power input from MEPWB Connected to the paper switch 23 1 SGND C1PDSWN 5V2 0 3 3 V DC 5VDC Ground PSW On Off 5 V DC power output to PSW YC3 Connected
128. DK 2600 Glostrup Denmark Phone 45 5687 1100 KYOCERA MITA PORTUGAL LDA Rua do Centro Cultural 41 Alvalade 1700 106 Lisbon Portugal Phone 351 21 842 9100 KYOCERA MITA SOUTH AFRICA PTY LTD 527 Kyalami Boulevard Kyalami Business Park Midrand South Africa Phone 27 0 11 540 2600 KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC Headquarters 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 U S A Phone 973 808 8444 KYOCERA MITA AUSTRALIA PTY LTD Level 3 6 10 Talavera Road North Ryde N S W 2113 Australia Phone 02 9888 9999 KYOCERA MITA NEW ZEALAND LTD 1 3 Parkhead Place Albany P O Box 302 125 NHPC Auckland New Zealand Phone 09 415 4517 KYOCERA MITA THAILAND CORP LTD 9 209 Ratchada Prachachem Road Bang Sue Bangkok 10800 Thailand Phone 02 586 0320 KYOCERA MITA SINGAPORE PTE LTD 121 Genting Lane 3rd Level Singapore 349572 Phone 67418733 KYOCERA MITA HONG KONG LIMITED 11 F Mita Centre 552 566 Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan New Territories Hong Kong Phone 24297422 KYOCERA MITA TAIWAN Corporation 7F 1 2 No 41 Lane 221 Gangchi Rd Neihu District Taipei Taiwan 114 R O C Phone 02 87511560 KYOCERA MITA Corporation 2 28 1 chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 06 6764 3555 http www kyoceramita com Printed in Holland KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC Headquarters 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 TEL 973 808 84
129. E FIR THREE BU UIN HAR WEN h Bp dier ET SUEDE G WE KERE LRN Baya 24 0 2mm ESRI LOD 4 FOE 1 AY FF YAL KU070 BEY PL CONVEY SPEEDI 2 BEER L RSS FRERE X0 E FIRE rv SAA eMU 7A pallio UI REA TS BUE E EU FU al 4 777 h OYE APY STW i OBR REM Fi AF y DCE 0 2mm x ON 16 3 3 Make a proof copy again Repeat steps 1 to 2 until line 2 of copy example shows the following the reference values lt Reference value gt Within 1 5 Effectuez nouveau une copie de test R p tez les tapes 1 2 jusqu ce que la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de r f rence suivantes Valeur de r f rence 1 5 max Haga otra copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 2 hasta que la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia Valor de referencia Dentro de 1 5 96 Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen Die Schritte 1 bis 2 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist lt Bezugswert gt Innerhalb 1 5 96 Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia Ripetere i passi da 1 a 2 fino a che la linea 2 dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento Valore di riferimento Entro 1 5 96 HEAT EN o REED 1 2 HAMMER 2 ERMUA o lt HU gt 1 596 EA BEFA pIE
130. EU 6 1 AT ABD HU FFT 2 12 Pull the cassette out of the main body and open the front cover 13 Remove the screw 15 and disengage the 3 hooks 16 Then remove the cover 17 12 Sortez la cassette du corps principal et ouvrez le capot avant 13 D posez la vis 15 et lib rez les 3 crochets 16 D posez ensuite le capot 17 12 Extraiga el casete del cuerpo principal y abra la cubierta frontal 13 Quite el tornillo 15 y desenganche los 3 ganchos 16 Despu s desmonte la cubierta 17 12 Die Kassette aus der Haupteinheit herausziehen und die Frontabdeckung ffnen 13 Die Schraube 15 entfernen und die 3 Haken 16 aushaken Dann die Abdeckung 17 abnehmen 12 Estrarre il cassetto dal corpo principale ed aprire il coperchio anteriore 13 Rimuovere la vite 15 e sganciare i 3 ganci 16 Quindi rimuovere il coperchio 17 BU ai MEF C160 RIA 12 WEL PR AK E ANT 13 BC F 15 FAIT 3 EX FA 17 gt 12 AKODE y bes SM LAAN ET Ss 13 A 15141077 16 3 GATE LBA 17 VR E 14 Pull out the cassettes other than the lowest cassette A only when stacking 2 or more cassettes 15 Disengage the 2 hooks 18 and remove the cover 19 only when stacking 2 or more cassettes Remove the cover 19 by pushing it in the direction of arrow 1 and turning it in the
131. Ed When secondary paper feed starts EJE When the paper is ejected Initial setting EJE 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 46 Setting the destination specifications Description Sets the OEM purchaser code Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the preset value using the zoom keys 3 Press the start key The valeu is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U277 Setting auto application change time Description Sets the time that passes until the machine starts automatically printing after completing copying or operation when the machine is used as a printer Purpose According to user request changes the setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the zoom keys Description Setting range Initial setting Switching time 30 to 270 s 30 The setting can be changed by 30 s per step 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the oputional language Description Assign an optional language to add to the user language options Purpose Perform this step to
132. JERE h IN RAE SUEDE G BE BIRRE AR 1 KE 2 0 2mm IAEA WE FRW Edd ED EES RILAT seg 4 TOBA 1 RTH RE KU070 AE y AL EA exp 1 amp BER LEE RAR eT o5 VEBAZ RAUL TA pali Tune D ae hy ay h DER BUE amp LIP A AE TN i OWE KEI FIPS LAF gt AOR EE 0 2mm IEVEF 15 X 100 lt 1 5 If the operation panel is an LCD type 1 Set the mode to Maintenance Mode U070 select CONVEY SPEED1 and use image magnification and paper cassette level selection to adjust the upper and lower limits Then press the Interrupt key and check the image in the proof copy For copy example h Increase the setting value For copy example i Decrease the setting value Amount of change per step 0 2 mm Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD 1 Passez en mode de maintenance U070 s lectionnez CONVEY SPEED 1 puis ajustez les bords sup rieur et inf rieur l aide des fonctions d agrandissement de l image et de s lection du niveau de la cassette papier Appuyez sur la touche d interruption et v rifiez l image l aide d une copie de test Pour l exemple de copie h Augmentez la valeur de r glage Pour l exemple de copie i Diminuez la valeur de r glage Quantit de changement par pas 0 2 mm Si el tablero de controles es del tipo LCD 1 Entre en el modo de mantenimiento e ingrese en el tem de mantenimiento U070 sel
133. K 6 Detaching and refitting the fuser thermistor Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser thermistor Procedure 1 Separate the right and left fuser unit see page 1 5 42 Remove the heat roller see page 1 5 48 3 Remove the screw and remove the fuser thermistor 4 Replace the fuser thermistor and refit all the removed parts Caution Restore the fuser thermistor wire to its origi nal correct position After refitting the heat roller push the roller lightly to check that the detection surface of the fuser thermistor comes in contact with the roller N 1 5 50 Fuser thermistor Right fuser unit Figure 1 5 83 2KL 2KK 7 Detaching and refitting the fuser thermostat Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser thermostat Cautions Be sure to replace it after finding the cause of failure If the cause is not found do not replace only the component in question but the entire unit If C6000 or C6020 occurs replace the thermostat after resolving the problem Before replacement conduct continuity check for the thermostat Procedure 1 2 3 4 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 40 Remove two positive terminals from fuser thermostat Remove two screws and remove the fuser thermostat Replace the fuser thermostat and refit all the removed parts Fuser thermostat Cautions Insert the terminal all the way into the unit Put the slack of electric wire toward the front sid
134. L 2KK Maintenance item No Description U088 Setting the input filter moire reduction mode Description Turns moire reduction mode on and off by switching the input filter on and off Purpose Used to prevent regular density unevenness moir on halftone image areas of the copy image in text mode and text and photo mode Such moire is more likely to appear when an enlargement or reduction copy is made in text mode from an original containing large halftone image areas Method Press the start key Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select on or oFF using the zoom keys Display Description on Moir reduction mode oFF Normal copy mode Initial setting oFF If moire on the copy image is significant change the setting to on Note that when the moire reduction mode is turned on the resolution may be slightly reduced 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U089 Outputting a MIP PG pattern Description Selects and outputs a MIP PG pattern created in the machine Purpose When performing respective image printing adjustments used to check the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non scanned output MIP PG pattern Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the MIP PG pattern to be output using the exposure adjustment keys ee Display Description Setting range Initial setting Exp
135. LCD indicator data signal 5 LCD indicator data signal 6 LCD indicator data signal 7 Ground Ground Connected to the APC PWB PDN SGND OUTREN SAMPLEN VDON VDOP 5V1 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 5 V DC Laser sync signal Ground Laser diode output signal Sample hold signal Image data signal Image data signal 5 V DC power output to APCPWB Connected to the printer PWB PDGDIN C2PRRSTN SAMPLEGDIN PDMASKGDIN C2PSDIR C2PEGSI C2PEGSO C2PSBSY G2PSCKN C2PEGIRN GDILVDS ENB N SGND LDOUTP GDI 5V SGND 5V SGND 5V SGND 5V o oo 0O0O0O O O 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 5 VDC 5 VDC 5 VDC 5 VDC PRNPWEB control signal PRNPWB reset signal PRNPWEB control signal PRNPWEB control signal PRNPWEB control signal PRNPWEB serial communication data signal PRNPWEB serial communication data signal PRNPWEB control signal PRNPWB clock signal PRNPWEB control signal PRNPWEB control signal Ground PRNPWEB control signal 5 V DC power output to PRNPWB Ground 5 V DC power output to PRNPWB Ground 5 V DC power output to PRNPWB Ground 5 V DC power output to PRNPWB 2 3 9 2KL 2KK Connector Signal Voltage Description YC36 Connected to the printer PWB 2 3 10 SGND SGND SETN G
136. LSU OUT TIMING e premere il tasto di avvio Selezionare LSU DUP Premere il tasto di interruzione per eseguire i modelli di prova nel modo duplex e controllare l immagine Valore di riferimento Entro 3 0 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a Se lo scostamento fra il centro della carta linea tratteggiata e la linea dell esempio di copia 2 maggiore rispetto al valore di riferimento effettuare la RO For the image in copy example b Increase the value For the image in copy example c Decrease the value Setting range 7 0 10 0 Changing the value by one moves the center line by 0 1 mm 3 Output the test pattern again Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an adequate image is obtained lt Reference value gt Within 3 0 mm copy example a image Pour l image dans l exemple de copie b augmenter la valeur Pour l image dans l exemple de copie c diminuer la valeur Plage de param tres 7 0 10 0 Lorsqu on change la valeur d une unit la ligne centrale se d place de 0 1 mm Produisez nouveau le motif de test R p tez les op rations 2 et 3 jusqu ce que la ligne 1 dans l exemple de copie soit dans les limites de la valeur de r f rence Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 3 0 mm image a d un exemple de copie Para la imagen en la copia de muestra b aumentar el valor Para la imagen en la copia de muestra c disminuir el valor Gama de ajustes 7 0 10 0 Un cambio d
137. OWS 2 RU ERAN A DESK DEY KOEYVBELUT ARITY TAN E IEEE Place the main body directly down onto the cassettes by aligning the positioning insertion sections of the main body 4 with the positioning pins 3 at the rear of the cassette A When placing the main body on the cassettes take care not to hit the main body against the cassette pins or ground plate Placez directement le corps principal sur les cassettes en alignant les sections d insertion de positionnement 4 du corps pirncipal avec les goupilles de positionnement 3 l arri re de la cassette A dans le cas d un empilage de 2 cassettes ou plus uniquement Lorsque le corps principal est plac sur les cassettes attention ne pas le cogner le corps principal contre les goupilles ou la plaque de terre de la cassette Coloque el cuerpo principal directamente sobre los casetes alineando las secciones de inserci n de ubicaci n del cuerpo principal 4 con los pasadores de ubicaci n 3 en la parte posterior del casete A Cuando coloque el cuerpo principal sobre los casetes tenga cuidado de no golpear el cuerpo principal contra los pasadores o placa de fondo de los casetes Die Haupteinheit direkt auf die Kassetten setzen dabei die Positionsstiftnuten der Haupteinheit 4 auf die Positionsstifte 3 am hinteren Teil der Kassette A ausrichten Achten Sie beim Platzieren der Haupteinheit darauf dass Sie nicht gegen die Kassettenst
138. Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Connected to the opera tion PWB 2 3 8 0 100 AOON zg o 5V BUZERDRN SCAN SCAN6 SCAN5 SCAN4 SCAN3 SCAN2 SCAN1 SCANO o o ooo o o o o 0 0 000000000000 5 VDC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 5 V DC power output to OPWB OPWB buzzer signal Scan signal 7 Scan signal 6 Scan signal 5 Scan signal 4 Scan signal 3 Scan signal 2 Scan signal 1 Scan signal 0 o O gt NOO A d SD N o Connector Signal Voltage 2KL 2KK Description YC31 Connected to the LCD PWB ON DOA pa WY SGND 3 3V 3 3V LCDRS LCDR_W LCDEN LCDDO LCDD1 LCDD2 LCDD3 LCDD4 LCDD5 LCDD6 LCDD7 SGND SGND o o ooo o o ooo oo 0 3 3 VDC 3 3 VDC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse Ground 3 3 V DC power output to LCDPWB 3 3 V DC power output to LCDPWB LCD indicator control signal LCD indicator control signal LCD indicator control signal LCD indicator data signal 0 LCD indicator data signal 1 LCD indicator data signal 2 LCD indicator data signal 3 LCD indicator data signal 4
139. PARTS LAMP INVERTER SP PARTS PWB PANEL ASSY SP PARTS LCD OPERATION SP PARTS PWB INTERFACE ASSY SP PARTS GDI PWB ASSY SP 2KL 2KK 2 Switches and sensors Machine front LZ Machine inside C Machine rear Figure 2 2 2 Switches and sensors 1 Main power switch MSW Turns the AC power on and off 2 Front cover safety switch FCSSW Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened 3 Left cover safety switch LCSSW Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover is opened 4 Paper switch PSW Detects the presence of paper in the cassette 5 Paper size length switch PLSW Detects the length of paper in the cassette 6 Paper size width switch PWSW Detects the width of paper in the cassette 7 MP paper size width switch MPPWSW Detects the width of paper on the MP tray 8 Home position switch HPSW Detects the optical system in the home position 9 Original detection switch ODSW Operates the original size detection sensor 10 Original size detection sensor OSDS Detects the size of the original 11 Registration switch RSW Controls the secondary paper feed start timing 12 Eject switch ESW sess Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section 13 Feedshift switch FSSW Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback se
140. PSOL Primary paper feed from the MP tray 4 Exposure lamp EL Exposes originals 5 Cleaning lamp CL Removes residual charge from the drum surface 6 Fuser heater M FH M sss Heats the heat roller 7 Fuser heater S FH S sees Heats the heat roller 8 Fuser thermostat 1 FTS1 Prevents overheating in the fuser section 9 Fuser thermostat 2 FTS2 Prevents overheating in the fuser section 10 Cassette heater CH Dehumidifies the cassette section 11 Duplex feed clutch DUPFCL Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller Option 2 2 5 2KL 2KK This page is intentionally left blank 2 2 6 2KL 2KK 2 3 1 Power source PWB Figure 2 3 1 Power source PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 1 2KL 2KK Connector Signal Voltage Description TB Connected to the AC inlet and main power switch AC LIVE AC COM LIVE LIVE 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power input AC power input AC power output to MSW AC power input from MSW Connected to the main engine PWB GND 24V 24V 24V GND GND 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC Ground 24 V DC power output to MEPWB 24 V DC power output to MEPWB 24 V DC power output to MEPWB Ground Ground Connected to the main engine PWB 24V2 ZCROSS RELAYREM GND SHREM
141. Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U403 U071 U404 P 1 3 51 P 1 3 24 P 1 3 52 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 20 Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U067 Adjusting the scanner center line Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original CAdjustment 1 Press the start key Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Scanner center line 66 to 66 10 0 17 mm Press the interrupt key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Change the setting value using the zoom keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Scanner center line Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 10 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U067 U403 U072 U404 P 1 3 51 P 1 3 25 P 1 3 52 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed
142. RAM on the main PWB to return to the original settings Refer to 1 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized Reset each intialized mode based on an own status report U000 printed at installing the machine Purpose Run as needed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select on using the zoom keys Display Operation 345 Canceling initialization on Executing initialization Press the start key All data in the backup RAM is initialized and the original settings for Japan specifi cations are set When initialization is complete the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the power switch is turned on Initializing memories Description Initializes all settings except those pertinent to the type of machine namely each counter service call history and mode setting Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination Refer to 2 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized Purpose Used to return the machine settings to the factory settings Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select on using the zoom keys Display Operation Canceling initialization on Executing initialization Press the start key All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initial ized based on the destination setting When initialization is complete
143. RATOR ASSY 302KK93040 302KK93050 302KK94240 302KK94290 302FT20120 2KK93040 2KK93050 2KK94240 2KK94290 2FT20120 Eject roller Eject pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley PARTS ROLLER EXIT INNER SP PULLEY EXIT PARTS ROLLER FEED SHIFT SP PULLEY FEED SHIFT 302KK94300 302KK28030 302KK94310 2C921040 2KK94300 2KK28030 2KK94310 2 4 1 2KL 2KK Periodic maintenance procedures Section Maintenance part location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Test copy and test print Section Perform at the maxi mum copy size Maintenance part location Test copy Method Every service Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Paper feed section 2 4 2 Paper feed pulley Separation pulley Forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley MP separation pad Left registration roller Right registration roller Check or replace Check or replace Check or replace Check replace or clean Check or replace Check replace or clean Check replace or clean User call User call User call Every service User call Every service Every service Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty
144. ROW nn ere Pi ces fournies A Chargeur de document DP B Tapis d original C Plaque de r glage d angle D Goupille E Vis M4 x 14 Piezas suministradas A Procesador de documentos DP B Plancha de originales C Placa de ajuste de ngulo D Pasador E Tornillo M4 x 14 Gelieferte Teile A Vorlageneinzug DP B Originalmatte C Winkeleinstellhalter D R ndelschraube T E M4 x 14 Schraube Parti di fornitura A Alimentatore di originali DP B Coprioriginale C Piastra di regolazione dell angolo D Pernod anis E Vite MAX ld da ani lil UN nn UN mn UN BND FE on A RS DP 1 Br E O 1 A Re per T 1 ELICIT 2 E AMX IA Lese 5 ER A JE 0 EE DP 1 B JRA VW kR 1 O das ete oka 1 Di Bice died aid 2 AMEX Missas erri ics 5 FO RIM a n hie eene 1 G Label A for 120 V specifications for 220 V 240 V specifications 1 H Label B for 220 V 240 V specifications 1 Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning material from supplied parts G tiquette A pour les sp cifications 120 V pour les sp cifications 220 V 240 V 1 H Etiquette B pour les sp cifications
145. S MEDHA 4 Omm LP I ra ESOS LHe RIAS Adjusting the DP 1 Open the DP and loosen two adjusting screws 3 of right hinge 2 Adjust the position of the DP For copy example d Move the DP down For copy example e Move the DP up gt Amount of change per scale Approx 0 5 mm pw Tighten two adjusting screws 3 Carry out the tasks in steps 7 and 8 on page 4 Briefly remove the original mat B from the DP main unit A and then re attach the original mat B by following the steps Resserrez les deux vis de r glage 3 R glage du DP 1 Ouvrez le DP et desserrez les deux vis de r glage 3 de la charni re droite 2 R glez la position du DP Pour l exemple de copie d D placez le DP vers le bas Pour l exemple de copie e D placez le DP vers le haut gt Quantit de changement par pas Environ 0 5 mm pw Proc dez aux op rations des tapes7 et 8 de la page 4 Enlevez bri vement le tapis d original B de l unit principale DP A et r installez le tapis d original B en proc dant de la mani re suivante Apriete los tornillos de ajuste 3 Ajuste del DP 1 Abra el DP y afloje los dos tornillos de ajuste 3 de la bisagra derecha 2 Ajuste la posici n del DP Para la copia de muestra d Mueva el DP abajo Para la copia de muestra e Mueva el DP arriba
146. SLEEP MHREM 24 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC power output to MEPWB Zero cross signal Relay signal Ground FH S On Off Sleep signal On Off FH M On Off Connected to the cas sette heater and paper feeder Sain O AoA WBN ALD oc Bb Y N LIVE LIVE NC NEUTRAL NEUTRAL 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH AC power output to CH Not used AC power output to CH paper feeder AC power output to CH paper feeder Connected to the fuser heater M S 2 3 2 MH SH 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC FH M On Off FH S On Off AC power output to FM M S 2KL 2KK 2 3 2 Main engine PWB B1 10 2 1 45 1 4 1 YC33 5 d 2 1YC309 YC29 17 YC27 15 El voz 7 YC16 10 YC8 2 U25 1 U26 uzo A12 eo U11 27 4 9 vere 5 U7 fe 1 aa U9 i UG 2 L sw U19 ua ut U18 Figure 2 3 2 Main engine PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 3 2KL 2KK Connector Signal Voltage Description YC3 Connected to the poly gon motor cooling fan motor 1 overflow sensor cleaning lamp and fuser ther mistor PLGCLKN PLGRDYN PLGDRN PLGGND PLG 24V1 FAN1DRN FAN1 24V1 NC NC TONEGND TONEFULL TONE 5V2 ERASE 24V1 NC ERASE2N ERASE1N
147. Scanner left margin right margin 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm Scanner trailing edge margin 3 0 2 5 mm Figure 1 3 18 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U404 P 1 3 52 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 51 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U404 1 3 52 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect when the optional DP is used Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U402 U403 P 1 3 50 P 1 3 51 Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure Y Setting Initial Change in Fs Description indicator range setting value per step Exp 1 Left margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm Exp 2 Leading edge margin 0 0to 10 0 3 0 0 5 mm Exp 3 Right margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm Exp 4 Trailing edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm Press the interrupt key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Change the setting value using the zoom keys Increasing the valu
148. Sie LSU T1 Kassette 3 Stufe W hlen Sie LSU T2 Kassette 4 Stufe W hlen Sie LSU T3 Dr cken Sie die Unterbrechungstaste um ein Testmuster auszudrucken und berpr fen Sie das Druckbild lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 2 0 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Falls der Abstand zwischen der Mittenlinie des Papiers Punktierte Linie und der Kopienmusterlinie 2 gr er als der Bezugswert ist ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD Regolazione della linea di centro 1 1 Avviare il modo manutenzione 034 Selezionare ADJ LSU OUT TIMING e premere il tasto di avvio Cassetto del 2 livello Selezionare LSU T1 Cassetto del 3 livello Selezionare LSU T2 Cassetto del 4 livello Selezionare LSU T3 Premere il tasto di interruzione per stampare i modelli di prova e controllare l immagine stampata Valore di riferimento Entro 2 0 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a Se lo scostamento fra il centro della carta linea tratteggiata e la linea dell esempio di copia 2 maggiore rispetto al valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione REHIA LCD ZR roe eR IS RE Li THERE 034 F ADJ LSU OUT TIMING 4 FIRME R LSU TI BAR LSU T2 SUA LSU T3 PEN aE FERRER AU Rite SAME gt 2 0 mm WA Ca ERA SEEDS PD eene CEE GE Enos lA 2 CORR PRESE E S GER IMITA iir W EREVAN AILAS LOD 24 FOIRE 4124794 VIA 1 AVFFYAE FU034 SHEATHS ADJ LSU OUT TIMING EIR L 3 2
149. U EE d HF H DP l F 9 Ba JU EF e IN E DP ii E gt Bay f LNB ne 24 O 5mm DAT E 4 PIR 7 AI 8 PITA DP A ELLIS B ARRE HLT LCR EURE B gt MECA 3 2 ARDE DP DERE 1 DP P ES VAMO E 3 44050b 2 DP Of Et amp Td 11 47 77 d OYA DP AWE F BD APC YAW e OY DP AIRE ED AT 1 HAE 0 2577 0 OB E A 0 5mm 3 4 4A S 7DEI 7 8 DIFETTI ET v b B DP AE A 225 E BOO LA CHEV EU v h B HERO AIFS to m 10 4 3mm 4mm Make a proof copy again Repeat steps 1 to 5 until line 2 of copy example shows the following the reference values lt Reference value gt For simplex copying Within 3 0 mm For duplex copying Within 4 0 mm Effectuez nouveau une copie de test R p tez les tapes 1 5 jusqu ce que la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de r f rence suivantes Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 3 0 mm max Copie recto verso 4 0 mm max Haga otra copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 5 hasta que la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen Die Schritte 1 bis 5 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufw
150. W Text amp Photo DP timing switch DPTSW Photo Original detection switch ODSW Text DP original cover switch DPOCSW EcoPrint Original switchback switch OSBSW Program Original size length switch OSLSW Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 43 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U245 Checking messages Description Displays a list of messages on the operation panel Purpose To check the messages to be displayed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be displayed 3 Displays the message one by one using zoom keys When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed the mes sage corresponding the specified number is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the maintenance cycle Description Displays and changes the maintenance cycle Purpose To check and change the maintenance cycle Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Setting range Initial setting Exp 1 Exp 2 First 3 digits Last 3 digits 000 to 999 000 to 999 150 000 3 Change the setting using the numeric or zoom keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key Th
151. Y C expl Z RIK SES E FR 6 FY 3A Z3 XE TR Lili ECFA RAE READ UAT I TI Gi 20 2 5mm LAN a EH 77v a Wife FOIE OBE lL MOM Ze 38 78 0 iei MER DIEM peo gt For the image in copy example b Increase the value For the image in copy example c Decrease the value ISetting range 5 0 10 0 Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0 1 mm Make a test copy again Repeat steps 2 to 3 until the line 1 in the copy example is within the reference value lt Reference value gt Within 20 2 5 mm copy example a image Pour l image dans l exemple de copie b augmenter la valeur Pour l image dans l exemple de copie c diminuer la valeur Plage de param tres 5 0 10 0 Lorsqu on change la valeur d une unit le bord avant se d place de 0 1 mm Effectuez nouveau une copie de test R p tez les op rations 2 et 3 jusqu ce que la ligne 1 dans l exemple de copie soit dans les limites de la valeur de r f rence Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 20 2 5 mm image a d un exemple de copie Para la imagen en la copia de muestra b aumentar el valor Para la imagen en la cone de muestra c disminuir el valor Gama de ajustes 5 0 10 0 Un cambio de valor en una unidad mueve el extremo guia en 0 1 mm Vuelva a hacer una copia de ensayo Repetir los pasos 2 a 3 hasta que la l nea
152. a cassette Check visually and replace any deformed guide Check if a pressure spring along the paper conveying path is deformed or out of place Repair or replace 4 The scanner does not travel Check if the scanner wire is loose Reinstall the scanner wire see page 1 5 19 The scanner motor malfunctions See page 1 4 28 5 Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the separation pulley is worn Replace the separation pulley if it is worn see page 1 5 3 Check ifthe MP separation pad is worn Replace the MP separation pad if it is worn see page 1 5 11 6 Paper jams Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Check visually and replace any deformed guides Check if the contact between the right and left registration rollers is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed Clean or replace the press roller Check if the contact between the heat roller and its separation claws is correct Repair if any springs are off the separation claws Check if the contact between the eject roller and pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary 7 Toner drops on the paper conveying path Check if the developing unit is extremely dirty Clea
153. a hauteur du DP Desserrez l crou 7 Pour l exemple de copie f Desserrez la vis de r glage 8 m Pour l exemple de copie g Serrez la vis de r glage 8 gt Quantit de changement par pas environ 1 mm 9 environ 0 5 mm 10 Resserrez l crou 7 Ajuste la altura del DP Afloje la tuerca 7 Para la copia de muestra f Afloje el tornillo de ajuste 8 Para la copia de muestra g Apriete el tornillo de ajuste 8 gt Cantidad de cambio de escala Aprox 1 mm 9 aprox 0 5 mm 10 Vuelva a apretar la tuerca 7 Die H he des DP einstellen L sen Sie die Mutter 7 F r Kopienmuster f L sen Sie die Einstellschraube 8 F r Kopienmuster g Die Einstellschraube 8 festziehen gt Anderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich ca 1 mm 9 ca 0 5 mm 10 Ziehen Sie die Mutter 7 wieder fest Regolazione dell altezza del DP Allentare il dado 7 Per un esempio di copia f Allentare la vite di regolazione 8 m Per un esempio di copia g Stringere la vite di regolazione 8 gt Variazione graduale circa 1 mm 9 circa 0 5 mm 10 Stringere di nuovo il dado 7 Vix DP HAR BAUER 7 MENPE MN FASI 8 m MIEN AE e MN EMIR 8 f 1 1423 21 1mm 9 Zj 0 5mm 10 TERRE 7 PERI DP DAS HET FyR T ADIDO AE2 Y AW f ORAR EA 8 5502 m ESHTI g OBA HEE 8 ER D 1 HE 0 2577 0 OBES 1mm 9 9 0 5
154. ace the developing unit and refit all the removed parts 4 Perform maintenance mode U130 initial setting for the developing unit see page 1 3 36 Developing unit 5 Perform maintenance mode U157 clearing the developing drive time see page 1 3 38 Figure 1 5 62 1 5 37 2KL 2KK 1 5 6 Transfer section 1 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller Procedure Q gt Transfer roller unit 1 Remove the paper conveying unit see page ds 1 5 9 2 Remove front and rear inserted parts and remove the transfer roller unit from the paper conveying unit 3 Remve two collars A two collars B gear two stoppers and two bushes from transfer roller Transfer roller Stopper Collar B Collar A Peed Bush Figure 1 5 64 1 5 38 2KL 2KK 4 Replace the transfer roller and refit all the removed parts When refitting the transfer roller unit make sure that the transfer springs are securely fit into the protrusions Transfer roller unit Protrusion Figure 1 5 65 1 5 39 2KL 2KK 1 5 7 Fuser section Caution 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fuser unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover and left cover 2 Remove the screw and release three inserted parts and then remove the front left Front left cover cover Inserted part Inserted par
155. age Replace if an image problem occurs or after the exposure lamp does not turn on Check noise and shifting and then apply optical rail grease EM 50LP Clean the sensor emitter and sen sor receiver with alcohol or a dry cloth only if there is a problem Clean the slit glass with alcohol and then a dry cloth P 1 5 28 Section Method Points and cautions Page part location cycle Transfer Transfer roller Clean User call Vacuum or clean with a dry cloth P 1 5 38 separation when user call occurs section Separation electrode Check or User call Clean with a cleaning brush clean Section Maintenance part location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Developing section Section Developing unit Maintenance part location Check or replace Method User call Maintenance cycle Replace if the problem occurs Points and cautions Drum section Main charger unit Check or replace Every service Replace if an image problem occurs 2 4 3 2KL 2KK Section Maintenance part location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page Fuser section Section Fuser unit Heat roller Press roller Heat roller separation claw Maintenance part location Check or replace Clean Clean Check replace or clean Method User call 150K 150K Every service
156. ake the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the trailing edges of the copy image and original Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the image mode selection key Image mode LEDs Description group No 1 O Ti lText 8 Photo Leading edge registration adjustment O ff amp Photo O T Text O Ir CH Text amp Photo Center line adjustment iPhoto T Text T 45 Text amp Photo Trailing edge margin adjustment falPhoto O ET Text O T 45 Text amp Photo Leading edge registration adjustment for printer falPhoto 0 Text Off On Flashing Adjustment leading edge registration adjustment 1 Select group 1 using the image mode selection key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure Description Setting Initial Change in indicator range setting value per step Exp 1 lit Paper feed from cassette 5 0 to 10 0 2 8 0 1 mm Exp 2 lit Paper feed from MP tray 5 0 to 10 0 0 0 0 1 mm Exp 3 lit Paper feed from optional first 5 0 to 10 0 0 0 0 1 mm paper feeder Exp 4 lit Paper feed from optional second 5 0 to 10 0 0 0 0 1 mm paper feeder Exp 5 lit Paper feed from optional third 5 0 to 10 0 0 0 0 1 mm paper feeder Exp 1 flashing Duplex mode 5 0 to 10 0 0 8 0 1 mm
157. alue is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the interrupt key Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect Caution Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order U065 U065 U053 ili U067 U070 main scanning auxiliary scanning P 1 3 17 direction direction P 1 3 21 P 1 3 23 Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure Description Setting indicator range Exp 1 Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction 25 to 25 Exp 2 Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction 25 to 25 Adjustment main scanning direction 1 Light exp 1 using the exposure adjustment key 2 Press the interrupt key 3 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Change the setting value using the zoom keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the valu
158. amente el patr n de prueba 4 Repetir los pasos 2 a 3 hasta que la l nea 1 en la copia de muestra se encuentre dentro del valor de referencia lt Valor de referencia gt Dentro de 2 0 mm imagen de copia de muestra a 2 F r das Bild im Kopienmuster b Den Wert erh hen F r das Bild im Kopienmuster c Den Wert verringern Einstellbereich 7 0 10 0 Durch Andern des Werts um eins wird die Mittellinie um O 1 mm verschoben 3 Das Testmuster erneut ausgeben 4 Die Schritte 2 und 3 wiederholen bis die Linie 1 im Kopienmuster innerhalb des Bezugswerts liegt lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 2 0 mm Kopienmuster a Bild 2 Per l immagine nell esempio di copia b aumentare il valore Per l immagine nell esempio di copia c ridurre il valore Gamma di impostazione 7 0 10 0 Cambiando il valore di una unit si sposta la linea centrale di 0 1 mm 3 Eseguire di nuovo i modelli di prova 4 Ripetere i passi da 2 a 3 finch la linea 1 nell esempio di copia non sia entro il valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento Entro 2 0 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a i INTE i RUDE o E yu FL 0 7 10 0 Sr ASA 0 1mm Ario AI 3 AA 1 Ya FIM 0 mm WA Ca R RER 2 ATV TI b MADORA E ae HYT c HRD ARRE OA 7 0 10 0 LAF y FORCE 0 1mm BETZ R34 HD BIR AEM FUT VOR 2 ABE ae CRS EC FI 2 Ze UO IT EYEE 2 Omm A 2 EF a BR
159. ap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large an electric field disappears and toner does not leave the developing sleeve Development is complete Magnetic toner blade South pole ce Drum e e e North pole Developing sleeve Figure 2 1 11 Single component developing system 2 1 11 2KL 2KK 2 1 5 Transfer and separation sections The transfer and separation sections consists of the transfer roller separation electrode and drum separation claws A high voltage generated by the high voltage PWB HVTPWB is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation bias that is output from the high voltage PWB HVTPWB to the separation electrode tI Figure 2 1 12 Transfer and separation sections 1 Transfer roller 2 Separation electrode 3 Drum separation claw Drum MEPWB HVTPWB Separation PA high voltage electrode ves PSHVDRN lconte po a SHVISELN YC8 8 L CN1 8 Transfe THVADJC high voltage YC8 3 E gt CN1 3 YC8 4 Juss CN1 4 Transfer roller Figure 2 1 13 Transfer and separation sections block diagram 2 1 12 2KL 2KK 2 1 6 Fuser section The fuser section consists of the parts shown in figure When paper reaches the fuser section after the transfer process it passes between the press roller and heat roller which is heated b
160. appears longitudi nally See page 1 4 23 10 Image is blurred See page 1 4 25 15 lmage is partly missing See page 1 4 26 1 4 21 2KL 2KK 1 No image appears entirely white Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures No trans fer charg ing The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective high voltage PWB Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1 4 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Defective main engine PWB Check if YC8 4 on the main engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB No LSU laser is output Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 28 Defective main engine PWB Check if YC35 5 on the main engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the main engine PWB No devel oping bias output The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective high voltage PWB Check if developing bias is output when CN1 9 on the hi
161. ar Bush 7 Replace the right registration roller and refit Gear all the removed parts El rr Right registration roller E Bush Figure 1 5 26 1 5 16 2KL 2KK 1 5 3 Optical section 1 Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Follow the procedure below to replace the exposure lamp Procedure Screw 1 Remove the original cover or the document b processor Right upper cover 2 Remove two screws and remove the right upper cover Remove the contact glass Figure 1 5 27 Open the front cover and left cover Remove the front left cover see Rear upper cover Release five hooks and both and then remove the front scanner cover 6 Remove two screws and remove the rear upper cover a RO Figure 1 5 28 1 5 17 2KL 2KK 7 Remove two films from the scanner unit 8 Move the mirror 1 frame to notch position When moving the mirror 1 frame do not touch the exposure lamp and the inverter PWB Mirror 1 frame Figure 1 5 29 9 Remove the connector of the exposure lamp from inverter PWB and remove the lamp wire from ribs Inverter PWB Figure 1 5 30 10 Remove two screws and remove the expo sure lamp 11 Replace the exposure lamp and refit all the removed parts Exposure lamp Figure 1 5 31 1 5 18 2KL 2KK 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner wires Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced 2 1 Detaching th
162. ar side through the aperture of the right fuser unit and pull it out 11 Refit the right and left fuser unit 12 Connect front and rear positive terminal to thermstats Cautions Insert the terminal all the way into the unit Put the slack of electric wire toward the front side of the machine Push each terminal and heater wire into the housing so as not to exceed the height of the rib of the fuser unit because they may come in contact with the machine frame at the time of installation of the machine 1 5 46 Right fuser unit Fuser heater wire Right fuser unit Fuser heater wire Positive terminal Figure 1 5 77 2KL 2KK 4 Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws Procedure 1 Separate the right and left fuser unit see page 1 5 42 2 Release four hooks and remove the fuser guide from the right fuser unit Right fuser unit Figure 1 5 78 3 Remove the springs and remove the heat Heat roller roller separation claws separation claw Caution When removing them be careful not to touch the tip of the claw 4 Replace the heat roller separation claws and refit all the removed parts Caution When fitting the separation claws be careful not to scratch the surface of the heat roller Heat roller separation claws Right fuser unit Figure 1 5 79 1 5 47 2KL 2KK 5 Detaching and re
163. art of copying Copying operation temperature 2 Temperature in copying operation after the specified number of sheets for fuser control have passed Number of sheets for fuser control The number of sheets to be counted for switching from copying oper ation temperature 1 to copying operation temperature 2 The temperatures are to be set such that Secondary stabilization 2 Primary stabilization 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Stabilizing fuser forcibly Description Stops the stabilization fuser drive forcibly regardless of fuser temperature Purpose To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fuser section reaches stabilization temperature Method 1 Press the start key on appears 2 Press the start key The forced stabilization mode is entered and stabilization operation stops regard less of fuser temperature The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is Displayed To exit the forced stabilization mode turn the power off and on Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 39 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U163 Resetting the fuser problem data Description Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section Purpose To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature Method 1 P
164. ature does not reach 70 C 158 F in 15 s before secondary stabiliza tion Temperature rise of 1 C 1 8 F does not occur in 5 s before secondary stabiliza tion except during printing Poor contact in the fuser thermistor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Fuser thermistor installed incor rectly Check and reinstall if necessary Fuser thermostat triggered Check for continuity If none replace the fuser thermostat Fuser heater installed incor rectly Check and reinstall if necessary Broken fuser heater wire Check for continuity If none replace the fuser heater Abnormally high fuser thermistor temperature Fuser thermistor is detected 230 C 446 F or more for 40 ms Shorted thermistor Measure the resistance If it is 0 O replace the thermistor Broken heater con trol circuit on the power source PWB Replace the power source PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 19 2KL 2KK Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Abnormally low fuser thermistor tem perature Fuser thermistor remains below 90 C 194 F for 1 s Poor contact in the fuser thermistor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable B
165. casetes o m s del inferior A solo cuando se apilan 2 casetes o m s 9 Den Steckverbinder 13 f r die untere Kassette A in die Steckverbinderbuchse 14 der oberen Kassette A stecken Die Steckverbinderabdeckung 12 von den Kassetten mit Ausnahme nur bei Stapeln von 2 oder mehr Kassetten der untersten Kassette A abnehmen nur bei Stapeln von 2 oder mehr Kassetten 9 Collegare il connettore 13 per il cassettone A inferiore nella presa Rimuovere il coperchio del connettore 12 dai cassettoni eccetto del connettore 14 nel cassettone A superiore solo quando si impilano 2 o pi cassettoni quello del cassettone A pi in basso solo quando si impilano 2 o pi cassettoni pui IR FAR OREA CAD RI LR 12 o 9 Re FARA CAD RRE C130 A EAE CAD TIERE 14 4 MSHS 2 DIR 2 FEAR ARS 2 ha 2 ULEAD 13 amp EME y b A DARIA ED Zn 9 FIDE y b A DARD 14 CET 2 2 ROE 2 8 RFBDIADA y h A ED RI AHS 12 ERO AT 4 2 BEER m 10 Secure each of the cassettes using three M3 x 8 screws B and one M3 x 12 screw C Right Two M3 x 8 screws B Left One M3 x 8 screw B Rear One M3 x 12 screw C 10 Fixez chacune des cassettes l aide des trois vis M3 x 8 B et la vis M3 x 12 C Droite Deux vis M3 x 8 B Gauche Une vis M3 x 8 B Arri re Une vis M3 x 12 C 10 Asegure cada uno de los casetes por
166. cation problem 0500 Second paper feeder communication problem 0510 Third paper feeder communication problem Table 1 4 1 Measures against the service codes detecting fuser problems If one of the following service codes is detected take actions to clear the cause of the trouble and perform maintenance item U163 to reset the service code Contents Fuser heater break Abnormally high fuser thermistor center temperaturee Abnormally low fuser thermistor center temperature Zero cross signal error 1 4 15 2KL 2KK 2 Self diagnostic codes Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Backup memory EEPROM device problem main Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory data problem main Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Backup memory device problem engine EEPROM Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation Device damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Backup memory data problem engine EEPROM Reading data from EEPROM is abnor mal Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrat
167. cator 6 Interrupt key 25 Add toner indicator 7 Logout key 26 Maintenance indicator 8 Zoom key 27 Image quality selection key 9 Zoom key 28 Printer Key 10 OK Key 29 2 sided key 11 Auto 100 key 30 Mixed original size key 12 Paper supply indicator 31 Combine key 13 Paper supply level indicator 32 Split key 14 Paper misfeed indicator 33 Program key 15 MP indicator 34 Border erase key 16 Paper selection key 35 Media type key 17 Original size key 36 Collate key 18 No of copies Zoom display 37 Margin key 19 Message display 1 1 3 Machine cross section 2KL 2KK Figure 1 1 3 Machine cross section c0 CIO Ord NM Paper feed section Optical section Drum section Developing section Transfer and separation sections Fuser section Eject and switchback sections Duplex section p Light path Paper path 2KL 2KK This page is intentionally left blank 1 2 1 Na 2KL 2KK Installation environment Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Humidity 15 to 80 RH Power supply 120 V AC 9 7 A 220 to 240 AC 5 1 A Power source frequency 50 Hz 0 3 60 Hz 0 3 Installation location Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunl
168. cessaire pour les mod les de MFP 22 ppm mod les base imprimante car le couvercle du connecteur F est d j fix Paso adicional durante la instalaci n de PF 420 Piezas adicionales B Tornillo M3 x 8 1 F Cubierta del conector 1 Zus tzlicher Schritt bei der PF 420 Installation Zus tzliche Teile B M3 x 8 Schraube eee 1 F Steckverbinderabdeckung 1 Despu s de instalar el PF 420 apriete la cubierta del conector F en su lugar por medio de un tornillo M3 x 8 B Nota Este paso no es necesario para los modelos MFP de 22 ppm modelos basados en impresoras ya que la cubierta del conector F ya est instalada Nach Installieren deds PF 420 die Steckverbinderabdeckung F mittels einer M3 x 8 Schraube B befestigen Hinweis Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich f r MFP Modell 22 ppm Modell auf Druckerbasis da die Steckverbinderabdeckung F dort schon angebracht ist Passo aggiuntivo durante l installazione di PF 420 Parti aggiuntive B Vite M3 X B Aaa 1 F Coperchio del connettore 1 Dopo l installazione di PF 420 fissare il coperchio del connettore F in posizione utilizzando una vite M3 x 8 B Nota Questo passo non richiesto per i modelli MPF da 22 ppm modelli stampante base poich il coperchio del connettore F gi fissato BE PF 420 HAYMAN eR BADER B M3 x MR e
169. copie lI Augmentez la valeur de r glage Pour l exemple de copie m Diminuez la valeur de r glage Quantit de changement par pas 0 15 mm Si el tablero de controles es del tipo LCD 1 Entre en el modo de mantenimiento e ingrese en el tem de mantenimiento U072 seleccione 1saided y utilice cambio de tama o de la imagen y selecci n del nivel de casete de papel para ajustar los l mites superior e inferior A continuaci n presione la tecla de interrupci n y compruebe la imagen en la copia de prueba Para la copia de muestra l Aumente el valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra m Reduzca el valor de configuraci n Cantidad de cambio por paso 0 15 mm Wenn es sich um eine LCD Bedienungstafel handelt 1 Den Modus auf Wartungsmodus U072 setzen 1saided wahlen und dann die obere und untere Grenze mittels Bildvergr Rerung und Wahl der Papierkassettenstufe einstellen Dann die Unterbrechungstaste dr cken und das Bild an der Probekopie berpr fen F r Kopienmuster Den Einstellwert erh hen F r Kopienmuster m Den Einstellwert erniedrigen Anderungsbetrag pro Stufe 0 15 mm Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD 1 Entrare in modalit manutenzione U072 selezionare 1saided e usare l ingrandimento immagine e la selezione del livello del cassetto carta per regolare i limiti superiore e inferiore Quindi premere il tasto di interruzione e controllare l immagine nella copia di prova Per un e
170. ction in a duplex copy 14 Toner container sensor TCS Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container 15 Toner container detection switch Np ice Detects the presence of the toner container 16 Overflow sensor OFS Detects when the waste toner box is full 17 Fuser thermistor FTH Detects the heat roller temperature 18 MP paper switch MPPSW Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray 19 Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW iaia tenete tte reet Detects a paper jam in the duplex section Option 2 2 3 2KL 2KK 3 Motors KZ Machine inside EN Machine rear Machine front Figure 2 2 3 Motors Drives the machine Drives the drum Drive motor DM 1 2 Drum motor DRM eese 3 Drives the eject section Eject motor EM 4 Scanner motor SM Drives the optical system Cools the machine interior 6 Cooling fan motor 2 CFM2 5 Cooling fan motor 1 CFM1 T Cools the machine interior Drives the polygon mirror Polygon motor PM 2 2 4 2KL 2KK 4 Others Machine front EA Machine inside C Machine rear Figure 2 2 4 Other electrical components 1 Paper feed clutch PFCL Primary paper feed from the cassette 2 Registration clutch RCL Secondary paper feed 3 MP solenoid M
171. ctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the MP solenoid to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the MP solenoid Check see page 1 4 28 3 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from cassette Jam code 11 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley separation pulley or for warding pulley is deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulley Broken registration switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective registration Switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Check if the paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch Check see page 1 4 28 4 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from first paper feeder Jam code 12 1 4 8 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley separation pulley or for warding pulley is deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulley Broken registration switch actuator Check visually and replace switch
172. d dur ing copying an origi nal jam in the original switchback section Jam code 75 1 4 14 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding Switch is not light Check if the original switch back motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original switchback motor to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if nec essary 2KL 2KK 1 4 2 Self diagnosis 1 Self diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self diagnostic function When a problem is detected copying is disabled and the problem dis played as a code consisting of C followed by a number indicating the nature of the problem A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service After removing the problem the self diagnostic function can be reset by turning the main power switch off and back on List of system errors When an unexpected error is detected for some reason a system error A call error will be indicated After a system error A call error is indicated the error can be cleared by turning the main power switch off and then on If a system error A call error occurs frequently a fault may have occurred Check the details of the C call to take proper measures System error Contents 0410 Document processor communication problem 0420 First paper feeder communi
173. d obtain medical Cie EEEE A Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier s instruction haridbook 1 e iii eere a Lig de Pee deed ied O 2 Precautions for Maintenance WARNING Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related biochllfes eco tn dd ed De oa N Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective CIRCUITS vi ene ete ode Odo ia dna N Always use parts having the correct specifications i N Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related bro chure when replacing them Using a piece of wire for example could lead to fire or other serious Q accident AE EA T E De When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part always use the correct scale and measure carefully ssssee Q Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection e Check that the power cable covering is free of damage Check that the power plug is dust free If it is dirty clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock o Never attempt to disassemble the optical
174. ddie 1 F RE aaa 1 TEI PF 420 Ji SERI 1 MI x 8 ERA CB RE Be me CF KI SU EX AA 22ppm As CEP FT ENOL AS CLE Bei CF zr EAT PF 420 22501810 IR EME Bo EAX Buscucescieese ete rd 1 F SRT FDA os a di 1 PF 420 BRIER ARI AN F SEAMS X 8 B 1A CMELT lt K KAY XE MFP CZ U v2 FEMERE O 22 rt TCL ART AI 0 23H00 Ev CWS A ERAN AE TF 2009 4 303MH56811 Supplied parts A Cassette sn essences 1 B M33 8B SCREW iia ira 4 C M3 x 12 screw wf D Cassette size label sd E Hole seal 3 Pi ces fournies A Cassette oid n terrea 1 B Vis M3 x 8 4 C Vis M3 x 12 sen et D tiquette au format cassette Lan E Obturateur ceccceeeessseeeeeeeeeeeee 3 Partes suministradas A Casele recited e Rx Rad 1 B Tornillo M3 x 8 4 C Tornillo M3 x 12 41 D Etiqueta de tamafio del casete il E Sello para orificios Li 3 Gelieferte Teile AIKASS CG sini alan B M3 x 8 Schrauben sess C M3 x 12 Schraube D Kassettengr Ben Etikett su E Abdeckungsetikett Parti di fornitura A Cassetto iii 1 B Viti M3 x 8 4 C Vite M3 x 12 1 D Etichetta del formato del cassetto gt 1 E Goptiforo nire 3 f amp j rh xc A Miceli 1 BMX Ezra 4 C MI X LR aaa Ra 1 D ACARSPERAE iii 1 E ERR 3
175. de tama o vea la p gina 15 Para verificar la sincronizaci n del borde inferior vea la p gina 17 Para verificar la l nea central vea la p gina 19 Valor de referencia Valor de referencia Valor de referencia Valor de referencia Valor de referencia Copia simple dentro de 3 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 4 0 mm Copia simple dentro de 3 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 4 0 mm Dentro de 1 5 96 Copia simple dentro de 2 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 2 0 mm Copia simple dentro de 2 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 3 0 mm Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste puede hacerse un ajuste autom tico del cambio de tama o sincronizaci n del borde superior y l nea central al mismo tiempo Para el ajuste autom tico utilizando el original para el ajuste vea la p gina 21 berpr fen des Bilds vom DP Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchf hren Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgef hrt werden Angaben zur Pr fung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 8 Angaben zur Pr fung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 11 Angaben zur Pr fung der Vergr erung auf Seite 15 Angaben zur Pr fung des Vorderkanten Timings auf Seite 17 Angaben zur Pr fung der Mittellinie auf Seite 19 lt Bezugswert gt lt Bezugswert gt lt Bezugswert gt lt Bezugswert gt lt Bezugswert gt Simplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Duplexkopie Simplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Duplexkopie
176. e Original Copy Copy example example 2 Figure 1 3 7 5 Press the start key The value is set Adjustment auxiliary scanning direction 1 Light exp 2 using the exposure adjustment key 2 Press the interrupt key 3 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Change the setting value using the zoom keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 8 5 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 19 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original Adjustment 1 Press the start key Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Scanner leading edge registration 32 to 20 0 0 17 mm Press the interrupt key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Change the setting value using the zoom keys For copy example 1 decrease the value For copy example 2 increase the value Scanner leading edge registration tat Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 9 5
177. e 72 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding Switch is not light Check if the original con veying motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if nec essary 23 An original jams in DP is indicated dur ing copying an origi nal jam in the original conveying section 2 Jam code 73 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Check if the original con veying motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if nec essary 24 An original jams in DP is indicated dur ing copying an origi nal jam in the original conveying section 3 Jam code 74 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Check if the original con veying motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if nec essary 25 An original jams in DP is indicate
178. e IB 110 optional Installazione dell interfaccia USB IB 110 opzione Vertikale Installation von IB 110 1 Den mit IB 110 gelieferten Vertikalst nder C anbringen Installazione di IB 110 in posizione verticale 1 Fissare il supporto verticale C fornito in dotazione con IB 110 Horizontale Installation von IB 110 1 Die mit IB 110 gelieferten vier Gummif Re D gem der Abbildung anbringen Installazione di IB 110 in posizione orizzontale 1 Fissare le quattro basi di gomma D fornite in dotazione con IB 110 come indicato nel disegno 2 Schalten Sie den DIP Schalter 3 auf der Druckerkarte A von HIGH auf FULL um Hinweis Falls das IB 110 nicht verwendet wird muss der DIP Schalter auf HIGH gesetzt bleiben 2 Spostate il selettore DIP 3 sulla scheda stampante A dalla posizione HIGH a FULL Nota Se l unit IB 110 non verr utilizzata il selettore DIP deve essere lasciato alla posizione HIGH 3 Den mit Ferritkern versehenen Stecker des mit IB 110 gelieferten Netzkabels E an die Druckerkarte und das andere Ende an IB 110 anschlieBen 4 Das mit IB 110 gelieferte USB Kabel F an die Druckerkarte und das andere Ende an IB 110 anschlieBen Hinweis Verwenden Sie unbedingt das mitgelieferte Netzkabel und USB Kabel 3 Collegare il connettore che ha un nucleo in ferrite del cavo di alimentazione E fornito in dotazione con IB 110 alla scheda stampante e collegare l altra estremit a IB 1
179. e LEDs go off press the start key All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors Description Turns the motors or solenoids in the optional DP on Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors or solenoids Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the motor or solenoid to be operated using the exposure adjustment keys 3 Press the start key The operation starts Exposure indicator Display Motor Exp 1 F 0 Original feed motor OFM Exp 2 C 0 Original conveying motor OCM Exp 3 r 0 Original switchback motor OSBM Exp 4 b S Switchback feedshift solenoid SBFSSOL Exp 5 P S Switchback pressure solenoid SBPSOL 4 Toturn each motor off press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key when operation stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches in the DP Purpose To check if respective switches in the DP operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status When the on status of a switch is detected the LEDs on the operation panel corresponding to the operated switch lights LEDs Switch Auto Exp Original set switch OSS
180. e PWB for correct operation a ine ap PEAK DIMM installed Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket incorrectly on the main engine PWB correctly Defective DIMM Replace the DIMM and check for correct operation C0620 Memory input interface problem Defective main Replace the main engine PWB and check Reading in of an image does not com engine PWB for correct operation plete within 10 s of the start of image transmission C0630 DMA problem Defective main Replace the main engine PWB and check DMA transmission of compressed engine PWB for correct operation decompressed rotated relocated or blanked out image data does not com plete within the specified period of time C0800 Image processing problem Defective main Replace the main engine PWB and check JAMOB is detected twice engine PWB for correct operation C2000 Drive motor problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC6 on A stable state does not continue for 1 s from 1 s after the drive motor is acti vated connector termi nals the main engine PWB and the connector on the drive motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation
181. e di riferimento Entro 3 0 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a bE N AS Tr REL o MOVIE Weeds 1 0 40 0 LAMAR 0 1mm FRUTA EN E 2 3 E ES BAS PZ 1 DRE S Ab FSA ede SEA COBRAR 3 Omm IA a MRAZ EN x Bi ALY DW b RODA MAEZ LIFTS AV c BOSSES SERE 7 0 10 0 LAF gt 7 DCE 0 1mm EET A FX LH ETS AEP YS VOPR 2 IE ZR SEC FE 2 3 amp VIET EXE 3 Omm DIN 2 E 9 a HR fv Y 202 5mm If the operation panel is an LCD type Adjusting the leading edge timing 1 1 Run maintenance mode 034 Select ADJ RCL ON TIMING and press the Start key Select RCL DUP Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern in duplex mode and check the image lt Reference value gt Within 20 2 5 mm copy example a image If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment Si le panneau de commande est du type LCD R glage de la synchronisation du bord avant 1 Ex cutez le mode de maintenance 034 S lectionnez ADJ RCL ON TIMING et appuyez sur la touche de d part copie S lectionnez RCL DUP Appuyez sur la touche d interruption pour produire le motif de test en mode recto verso et v rifiez l image Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 20 2 5 mm image a d un exem
182. e document processor and adjust it if it is not properly installed Defective PWB Replace the main engine PWB or DP driver PWB and check for correct operation First paper feeder communication problem Communication fails five times succes sively 1 4 16 First paper feeder installed incor rectly Check the installation state of the first paper feeder and adjust it if it is not properly installed Defective PWB Replace the main engine PWB or cassette main PWB and check for correct operation 2KL 2KK Remarks rede contents Causes Check procedures corrective measures A0500 Second paper feeder communication Second paper Check the installation state of the second problem feeder installed paper feeder and adjust it if it is not properly Communication fails five times succes incorrectly installed sively Defective PWB Replace the main engine PWB or cassette main PWB and check for correct operation A0510 Third paper feeder communication Third paper feeder Check the installation state of the third paper problem installed incor feeder and adjust it if it is not properly Communication fails five times succes rectly installed sively Defective PWB Replace the main engine PWB or cassette main PWB and check for correct operation C0610 Bitmap DIMM problem Defective main Replace the main engine PWB and check There is a problem with the data or engin
183. e duplex feed clutch to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the duplex feed clutch Check see page 1 4 28 20 An original jams in DP is indicated dur ing copying no origi nal feed Jam code 70 Defective original set Switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original set switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch is not light Check if the original feed motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Check if the DP paper feed pulley or DP separation pad is deformed Check visually and replace 1 4 13 2KL 2KK Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 21 An original jams in DP is indicated dur ing copying an origi nal jam in the original conveying section 1 Jam code 71 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Check if the original con veying motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if nec essary 22 An original jams in DP is indicated dur ing copying an origi nal size error jam Jam cod
184. e gears and belts and if necessary grease them 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Misadjusted leading edge registration Run maintenance mode U034 to readjust the leading edge registration see page 1 3 12 Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration Run maintenance mode U066 to readjust the scanner lead ing edge registration see page 1 3 20 12 The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper feed clutch MP solenoid or registration clutch installed or operat ing incorrectly 13 Paper creases Copy example Causes Check the installation position and operation of each clutch or solenoid If any of them operates incorrectly replace it Check procedures corrective measures Paper curled Check the paper storage conditions Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Defective pressure springs Replace the pressure springs Defective separation Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation claws 1 4 25 2KL 2KK 14 Offset occurs Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures 4 Defective cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1
185. e makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Leading edge margin 3 0 2 5 mm A Left margin Right margin a E 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm i t Trailing edge margin 3 0 2 5 mm Figure 1 3 19 6 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying Purpose Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image on the front face and that on the reverse face during duplex switchback copying Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U034 U402 U066 U403 U071 P 1 3 12 P 1 3 50 P 1 3 20 P 1 3 51 P 1 3 24 U404 U407 P 1 3 52 Adjustment 1 Press the start key Setting Initial Change in D ipti escription range setting value per step Leading edge registration for memory image 10 0 to 10 0 0 0 1 0 mm printing Press the interrupt key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Change the setting value using the zoom keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decr
186. e of the machine Push each terminal and heater wire into the housing so as not to exceed the height of the rib of the fuser unit because they may come in contact with the machine frame at the time of installation of the machine Positive terminal Positive terminal Figure 1 5 84 Use a thickness gauge to check that the clearance between the fuser thermostat and the heat roller is within the reference value Reference value 0 7 to 1 5 mm 0 7 to 1 5 mm Figure 1 5 85 1 5 51 2KL 2KK 8 Adjusting front position of the fuser unit adjusting lateral squareness Follow the procedure below if the drum is not parallel to the fuser unit and therefore paper is not fed straight to the fuser section and the trailing edge of image on either the front or rear side becomes longer Procedure Place the original on the contact glass Press the start key and make Tighten the screws a test copy at 100 magnification Refit the front left cover Remove the front left cover see page 1 5 47 Loosen the screw holding the fuser unit For copy example 1 Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the white arrow to raise the front position of the fuser unit For copy example 2 Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the black arrow to lower the front position of the fuser unit tit Is the image c
187. e original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position If dust is identified the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals Purpose When using DP to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original reading position Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Exp 1 Setting the mode on off Exp 2 Setting the reference data for identifying dust Setting the mode on off 1 Select on or oFF using the zoom keys Display Description on DP scanning position adjust mode on oFF DP scanning position adjust mode off Initial setting on 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the reference data for identifying dust Available only when the mode is turned on 1 Change the setting using the zoom keys Description Setting range Initial setting Minimum density to be regarded as dust 10 to 95 35 Example The figure indicates the density in 256 levels of gray 0 white 255 black When the setting is 35 data of the level of 35 or higher is regarded as dust and data of lower level is regarded as the background scan data taken when there is no original 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2K
188. e scanner sectioni ciii iii 2 1 3 2 Laser scannerisectioni fire ios 2 1 5 13 Drurm sectlori moie A ail 2 1 7 1 4 Developing Sect ON Rm 2 1 9 1 Single component developing SyStemM ss 2 1 11 2 1 5 Transfer and separation sections ss 2 1 12 2 1 6 Fuser SECON RH 2 1 13 2 1 7 Eject and switchback sections ss 2 1 15 22123 DUplex S Ctr ERN 2 1 17 2 2 Electrical Parts Layout 2 2 1 Electrical parts layout ertet ii ai 2 2 1 VSP WBS ic A A entente een lien 2 2 1 2 Switches and Sensors ertet Soke Hr Entre eee ERRORI e ROM ERES 2 2 3 B oo mE taa 2 2 4 4 Others dalai la e t A ON 2 2 5 2KL 2KK 2 3 Operation of the PWBs 223 1 Power source PWB uins ciiid 2 3 1 2 3 2 Main engine PWB 5 i o A ai ee 2 3 3 2 3 3 Cassette PWB annee gite Rcge i P EUER e REC Ee ERR 2 3 11 2 3 4 Operation P WB testet nnde tr ap i heme a atte 2 3 14 2 4 Appendixes Maintenance parts list nno iosa ia r eua den eh ea laine 2 4 1 Periodic maintenance procedures usine 2 4 2 Chart of image adjustment procedures se 2 4 5 Wirlng diagE arizs aleli AR rct te nid india hai re Re ELO aia 2 4 7 INSTALLATION GUIDE DOCUMENT PROCESSOR PAPER FEEDER DUPLEX UNIT Printing System Z 2KL 2KK This page is intentionally left blank 2KL 2KK 1 1 1 Specifications A itecto Desktop Printing system Indirect electr
189. e scanner wires Procedure 1 Remove the exposure lamp see page 1 5 17 2 Open the left cover 3 Release six hooks and both and then remove the left middle cover Left middle cover 4 Release five hooks and two bothes and then remove the left upper cover Figure 1 5 33 1 5 19 2KL 2KK 5 Remove the screw and remove the slit retainer and slit glass Slit glass Figure 1 5 34 6 Remove two wire guides 7 Remove the inverter wire from the inverter PWB Inverter PWB Wire guide N Wire guide Figure 1 5 35 1 5 20 8 Remove each screw and remove front and rear wire holder plates Remove the mirror 1 frame from the scanner unit 9 Remove the round terminals from the scan ner wire springs 10 Remove the scanner wires 2KL 2KK Mirror 1 frame Front wire Rear wire retainer Cine 4 NN Figure 1 5 36 Scanner wire spring Round terminal Round terminal Figure 1 5 37 1 5 21 2KL 2KK 2 2 Fitting the scanner wires NOTE When fitting the wires be sure to use those specified below Machine front P N 2C91236 gray Machine rear P N 2091235 black Fitting requires the following tools Two frame securing tools P N 302C968310 Two scanner wire stoppers P N 3596811 Procedure 1 Remove the rear cover Right middle cover Right middle cover Figure 1 5 38 2 Remove the screw and remove the scanner wire drum gear from the
190. e screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 44 Checking clearing the maintenance count Description Displays clears and changes the maintenance count Purpose To check the maintenance count Also to clear the count during maintenance service Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Setting range Initial setting Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 3 First 3 digits Last 3 digits Clearing the count 000 to 999 000 to 999 000 000 Clearing 1 Light exp 3 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Setting 1 Change the count using the numeric or zoom keys 2 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U252 Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination Purpose To return the destination setting to its default setting after initializing the backup RAM by running maintenance item U020 Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the destination using the zoom keys Display Description Jpn Metric Japan specifications Inc Inch North America specifications EUP Metric Europe specifications ASA Metric Asia Pacific specifications
191. e terre de la cassette Coloque el cuerpo principal directamente sobre los casetes alineando las secciones de inserci n de ubicaci n 2 del casete superior con los pasadores de ubicaci n 1 en la parte posterior del casete inferior A solo cuando se apilan 2 casetes o m s Cuando coloque el cuerpo principal sobre los casetes tenga cuidado de no golpear el cuerpo principal contra los pasadores o placa de fondo de los casetes Die Haupteinheit direkt auf die Kassetten setzen dabei die Positionsstiftnuten 2 der oberen Kassette auf die Positionsstifte 1 am hinteren Teil der unteren Kassette A ausrichten nur bei Stapeln von 2 oder mehr Kassetten Achten Sie beim Platzieren der Haupteinheit darauf dass Sie nicht gegen die Kassettenstifte oder die Bodenplatte stoRen Posizionare il corpo principale direttamente sopra i cassettoni allineando le posizioni delle sezioni di inserimento 2 del cassettone superiore con i perni di posizionamento 1 alla parte posteriore del cassettone inferiore A solo quando si impilano 2 o pi cassettoni Quando si posiziona il corpo principale sui cassettoni prestare attenzione a non urtare il corpo principale contro i perni di posizionamento o la piastra di messa a terra AGIRE NA C20 RER CO Je B SET CL A ENERET RAR fx Lb ASHES 2 DIR 2 AAA RAE TAE EIN EA VERE PARE RL ERI FA b A BROMBERO EY M1 EWIE y KR A DILERDOHFAH 2 PAD Y AEDS
192. e toner container that has been installed Purpose To operate when installing the machine or replacing the developing unit Method 1 Press the start key on appears 2 Press the start key Installation of toner starts and 10 is indicated in the copy quantity display Each time one minute elapses the indicated value decrements When the installation is complete Gd will be displayed if the installation is successful or nG will be displayed if it has failed 3 To stop the installation in the middle press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U144 Setting toner loading operation Description Sets toner loading operation after completion of copying Purpose To set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying Normally no change is necessary from the initial setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item 3 Change the setting using the zoom keys Exposure indicator Description Setting range Initial setting Exp 1 Toner loading operation 1 ON O OFF 0 Exp 2 Number of pages set 1 to 50 5 Exp 3 Printing ratio 10 to 40 30 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking sensors for toner Description Displays the on off
193. e valor en una unidad mueve la l nea de centro en 0 1 mm Haga salir nuevamente el patr n de prueba Repetir los pasos 2 a 3 hasta que la l nea 1 en la copia de muestra se encuentre dentro del valor de referencia Valor de referencia Dentro de 3 0 mm imagen de copia de muestra a F r das Bild im Kopienmuster b Den Wert erh hen F r das Bild im Kopienmuster c Den Wert verringern Einstellbereich 7 0 10 0 Durch ndern des Werts um eins wird die Mittellinie um 0 1 mm verschoben Das Testmuster erneut ausgeben Die Schritte 2 und 3 wiederholen bis die Linie 1 im Kopienmuster innerhalb des Bezugswerts liegt lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 3 0 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Per l immagine nell esempio di copia b aumentare il valore Per l immagine nell esempio di copia c ridurre il valore Gamma di impostazione 7 0 10 0 Cambiando il valore di una unit si sposta la linea centrale di 0 1 mm Eseguire di nuovo i modelli di prova Ripetere i passi da 2 a 3 finch la linea 1 nell esempio di copia non sia entro il valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento Entro 3 0 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a seguente regolazione f EIBRZJLCD AUR Fu ZR LE HTA Bi C034 JES ADI LSU OUT TIMINGi amp F JT t6 J E LSU DUP f FARA ME TEX FIR EM BET EVA o C825 H 3 Omm UA a MBE Has PD Fi Mak DS RCA O Aa E ER
194. ear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 15 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U051 1 3 16 Adjusting the deflection in the paper Description Adjusts the deflection in the paper Purpose Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly or if the copy paper is Z folded Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure Description Setting Change in indicator range value per step Exp 1 lit Paper feed from cassette 50 to 127 0 32 mm Exp 2 lit Paper feed from MP tray 50 to 127 0 32 mm Exp 3 lit Paper feed from optional first 50 to 127 0 32 mm paper feeder Exp 4 lit Paper feed from optional second 50 to 127 0 32 mm paper feeder Exp 5 lit Paper feed from optional third 50 to 127 0 32 mm paper feeder Exp 1 flashing Duplex mode 50 to 127 0 32 mm Press the interrupt key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Change the setting value using the zoom keys For output example 1 increase the value For output example 2 decrease the value The greater the value the larger the amount of slack the smaller the value the smaller the amount of slack Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 5 6 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for
195. ease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 20 5 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 53 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U901 Checking clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the paper feed location group No for which the count is to be checked or cleared using the image mode selection key 3 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Image mode LED Exposure C tity displ t val group No indicator opy quantity display count value 1 O T 4 5 Text amp Photo Exp 1 First 3 digits of MP copy count O GalPhoto Exp Last 3 digits of MP copy count ET Text Exp Clearing the count CLE O T fa Text amp Photo Exp First 3 digits of the cassette copy count O filPhoto Exp Last 3 digits of the cassette copy count ET Text Exp Clearing the count CLE CT i Text amp Photo Exp First 3 digits of the first paper feeder copy count O amp Photo Exp Last 3 digits of the first paper feeder copy count CT Text Exp Clearing the count CLE O T 4 Text amp Photo Exp First 3 digits of the second paper
196. eccione CONVEY SPEED y utilice cambio de tama o de la imagen y selecci n del nivel de casete de papel para ajustar los l mites superior e inferior A continuaci n presione la tecla de interrupci n y compruebe la imagen en la copia de prueba Para la copia de muestra h Aumente el valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra i Reduzca el valor de configuraci n Cantidad de cambio por paso 0 2 mm Wenn es sich um eine LCD Bedienungstafel handelt 1 Den Modus auf Wartungsmodus U070 setzen CONVEY SPEED1 w hlen und dann die obere und untere Grenze mittels Bildvergr f erung und Wahl der Papierkassettenstufe einstellen Dann die Unterbrechungstaste dr cken und das Bild an der Probekopie berpr fen F r Kopienmuster h Den Einstellwert erh hen F r Kopienmuster i Den Einstellwert erniedrigen Anderungsbetrag pro Stufe 0 2 mm Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD 1 Entrare in modalit manutenzione U070 selezionare CONVEY SPEED1 e usare l ingrandimento immagine e la selezione del livello del cassetto carta per regolare i limiti superiore e inferiore Quindi premere il tasto di interruzione e controllare l immagine nella copia di prova Per un esempio di copia h Aumentare il valore dell impostazione Per un esempio di copia i Diminuire il valore dell impostazione Variazione graduale 0 2 mm M TR LCD B BEEN VOTO ERA VEFE CONVEY SPEEDI FEI VEE USAR EI JA
197. echend der zu verwendenden Papiergr e auf die Kassetten kleben 18 ncollare le etichette del formato del cassetto D su ciascun cassetto a seconda del formato carta utilizzato 18 fis Dr AE AA SEA CD JUS PAM 18 AT SAR ACA DET HE Yy ht AIAN D AGE Y RICHEY HITS 19 Stick the hole seals 20 supplied with the main unit over the 3 screw holes in the main unit 20 Stick the hole seals E supplied with the cassettes over the 3 screw holes in each cassette 19 Collez les obturateurs 20 fournis avec l unit principale sur les 3 de vis de cette unit principale 20 Collez les obturateurs E fournis avec les cassettes sur les 3 de vis de chaque cassette 19 Pegue los sellos para orificios 20 suministrados con la unidad principal sobre los 3 orificios para tornillos de la unidad principal 20 Pegue los sellos para orificios E suministrados con los casetes sobre los 3 orificios para tornillos de cada casete 19 Die mit der Haupteinheit gelieferten Abdeckungsetiketten 20 auf die 3 Schraubl cher in der Haupteinheit kleben 20 Die mit den Kassetten gelieferten Abdeckungsetiketten E auf die 3 Schraubl cher in jeder Kassette kleben 19 ncollare i copriforo 20 forniti con l unit principale sui 3 fori delle viti nell unit principale 20 Incollare i copriforo E forniti con i cassettoni sui 3 fori delle viti in cia
198. ection generated when the DP is used Purpose Use this mode if an original non feed jam oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the DP is used Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Exp 1 Original feed motor OFM 10 to 20 0 in simplex feed Exp 2 Original switchback motor OSBM 10 to 20 in duplex feed Description Setting range Initial setting Press the interrupt key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Change the setting value using the zoom keys The greater the value the larger the amount of slack the smaller the value the smaller the amount of slack If an original non feed jam or oblique feed occurs increase the setting value If wrinkling of original occurs decrease the value 6 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 61 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U955 1 3 62 Setting operation panel type Description Sets the type of operation panel and LCD device Purpose To set the type of operation panel and LCD device when the setting value is initialized by U020 on the machine with the operation panel for Taiwan or the LCD that displays Kanji Start 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted using the image mode selection ke
199. ection is indi cated during copying misfeed in duplex paper conveying sec tion Jam code 60 Broken feedshift switch or duplex paper conveying switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Feedshift switch duplex paper conveying switch Check if the eject motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U030 and select the eject motor to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the eject motor Check see page 1 4 28 Check if the duplex feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the duplex feed clutch to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the duplex feed clutch Check see page 1 4 28 19 A paper jam in the duplex section is indi cated during copying misfeed in duplex eject section Jam code 61 Broken duplex paper con veying switch or registration Switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Duplex paper conveying switch registration switch Check if the duplex feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select th
200. ed during copying misfeed in eject sec tion Jam code 50 1 4 12 Broken eject switch or reg istration switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Eject switch registration switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 4 28 Problem Causes check procedures 2KL 2KK Corrective measures 17 A paper jam in the feedshift section is indicated during copying misfeed in feedshift section Jam code 52 53 54 55 56 57 Broken feedshift switch registration switch or job eject switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Feedshift switch registration switch job eject switch Check if the eject motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U030 and select the eject motor to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the eject motor Check see page 1 4 28 18 A paper jam in the duplex s
201. eed switch 2 CFSW2 turning on 1916 ms Cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 does not turn off within specified time of cassette feed switch 2 CFSW2 turning off 1916 ms Left cover is opened in prior to the cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 is turned off 16 Misfeed in vertical paper conveying sec tion 2 Cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 does not turn on within specified time of cassette feed switch 2 CFSW2 turning on 1916 ms Left cover is opened in prior to the cassette feed switch 2 CFSW2 is turned off 20 Multiple sheets in MP tray The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on 5907 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn off within the specified time of paper MP solenoid MPSOL turning on 1570 ms 1 4 3 2KL 2KK Section Description Conditions Specified time Paper feed section 21 Multiple sheets in cas sette The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on 5907 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn off within the specified time of paper feed clutch PFCL turning on 1327 ms 22 Multiple sheets in first paper feeder The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on 5907 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn off within the specified time of cassette paper feed clutch 1 CPFCL1 tur
202. eed unit see page 1 5 3 3 Remove the stop ring and strap from the rear side of the left cover Remove the stop ring and stopper from the front side of the left cover Stop ring 2KL 2KK Figure 1 5 14 Stop ring 2KL 2KK 4 Remove the left cover from machine 5 Remove the paper conveying unit from the machine Paper conveying unit Left cover Figure 1 5 15 1 5 10 2KL 2KK 4 Detaching and refitting the MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pad Follow the procedure below to replace the MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pad Procedure 1 Open the front cover and remove the waste toner box Pull out the cassette 2 Remove the screw and remove the front left lower cover see page 1 5 3 3 Remove the paper conveying unit see page 1 5 9 4 Remove the stop ring and bush from the Stop ring front side of the machine Figure 1 5 16 5 Remove the rear cover see page 1 5 6 6 Remove three screws and remove the MP drive unit MP drive unit Figure 1 5 17 1 5 11 2KL 2KK 7 Remove the stop ring gear and bush Stop ring Figure 1 5 18 8 Temporarily push the MP paper feed pulley unit into the rear side to unlock the front side and then remove it from the machine Figure 1 5 19 1 5 12 2KL 2KK 9 Remove the stop ring MP paper guide spring pin and the MP paper feed pulley MP paper feed pulley shaft Spring pin
203. eist lt Bezugswert gt F r Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm F r Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia Ripetere i passi da 1 a 5 fino a che la linea 2 dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento Valore di riferimento Per copia simplex Entro 3 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 4 0 mm RAT Wik SE EN RARER 5 ADWARE 2 APH o lt EREM gt PATH 3 Omm LIA AA 4 Omm DI PA grz Rai AEP YS VOPR 2 DAME ET PIE 1 5 REO KT inei gt HOYA 3 0mm LAP ii i 036 4 0mm LAP 2 3mm 4mm 3mm 4mm 3mm 4mm Checking the angle of trailing edge Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment Reference value For simplex copying Within 3 0 mm For duplex copying Within 4 0 mm V rification de l angle du bord arri re V rifiez l cart entre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 3 0 mm max Copie recto verso 4 0 mm max Verificaci n del ngulo del borde inferior Verifique la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de
204. eleccione LEAD1 y utilice cambio de tama o de la imagen y selecci n del nivel de casete de papel para ajustar los l mites superior e inferior A continuaci n presione la tecla de interrupci n y compruebe la imagen en la copia de prueba Para la copia de muestra j Reduzca el valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra k Aumente el valor de configuraci n Cantidad de cambio por paso 0 2 mm Wenn es sich um eine LCD Bedienungstafel handelt 1 Den Modus auf Wartungsmodus U071 setzen LEAD 1 w hlen und dann die obere und untere Grenze mittels Bildvergr Rerung und Wahl der Papierkassettenstufe einstellen Dann die Unterbrechungstaste dr cken und das Bild an der Probekopie berpr fen F r Kopienmuster j Den Einstellwert erniedrigen F r Kopienmuster k Den Einstellwert erh hen Anderungsbetrag pro Stufe 0 2 mm Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD 1 Entrare in modalit manutenzione U071 selezionare LEAD1 e usare l ingrandimento immagine e la selezione del livello del cassetto carta per regolare i limiti superiore e inferiore Quindi premere il tasto di interruzione e controllare l immagine nella copia di prova Per un esempio di copia j Diminuire il valore d impostazione Per un esempio di copia k Aumentare il valore d impostazione Variazione graduale 0 2 mm supra legni LCD B WEH UOT PER ERE LEAD RA E RATER RAE HK V FER AJ ED WAV MN EDS IR MERE 3 EF EET ETE SUE
205. elow to replace the fuser heater Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 40 2 Remove two positive terminals of fuser heater wires from the fuser unit Caution Remove the positive terminals while press ing their protrusions 3 Remove two fuser heater wires from ribs of the fuser unit Caution Make sure that the fuser heater wires are not removed from the positive terminals Fuser unit Positive terminal Figure 1 5 72 4 Separate the right and left fuser unit see page 1 5 42 5 Pull out the fuser heater wire from the rear Right fuser unit side of the right fuser unit and stretch it straight Fuser heater wire Figure 1 5 73 1 5 44 2KL 2KK 6 Release hooks at the front side of the right fuser unit and pull out the fuser heater Caution Do nat touch the glass section of the fuser heater Right fuser unit 7 Replace the fuser heater 8 Straighten the fuser heater wire in the rear side of the new fuser heater and insert it from the front side of the right fuser unit 9 Fit both the protrusions in the front and rear sides of the fuser heater into the notch posi tions of the right fuser unit Insert the wire between the hooks in the front side of the right fuser unit until it clicks to secure it al Hook b Dx Be ARES t 27 Protrusion S je BAL ALTA Figure 1 5 75 1 5 45 2KL 2KK 10 Lace the fuser heater wire in the re
206. emarks order Item No Mode 3 3 Adjusting the magnification in the Polygon motor speed adjustment U053 Exp 2 light U053 test pattern P 1 3 17 main scanning direction printing gt 1 adjustment Adjusting the magnification in the Drive motor speed adjustment U053 Exp 1 light U053 test pattern P 1 3 17 auxiliary scanning direction print 2 ing adjustment Adjusting the center line of the MP Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 Exp 2 light U034 test pattern P 1 3 13 tray printing adjustment 3 dee Adjusting the center line of the cas ec Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 Exp 1 light U034 test pattern P 1 3 13 First paper feeder select exp 3 light settes printing adjustment Second paper feeder select exp 4 light 4 Third paper feeder select exp 5 light Duplex copying select exp 1 flashing Adjusting the leading edge registra Registration clutch turning on timing U034 Exp 2 light U034 test pattern P 1 3 12 tion of the MP tray printing adjust secondary paper feed start timing 5 ment ii Adjusting the leading edge registra Registration clutch turning on timing U034 Exp 1 light U034 test pattern P 1 3 12 First paper feeder select exp 3 light tion of the cassettes printing secondary paper feed start timing Second paper feeder select exp 4 light 6 adjustment E Third paper feeder select exp 5 light Duplex copying select exp 1 flashing Adjusting the leading edge margin IT LSU illuminat
207. ems sise 1 4 21 1 No image appears entirely white ss 1 4 22 2 No image appears entirely black ss 1 4 22 3 Image iS too light cicci o a a 1 4 23 4 Background is visible nsiro eiei Aaa 1 4 23 5 A white line appears longitudinally ss 1 4 23 6 A black line appears longitudinally ss 1 4 24 7 A black line appears laterally sise 1 4 24 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the other 1 4 24 9 Black dots appear on the image sien 1 4 24 10 Image is blurred roi ee a 1 4 25 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original 1 4 25 12 The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original 1 4 25 13 Paper creases soe dille lion emeret eee eon eR ai 1 4 25 14 OSCE OCCUIS P arden 1 4 26 15 Image is partly missing ian iaia 1 4 26 16 Fusing IS DOOF 21 ree te iii Liu sat eot Lo eene 1 4 26 17 1mage IS out of focus noniin nette Adalid es 1 4 26 18 Image center does not align with the original center 1 4 27 1 4 4 Electric problems x 1 4 28 1 4 5 Mechanical problems 2152 e iet ic decl des 1 4 32 1 5 Assembly and Disassembly 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly nenen n
208. en 8 und 11 1 Den Modus auf Wartungsmodus U076 setzen und die Endkante des Originals f r die Einstellung abschneiden Dann dieses auf das Originalbedienfeld der DP Haupteinheit legen wobei die mit F und R bedruckte Seite nach oben weisen soll 2 Die Starttaste dr cken um das eingelegte Original einzuziehen Vergr erung Vorderkanten Timing und Mittellinie werden dann automatisch eingestellt 3 Falls die Ergebnisse in Ordnung sind und es sich um eine 7 Segment Bedienungstafel handelt Folgendes wird angezeigt Punkt1 Gd Punkt2 O Punkt3 O Punkt4 0 Wenn es sich um eine LCD Bedienungstafel handelt Zahlenwerte f r CONVEY SPEED LEAD EDGE ADJ und DP CENTER werden angezeigt 4 Falls die Ergebnisse nicht in Ordnung sind und es sich um eine 7 Segment Bedienungstafel handelt nG1 nG2 nG3 und Punkt 1 werden angezeigt Wenn es sich um eine LCD Bedienungstafel handelt DATA NG1 NG2 wird angezeigt Einzelheiten sind der Wartungsanleitung zu entnehmen Regolazione automatica eseguita con l originale Prima di eseguire questa regolazione verificare che l angolo del bordo principale e l angolo del bordo di uscita siano regolati vedere le pagine 8 e 11 1 Entrare in modalit manutenzione U076 e tagliare il bordo di uscita dell originale per Ta regolazione Quindi posizionarlo sul piano originale dell unit principale del DP con il lato su cui sono stampati F e R rivolto verso l alto 2 Premere il tasto di avvio per alime
209. enance item No Description U254 Turning auto start function on off Description Selects if the auto start function is turned on Purpose Normally no change is necessary If incorrect operation occurs turn the function off this may solve the prob lem Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select either on or oFF using the zoom keys Display Description on Auto start function on oFF Auto start function off Initial setting on 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Selecting the timing for copy counting Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters Purpose To be set according to user copy service provider request If a paper jam occurs frequently in the eject sec tion when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper ejection copies are provided without copy counts The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying To prevent this the copy timing should be made earlier If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fuser sections when the number of copies is counted before the paper reaches those sections copying is charged without a copy being made To prevent this the copy timing should be made later Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the copy count timing using the zoom keys Display Description F
210. enter line U072 When you run this maintenance mode the preset values of U070 U071 and U072 will also be updated Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the DP scanning section Method 1 Seta specified original P N 302AC68243 in the DP Cut the trailing edge of the original E mm Figure 1 3 14 Press the start key on appears Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When adjustment is complete Gd appears Display each setting value after adjustment using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Exp 1 Execution result Exp 2 DP scanning timing Exp 3 DP center line Exp 4 DP magnification If a problem occurs during auto adjustment nG is displayed and operation stops Determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manu ally by running the corresponding maintenance items Completion Press the stop clear key after auto adjustment is complete The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed If the stop clear key is pressed during auto adjustment adjustment stops and no settings are changed 1 3 27 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U087 1 3 28 Setting DP reading position modification operation Description The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after th
211. eplace Broken registration switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective registration Switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Check if the MP solenoid malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the MP solenoid to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the MP solenoid Check see page 1 4 28 Check if the right and left registration rollers contact each other Check visually and replace 10 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in cassette Jam code 21 1 4 10 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Check visually and replace Broken registration switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective registration switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Check if the paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch Check see page 1 4 28 Check if the right and left registration rollers contact each other Check visually a
212. er von der Netzsteckdose ab bevor Sie mit der Installation der Duplex Einheit beginnen Procedura Assicurarsi di spegnere l interruttore principale del corpo principale della copiatrice o dell MFP e di disconnettere il cordone di alimentazione dalla presa a muro prima di dare inizio alla procedura d installazione dell Unit Duplex TED LAVATI BEA SE EN ALAR MEP AS ff OS FAMA ARETE E t FI HE gt RERO Hit SPL LP BEBE elt MFP 7 Y DZ MERS AMO 2 VAL YF OFF EL KADET 7 7 RV CH EA BEIC dE Up to three cassettes can be stacked For 22 ppm MFP models no more than two cassettes can be stacked NOTICE When stacking 2 or more cassettes ensure that all the cassettes are stacked before placing the main body on the cassettes Il est possible d empiler jusqu trois cassettes Pour les mod les de MFP 22 ppm il est possible d empiler jusqu deux cassettes AVIS Pour empiler 2 cassettes ou plus s assurer que toutes les cassettes sont en place avant de placer le cops principal sur les cassettes Se pueden instalar hasta tres casetes uno encima de otro Para los modelos MFP de 22 ppm no se puede apilar m s dos casetes AVISO Cuando apile 2 casetes o m s aseg rese de que todos los casetes est n apilados antes de colocar el cuerpo principal sobre ellos Bis zu drei Kassetten k nnen bereinander gestapelt werden Bei MFP Modell 22 ppm k nnen maximal zwei Kassetten gestapelt werden
213. es not turn off within specified time of the its turning on 5907 ms 57 Misfeed in feedshift section duplex section The job eject switch JBESW does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on 2056 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation 1364 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on 5907 ms Duplex section 60 Misfeed in duplex paper conveying sec tion The duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on 3037 ms The duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on 3037 ms The duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning off 61 Misfeed in duplex eject section The registration switch RSW does not turn on within specified time of the duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW turning on 1589 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW turning off 1589 ms Document processor 1 4 6 70 No origina
214. et le trait sur l exemple de copie 1 est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence proc dez au r glage suivant Si el tablero de controles es de tipo LCD Ajuste de la sincronizaci n del borde superior 1 Active el modo de mantenimiento 034 Seleccione ADJ RCL ON TIMING y presione la tecla de inicio Casete de 2 nivel Seleccione RCL T1 Casete de 3 nivel Seleccione RCL T2 Casete de 4 nivel Seleccione RCL T3 Presione la tecla de interrupci n para imprimir un patr n de prueba y compruebe la imagen impresa Valor de referencia Dentro de 20 2 5 mm imagen de copia de muestra a Si el espacio entre el borde del papel y la l nea de la copia de muestra 1 es mayor que el valor de referencia realice el siguiente ajuste Wenn es sich um eine LCD Bedienungstafel handelt Einstellen des Vorderkanten Timings 1 1 F hren Sie den Wartungsmodus 034 aus W hlen Sie ADJ RCL ON TIMING und dr cken Sie die Starttaste Kassette 2 Stufe W hlen Sie RCL T1 Kassette 3 Stufe W hlen Sie RCL T2 Kassette 4 Stufe W hlen Sie RCL T3 Dr cken Sie die Unterbrechungstaste um ein Testmuster auszudrucken und berpr fen Sie das Druckbild Bezugswert Binnen 20 2 5 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Falls der Abstand zwischen der Papierkante und der Kopienmusterlinie 1 gr er als der Bezugswert ist ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo principa
215. ference value gt Within 20 2 5 copy example a image 2 Pour l image dans l exemple de copie b augmenter la valeur Pour l image dans l exemple de copie c diminuer la valeur Plage de param tres 5 0 10 0 Lorsqu on change la valeur d une unit le bord avant se d place de 0 1 mm 3 Produisez nouveau le motif de test 4 R p tez les op rations 2 et 3 jusqu ce que la ligne 1 dans l exemple de copie soit dans les limites de la valeur de r f rence Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 20 2 5 mm image a d un exemple de copie 2 Para la imagen en la copia de muestra b aumentar el valor Para la imagen en la copia de muestra c disminuir el valor Gama de ajustes 5 0 10 0 Un cambio de valor en una unidad mueve el extremo gu a en 0 1 mm 3 Haga salir nuevamente el patr n de prueba 4 Repetir los pasos 2 a 3 hasta que la l nea 1 en la copia de muestra se encuentre dentro del valor de referencia Valor de referencia Dentro de 20 2 5 mm imagen de copia de muestra a 2 F r das Bild im Kopienmuster b Den Wert erh hen F r das Bild im Kopienmuster c Den Wert verringern Einstellbereich 5 0 10 0 Durch Andern des Werts um eins wird die Vorderkante um 0 1 mm verschoben 3 Das Testmuster erneut ausgeben 4 Die Schritte 2 und 3 wiederholen bis die Linie 1 im Kopienmuster innerhalb des Bezugswerts liegt lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 20 2 5 mm Kopienmuster a Bi
216. fitting the heat roller Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller Procedure 1 Separate the right and left fuser unit see Heat roller bush page 1 5 42 Remove the fuser heater see page 1 5 44 3 Remove the heat roller separation claws see page 1 5 47 4 Press the heat roller bush in the rear side of the right fuser unit from outside to make the roller removable N Right fuser unit Figure 1 5 80 5 Remove the heat roller heat roller bush and heat roller gear Caution Remove the heat roller with the heat roller bush in the front side being mounted Heat roller Heat roller bush Heat roller gear Right fuser unit Figure 1 5 81 1 5 48 6 Replace the heat roller and refit all the removed parts Caution When replacing the heat roller make sure that the surface of the fuser thermistor is cleaned with alcohol and is not deformed Also make sure that no foreign matter adheres to the fuser thermostats Refit the heat roller gear while pushing the idle gear in the direction indicated with the arrow Also make sure that the gears are properly engaged After refitting the heat roller push the roller lightly to check that the detection surface of the fuser thermistor comes in contact with the roller 2KL 2KK Right fuser unit iw Fuser thermistor Fuser thermostat Fuser thermostat Heat roller gear Idle gear Figure 1 5 82 1 5 49 2KL 2K
217. ft blank 1 5 56 1 6 1 Upgrading the firmware 2KL 2KK Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main engine and MMI Firmware upgrading requires the following tools Flash DIMM Procedure 1 10 11 12 Perform maintenance item U000 mainte nance report output and check U019 ROM version Turn the main power switch off and unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Remove five screws and remove the rear cover Change the position of the jumper switch SW1 on the main engine PWB from upper side 3 2 to lower side 2 1 Insert the DIMM into the DIMM slot on the main engine PWB Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on Upgrading firmware starts Caution Never turn the main power switch off during upgrading When the upgrade operation is complete the checksum will be displayed Turn the main power switch off and unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Remove the DIMM from the main engine PWB and return the jumper switch SW1 to its original position Refit the rear cover Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on Perform maintenance item U000 mainte nance report output and check that U019 ROM version has been upgraded Jumper switch SW1 DIMM slot Main engine PWB Figure 1 6 1 1 6 1 2KL 2KK 1 6 2 Adjustment free variable resistors VR The variable resisto
218. gal Registration switch RSW A5R Legal Cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 option A4 Letter R Cassette feed switch 2 CFSW2 option B4R Letter Feedshift switch FSSW B5R Statement Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW option Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U032 Checking clutch operation Description Turns each clutch or solenoid on Purpose To check the operation of each clutch or solenoid Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the clutch or solenoid to be operated using the exposure adjustment keys 3 Press the start key The selected clutch turns on for 1 s Display Clutch P1 Paper feed clutch PFCL Pb MP solenoid MPSOL A1 Registration clutch RCL d1 Duplex feed clutch DUPFCL option P2 Cassette paper feed clutch 1 CPFCL1 option P3 Cassette paper feed clutch 2 CPFCL2 option P4 Cassette paper feed clutch 3 CPFCL3 option Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 11 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U034 1 3 12 Adjusting the print start timing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration center line or trailing edge margin Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original M
219. ge 0 0 printing Other U901 Checking clearing copy counts by paper feed locations U903 Checking clearing the paper jam counts U904 Checking clearing the service call counts U905 Checking counts by optional devices U908 Checking the total count U910 Clearing the black ratio data U911 Checking clearing copy counts by paper sizes U920 Checking the accounting counts U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only U928 Checking the machine life count U931 Setting the automatic toner install Off U941 Setting the default magnification ratio of the default cassette 100 U942 Setting of amount of slack for feeding from DP 0 0 U955 Setting operation panel type 0 0712 U969 Checking of toner area code U990 Checking clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light U991 Checking the scanner count U993 Outputting a VTC PG pattern Initial setting for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 4 2KL 2KK 3 Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No Description U000 Outputting an own status report Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items and paper jam and service call occurrences Purpose To check the current setting of the maintenance items or paper jam or service call occurrences Before initial izing the backup RAM output a li
220. gh voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Defective engine PWB 2 No image appears entirely black Copy example Causes Check if YC8 9 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Check procedures corrective measures 1 4 22 No main charging Broken main charger wire Replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 36 Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire and grid The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective high voltage PWB Check if main charging takes place when CN1 7 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Defective main engine PWB Check if YC8 7 on the main engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the main engine PWB Exposure lamp fails to light Poor contact in the expo sure lamp connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective inverter PWB Check if the exposure lamp lights when YC1 3 on the inverter PWB goes low while maintenance item U061 is run If not replace the inverter
221. ght Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 2 to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 2 Check see page 1 4 28 13 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in third paper feeder Jam code 24 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Check visually and replace Broken cassette feed Switch 2 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective cassette feed Switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn cassette feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch is not light Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 3 malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 3 to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 3 Check see page 1 4 28 1 4 11 2KL 2KK Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 14 A paper jam in the paper conveying sec tion is indicated dur ing copying misfeed in registration trans fer section Jam code 30 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Check visually and replace Broken registration switch cassette feed switch 1 or
222. ginal is not placed cor rectly Check the original and correct if necessary Poor contact in the origi nal detection switch or original size detection sensor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective original detec tion switch If the level of YC5 B8 on the main engine PWB does not go low when the original detection switch is turned on and off replace the original detection switch Defective original size detection sensor Check if sensor operates correctly If not replace it 12 The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the cas sette or MP tray Poor contact in the con nector terminals of paper Switch or MP paper Switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective paper switch or MP paper switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the Switch is turned on and off replace the switch Paper switch YC2 2 on the cassette PWB MP paper switch YC5 12 on the cassette PWB 13 The size of paper on the cassette or MP tray is not displayed correctly Poor contact in the con nector terminals of paper size length switch or MP paper size width switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity with
223. gits 000 to 999 000 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 60 Setting the automatic toner install Description Sets automatic toner installation on or off when power is turned on Purpose Changed to off when deactivating automatic toner installation Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF using the zoom keys Display Description ON Automatic toner install function ON OFF Automatic toner install function OFF Initial setting ON 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 The machine automatically returns to the same status as when the power is turned on Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U941 Setting the default magnification ratio of the default cassette Description Sets the default magnification ratio when paper selection of copy default setting is set to the default cassette Purpose To be set according to user request Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the magnification using the exposure adjustment keys Display Description 100 100 magnification Aut Auto magnification selection Initial setting 10096 magnification 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting of amount of slack for feeding from DP Description Adjusts the defl
224. gler l image sur la machine Pour plus de d tails se reporter au manuel de service de la machine Verificaci n del funcionamiento 1 Para verificar el funcionamiento de la m quina prepare un origina de tama o A3 a donde se dibujan cuatro l neas b a 20 mm de los bordes y una l nea c dibujada en el centro 2 Conecte el enchufe el ctrico de la m quina en un tomacorriente de la pared y conecte el interruptor principal 3 Coloque el original a en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y una copia de muestra 4 Si la separaci n entre el original a y la copia de muestra supera el valor de referencia haga los ajustes Para el procedimiento vea las siguientes p ginas Antes de verificar la imagen del DP verifique y ajuste la imagen desde la m quina Para detalles vea el manual de servicio de la m quina Uberpr fen des Betriebs 1 Um den Betrieb der Maschine zu pr fen ein A3 Original a vorbereiten das vier Linien b im Abstand von 20 mm von den Kanten und eine Linie c in der Mitte aufweist Den Netzstecker der Maschine in die Steckdose stecken und den Betriebsschalter einschalten Das Original a in den DP einlegen und eine Probekopie anfertigen um den Betrieb und das Kopienmuster zu pr fen Falls die Abweichung zwischen dem Original a und dem Kopienmuster den Bezugswert berschreitet m ssen Einstellungen durchgef hrt werden Das Verfahren ist auf den folgenden Seiten beschrieben
225. gt 20 22 5 mm UA Ca ARAN ABD ALYY TW c BRDA SR XESBBH 7 0 10 0 127 yvyFOR ER 0 1mm FRET ALA MD EBRIO ALVA PORK 2 DAYA ID ET FI 2 Ze DIET EXE 2 Omm LAN aE mt YT a HR Zo 20 2 5mm If the operation panel is an LCD type Adjusting the leading edge timing 1 Run maintenance mode 034 Select ADJ RCL ON TIMING and press the Start key 2nd level cassette Select RCL T1 3rd level cassette Select RCL T2 Ard level cassette Select RCL T3 Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern in duplex mode and check the image lt Reference value gt Within 20 2 5 copy example a image If the gap between the edge of the paper and the copy example line 1 is larger than the reference value perform the following adjustment Si le panneau de commande est du type LCD R glage de la synchronisation du bord avant 1 Ex cutez le mode de maintenance 034 S lectionnez ADJ RCL ON TIMING et appuyez sur la touche de d part copie Cassette de 2 me niveau S lectionnez RCL T1 Cassette de 3 me niveau S lectionnez RCL T2 Cassette de 4 me niveau S lectionnez RCL T3 Appuyez sur la touche d interruption pour imprimer un motif de test et v rifiez l image imprim e Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 20 2 5 mm image a d un exemple de copie Si l cart entre le bord du papier
226. he OK key 3 Select the paper size and press the OK key This will be displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed MP tray paper size Sets the paper size for the MP tray so that it will be automatically selected 1 Press paper selection keys for 3 s 2 Select 23 MPTray Config and press the OK key 3 Select the paper size and press the OK key Custom 1 size Sets the size of the paper to be set to the custom 1 size 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 24 Custom Size 1 and press the OK key 3 Select the paper size and press the OK key Custom 2 size Sets the size of the paper to be set to the custom 2 size 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 25 Custom Size 2 and press the OK key 3 Select the paper size and press the OK key Selecting media type cassette 1 Sets the paper type to the cassette 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 26 Casst1 MedType and press the OK key 3 Select the paper type and press the OK key Selecting media type cassette 2 Sets the paper type to the first paper feeder 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 27 Casst2MedType and press the OK key 3 Select the paper type and press the OK key This will be displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Selecting media type cassette 3 Sets the paper type to the second paper feeder 1 Press both of the density adjus
227. hen the size of original document is 11 x15 the original document is automatically zoomed 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 40 11x15 Detect and press the OK key 3 Select On or Off and press the OK key Copy limit Sets the number of copies limit for multiple copying 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 41 Copy Limit and press the OK key 3 Enter the setting and press the OK key Setting range 1 to 999 2 sided copy reverse side rotation setting Select whether or not the image on the reverse side is rotated 180 degrees in the 2 sided copy mode 1 Press 2 sided key for 3 s 2 Select 42 Duplex 2nd and press the OK key 3 Select On or Off and press the OK key Margin shift Sets the default setting of the margin width for the mar gin copying 1 Press margin key for 3 s 2 Select 43 Stitch Width and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the OK key Setting range 1 to 18 mm 0 13 to 0 75 Border width Sets the default setting of the border width for the bor der erase mode 1 Press border erase key for 3 s 2 Select 44 Border Erase and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the OK key Setting range 1 to 18 mm 0 13 to 0 75 4 in 1 layout order Sets the layout for the order in which the originals will appear in the 4 in 1 layout mode 1 Press combine key for 3 s 2 Select 45 4 in 1 Layout and press the OK key 3 Select
228. ial communication data signal Paper feeder serial communication data signal Ground 5 V DC power output to paper feeder Ground 5 V DC power output to paper feeder PLSW On Off PLSW On Off Ground PLSW On Off TCDSW On Off Ground Not used Connected to the cool ing fan motor 2 FAN2 24V1 FAN2DRN 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to CFM2 CFM2 On Off YC12 Connected to the key counter 24V1 KEYCN SGND KEYENBN 24 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC power output to key counter Key counter signal Ground Key counter detection signal YC13 Connected to the eject motor 2 3 6 COMDA COMDB COMDNA COMDNB 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse EM drive control signal EM drive control signal EM drive control signal EM drive control signal Connector Signal Voltage 2KL 2KK Description YC14 Connected to the eject switch and feedshift switch PGND EXTSWN SEPSWN 5V4 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 5VDC Ground ESW On Off FSSW On Off 5 V DC power output to ESW FSSW YC15 Connected to the scan ner motor ISMDA ISMDB ISMDNA ISMDNB 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal SM drive control signal SM drive control signal SM drive control signal YC16 Connected to the inverter PWB 24V1 24V1
229. ication in the auxiliary scan 25 to 25 0 0 2 mm ning direction first page Exp 2 Magnification in the auxiliary scan 25 to 25 0 2 mm ning direction second page Press the interrupt key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Change the setting value using the zoom keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value tit Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 11 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U070 U071 U404 P 1 3 24 P 1 3 52 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 23 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U071 1 3 24 Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure Description Setting Change in indicator range value per step Exp 1 DP leading edge registration 32 to 32 0 2 mm first side Exp 2 DP trailing edge registration 42 to 32 0 2 mm first side Exp
230. ifte oder die Bodenplatte stoRen Mettere il corpo principale direttamente sopra i cassettoni allineando le posizioni delle sezioni di inserimento del corpo principale 4 con i perni di posizionamento 3 nella parte posteriore del cassettone A Quando si posa il corpo principale sui cassettoni fare molta attenzione a non urtare il corpo principale contro i perni di posizionamento o la piastra di messa a terra KEEBLE AEA BB CAD HERE CAD Je BB E EET CD A EL BRA FAR E RENTE T AK CI TERA ENE EZ o HE y hb A fio priiis EY 3 IC AMO brio fi AGB 4 bug b P50 0w25 DLS DEY KOEY BLU ARMIT TARN RN AFERRA ne de 3 Remove the screw 5 and pin 6 from each cassette and remove the back covers 7 3 D posez la vis 5 et la goupille 6 de chaque cassette et d posez les capots arri re 7 3 Quite el tornillo 5 y el pasador 6 de cada casete y desmonte las cubiertas posteriores 7 3 Die Schraube 5 und den Stift 6 jeder Kassette entfernen und die hinteren Abdeckungen 7 abnehmen 3 Rimuovere la vite 5 e il perno 6 da ciascun cassettone e rimuovere i coperchi posteriori 7 3 BC PAR ETRAS 5 AMES C60 AIX Fi C7 OR A 3 FIT Y OER H IRBLOEY 6 1 KEIL H 7 EI DAT 4 Remove the screw 8 on the rear of the main body 5 Slide the connector cover 9 on the inside of the main body back cover in the
231. ight or other strong light when removing paper jams Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity an abrupt change in the environmental temperature and cool or hot direct air Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine Place the machine on a level surface maximum allowance inclination 1 Avoid air borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor such as mer cury acidic of alkaline vapors inorganic gasses NOx SOx gases and chlorine based organic solvents Select a well ventilated location Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine Machine front 1000 mm 39 3 8 Machine rear 100 mm 3 15 16 Machine right 300 mm 11 13 16 Machine left 300 mm 11 13 16 1 100 mm 3 15 16 A gt gt 300 mm 11 13116 2 300 mm 11 13 16 1000 mm 39 3 8 Figure 1 2 1 Installation dimensions 1 2 1 2KL 2KK 1 2 2 Unpacking and installation 1 Installation procedure Stan D Y Y Unpack Load paper Y Y Remove the tapes Connect the power cord Y Y Install the optional paper feeder Installing toner y Y Release the scanner pins Output an own status report maintenance item U000 Y Install the optiona
232. ill 3 AS Adhering the film 5 Wipe the slit glass 3 with a dry cloth 6 Align the edge of the film F with the edge 4 of the slit glass 3 and stick it in place within the reference value range Adh sion du film 5 Nettoyez le verre fendu 3 l aide d un chiffon sec 6 Alignez le bord du film F avec le bord 4 du verre fendu 3 et ins rez le tout en place dans les limites de la plage des valeurs de r f rence Fijaci n de la pel cula 5 Limpie el cristal de paso 3 con un pa o seco 6 Alinee el borde de la pel cula F con el borde 4 del cristal de paso 3 y p guela en su lugar dentro del rango del valor de referencia Anbringen des Films 5 Das schmale Glas 3 mit einem trockenen Tuch abwischen 6 Die Kante des Films F entlang der Kante 4 des schmalen Glases 3 ausrichten und im Bezugswertebereich festkleben Applicazione della pellicola 5 Pulire il vetro lettura 3 strofinandolo con un panno asciutto 6 Allineare il bordo della pellicola F con il bordo 4 del vetro lettura 3 e incollarla in posizione all interno del campo del valore di riferimento Th ERR 5 M PAPER BEN 3 6 HA CP WAR 3 tk O e EHI AER ET 24 LEY ftt 5 AU v RITA 3 VHA TTS 6 74 v E Od EA v h REF 38 oss 4 ADE DEAZ Y F8 a Li mi Attaching the original mat 7 Place the original mat B with its hoo
233. imento Per copia simplex Entro 2 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 2 0 mm REITIR ER UU CRAG 2 AAA o lt EREI gt BEIDE 2 Omm AA ALTRE 2 Omm LA PY per ARAE eBORS aly SO 2 AMBER E CERI 1 2 d OE gt YE gt ui HOYA 2 0mm LAP OBE 2 0mm LAP XF E SI 2mm 3mm 2mm 3mm 3 Checking the center line Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment Reference value For simplex copying Within 2 0 mm For duplex copying Within 3 0 mm V rification de la ligne m diane V rifiez l cart entre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 2 0 mm max Copie recto verso 3 0 mm max Verificaci n de la l nea central Verifique la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra Si la superaci n supera el valor de referencia haga el siguiente ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 2 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 3 0 mm Uberpr fen der Mittellinie Die Abweichung der Li
234. immagine Valore di riferimento Entro 20 2 5 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione AER LCDARS RE 1 HATE R034 YEF EADI RCL ON TIMINGik FIRE YEF RCL DUP BORA AA A A BETERA BANE 20 2 omm LIA a KRA REED DU AGE LIS A 1 AAA E ETE PA RE PA FEL RILO LOD 24 70158 ime 1 S 7388 1 RYFELA AR BF U034 RITA J RCL ON TIMING 23EHR LA 7 NE mH CL DUP ERT ED AAA TL MER OFA RAH eM CE HERE 3 2 Gif 20 2 5mm DIN 2 amp 3 7 77 a EA FA EMEA OBE Uc ROME Ze 38 78 I zu Tha gt For the image in copy example b Increase the value For the image in copy example c Decrease the value Setting range 5 0 10 0 Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0 1 mm Output the test pattern again Repeat steps 2 to 3 until the line 1 in the copy example is within the reference value lt Reference value gt Within 20 2 5 mm copy example a image Pour l image dans l exemple de copie b augmenter la valeur Pour l image dans l exemple de copie c diminuer la valeur Plage de param tres 5 0 10 0 Lorsqu on change la valeur d une unit le bord avant se d place de 0 1 mm Produisez nouveau le motif de test R p tez les op rations 2 et 3
235. in the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective paper size length switch or MP paper size width switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off replace the switch Paper size length switch YC9 B3 B4 B6 on the main engine PWB MP paper size width switch YC5 2 on the cassette PWB 14 A paper jam in the paper feed paper conveying eject or duplex section is indi cated when the main power switch is turned on A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around registra tion switch eject switch or duplex paper convey ing switch Check visually and remove it if any Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Registration switch eject switch duplex paper conveying switch 1 4 30 2KL 2KK Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 15 The message requesting cover to be closed is dis played when the front cover or left cover is closed 1 Poor contact in the con nector terminals of front cover safety switch or left cover safety switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable 2 Defective front cover safety switch or left cover safety switch Check for continuity acros
236. ing U021 1 3 2 2KL 2KK Section item Content of maintenance item initial No setting High voltage U100 Setting the main high voltage Grid control voltage 107 Copy interval 60 Copy quantity 50 Correction amount 10 U101 Setting the other high voltages 27 45 22 45 123 126 33 31 1 20 42 2 U110 Checking the drum count Developing U130 Initial setting for the developing unit U144 Setting toner loading operation Off 5 30 U150 Checking sensors for toner U157 Checking clearing the developing drive time U158 Checking the developing count Fuser and U161 Setting the fuser control temperature cleaning Primary stabilization fuser temperature 145 Secondary stabilization fuser temperature 165 Copying operation temperature 1 175 Copying operation temperature 2 185 Number of sheets for fuser control 11 Number of sheets for fuser control thick paper 2 U162 Stabilizing fuser forcibly U163 Resetting the fuser problem data U167 Checking the fuser count U198 Setting the fuser phase control Off U199 Checking the fuser temperature Operation U200 Turning all LEDs on panel 2 U203 Checking DP separately gt suppo equipment U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Off U207 Checking the operation panel keys U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors U244 Checki
237. intenance count reaches the set value the message is displayed Purpose To change the time for maintenance due indication Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Setting range Initial setting Exp 1 Exp 2 First 3 digits Last 3 digits 000 to 999 000 to 999 000 000 3 Change the setting using the zoom keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U402 1 3 50 Adjusting margins of image printing Description Adjusts margins for image printing Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Pressthe start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure D Setting Initial Change in Logs escription indicator range setting value per step Exp 1 Printer leading edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 5 mm Exp 2 Printer left right margins 3 0 to 10 0 3 5 0 5 mm Exp 3 Printer trailing edge margin 5 0 to 10 0 4 5 0 5 mm Press the interrupt key Press the start key to output a test pattern Change the setting value using the zoom keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Printer leading edge margin 3 0 1 0 mm
238. ion claws Follow the procedure below to replace the drum separation claws Cautions Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit Procedure 1 2 Remove the drum unit see page 1 5 34 Push the drum separation claws with the minus driver from the top of the hole and remove the claws Replace the drum separation claws and refit all the removed parts Drum separation claw separation claw 2KL 2KK Figure 1 5 60 1 5 35 2KL 2KK 3 Detaching and refitting the main charger unit Follow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover and remove the waste Main charger toner box release lever 2 While lifting the main charger unit toward the upper right remove the unit 3 While pressing the main charger release lever in the direction indicated by the arrow at the removal stopper position to release the removal stopper remove the main charger unit from the machine 4 Replace the main charger unit and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 61 1 5 36 2KL 2KK 1 5 5 Developing section 1 Detaching and refitting the developing unit Follow the procedure below to replace the developing unit Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit see page 1 5 34 2 While lifting the developing unit a little remove the unit from the machine 3 Repl
239. ion start timing U402 Exp 1 light U402 test pattern P 1 3 50 printing adjustment 7 Adjusting the trailing edge margin LSU illumination end timing U402 Exp 3 light U402 test pattern P 1 3 50 printing adjustment 8 Adjusting the left and right margins LSU illumination start end timing U402 Exp 2 light U402 test pattern P 1 3 50 printing adjustment E x Adjusting magnification of the Data processing U065 Exp 1 light Test chart P 1 3 19 No adjustment for copying using the DP scanner in the main scanning direc 10 tion scanning adjustment 2 4 5 2KL 2KK iusti Maintenance mode Adjusting Item Image Description Original Page Remarks order Item No Mode Adjusting magnification of the Original scanning speed U065 Exp 2 light Test chart P 1 3 19 U065 For copying an original placed on the con scanner in the auxiliary scanning tact glass 11 direction scanning adjustment U070 Exp 1 light P 1 3 23 U070 For copying originals from the DP Duplex copying select exp 2 light Adjusting the center line scanning Adjusting the original scan data U067 l Test chart P 1 3 21 U067 For copying an original placed on the con adjustment image adjustment tact glass 12 U072 Ex
240. ive Division Copy counts problem When the power is turned on the total count and the scan count are abnormal both on the main and engine Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation Machine number mismatch Machine number of main and engine does not match Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Communication problem between the main and engine When the power is turned on the machine does not detect the low level of SBSY and the high level of SDIR for 10 s Poor contact in the connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation Printer PWB communication problem The printer PWB does not respond 120 s after the power is turned on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation Document processor communication problem Communication fails five times succes sively Document proces sor installed incor rectly Check the installation state of th
241. jusqu ce que la ligne 1 dans l exemple de copie soit dans les limites de la valeur de r f rence Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 20 2 5 mm image a d un exemple de copie Para la imagen en la copia de muestra b aumentar el valor Para la imagen en la copia de muestra c disminuir el valor Gama de ajustes 5 0 10 0 Un cambio de valor en una unidad mueve el extremo gu a en 0 1 mm Haga salir nuevamente el patr n de prueba Repetir los pasos 2 a 3 hasta que la l nea 1 en la copia de muestra se encuentre dentro del valor de referencia lt Valor de referencia gt Dentro de 20 2 5mm imagen de copia de muestra a F r das Bild im Kopienmuster b Den Wert erh hen F r das Bild im Kopienmuster c Den Wert verringern Einstellbereich 5 0 10 0 Durch Andern des Werts um eins wird die Vorderkante um 0 1 mm verschoben Das Testmuster erneut ausgeben Die Schritte 2 und 3 wiederholen bis die Linie 1 im Kopienmuster innerhalb des Bezugswerts liegt lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 20 2 5 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Per l immagine nell esempio di copia b aumentare il valore Per l immagine nell esempio di copia c ridurre il valore Gamma di impostazione 5 0 10 0 Cambiando il valore di una unit si sposta il bordo di entrata di 0 1 mm Eseguire di nuovo i modelli di prova Ripetere i passi da 2 a 3 finch la linea 1 nell esempio di copia non sia entro il valore di riferimento
242. k and loop fasteners up over the platen Align original mat B corner that has 90 degrees of angle with the inner left corner of the original instruction panel 8 Close the DP A slowly to attach the original mat B onto it with the hook and loop fasteners Fixation du tapis d original 7 Placez le tapis d original B sur la glace d exposition avec son crochet et ses attaches boucle orient es vers le haut Aligner le coin du plateau d original B faisant un angle de 90 degr s avec le coin gauche interne du panneau d instructions d original 8 Refermez progressivement le DP A pour fixer le tapis d original B sur celui ci avec le crochet et les attaches boucle Colocaci n de la plancha de originales 7 Coloque la plancha de originales B en su gancho y fijadores de bucle sobre el crystal de exposici n Alinee la esquina que tiene un ngulo de 90 grados de la alfombrilla para originales B con la esquina interior izquierda del panel de instrucciones para el original 8 Cierre lentamente el DP A para colocar la plancha de originales B con el gancho y fijadores de bucle Anbringen der Originalmatte 7 Die Originalmatte B mit den Klettverschl ssen nach oben auf das Vorlagenglas legen Die Ecke der Originalmatte B die einen 90 Grad Winkel aufweist mit der linken inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten 8 Den DP A langsam schlieBen so dass die Originalmatte B mit den Klettve
243. l 1 Scan signal 0 Connected to the main engine PWB OO N OO dd A ON mie A A LAB X LIE A qtio X ON DOA FR WN Oo LEDO LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LEDS LED6 LED7 LED8 LED9 LED10 LED11 LED12 KEYO KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 o o ooo 0000000 0 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel key scan return signal 0 Operation panel key scan return signal 1 Operation panel key scan return signal 2 Operation panel key scan return signal 3 Operation panel key scan return signal 4 ON OORA NN O 2 3 15 2KL 2KK This page is intentionally left blank
244. l feed During primary feed of the second original in the simplex or duplex mode even if retry operation is performed five times primary original feed is not performed 71 An original jam in the original conveying sec tion 1 During the secondary original feed in the simplex mode DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn off within speci fied time of the original conveying motor OCM turning on 9900 pulses 72 An original size error jam DP timing switch DPTSW turns off within the specified time of period of the original conveying motor OCM turning on in the simplex or duplex mode 1145 pulses 73 An original jam in the original conveying sec tion 2 During original conveying in the duplex mode DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn off within specified time of the original conveying motor OCM turning on 9900 pulses 74 An original jam in the original conveying sec tion 3 During secondary original feed in the duplex mode DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn on within specified time of the original switchback motor OSBM turning on 2300 pulses Section Description Conditions Specified 2KL 2KK time Document processor 75 An original jam in the original switchback section During original switchback in the duplex mode the origi nal switchback switch OSBSW does not turn on within specified time of the original conveying motor OCM turning on
245. l ingrandimento Controllare la differenza tra la linea 1 dell originale a e la linea 2 della copia di esempio Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione Valore di riferimento Entro 1 5 96 RAS HAE a R CL AWE RZ 2 H An GE SERERE DAA lt gt L 596 BA DP SERE ERR Wifi a Dig EDLY T VOR 2 D OPE BT 6 Y YU IS EVER OO GF Uca Hz de AEM gt 1 5 DIM MES If the operation panel is a 7 segment type S S 1 Set the mode to Maintenance Mode U070 use the Exposure key to select exp 1 and then adjust the upper and lower limits by magnifying the image Press the Interrupt key and check the image in the proof copy For copy example h Increase the setting value For copy example i Decrease the setting value Amount of change per step 0 2 mm le panneau de commande est du type 7 segments 1 Passez en mode de maintenance U070 s lectionnez exp 1 l aide de la touche d exposition puis ajuster les bords sup rieur et inf rieur en agrandissant l image Appuyez sur la touche d interruption et v rifiez l image l aide d une copie de test Pour l exemple de copie h Augmentez la valeur de r glage Pour l exemple de copie i Diminuez la valeur de r glage Quantit de changement par pas 0 2 mm el tablero de controles es del tipo de 7 segmentos 1 EnEntre en el modo de man
246. l original cover or the DP Y Exit maintenance mode Y Install other optional devices Make test copies Y Install the toner container T Attaching the operation label Y Install the waste toner box Attaching the cover label Y Completion of the machine installation 1 2 2 Unpacking 2KL 2KK Figure 1 2 2 Unpacking Machine Outer case Inner frame Skid Bottom left pad Bottom right pad Top left pad Top right pad Machine cover 0 Eject spacer 1 Document tray 23200020 p Caution Place the machine on a level surface Power cord Paper storage bags Plastic bag Plastic bag Cursor pins Cover label Cassette size labels Operation label A Operation label B Hinge joints Barcode labels 2KL 2KK Remove the tapes 1 Remove four tapes and remove the plastic sheet Plastic sheet Figure 1 2 3 2 Remove five tapes Tape Figure 1 2 4 1 2 4 3 Pull the cassette out 4 Remove the tapes 5 Push the cassette back in Install the optional paper feeder 1 Install the optional paper feeder as neces sary Release the scanner pins 1 Remove two tapes 2 Remove two scamner pins Install the optional original cover or the DP 1 Install the optional original cover or DP 2KL 2KK Cassette
247. ld 2 Per l immagine nell esempio di copia b aumentare il valore Per l immagine nell esempio di copia c ridurre il valore Gamma di impostazione 5 0 10 0 Cambiando il valore di una unit si sposta il bordo di entrata di 0 1 mm 3 Eseguire di nuovo i modelli di prova 4 Ripetere i passi da 2 a 3 finch la linea 1 nell esempio di copia non sia entro il valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento Entro 20 2 5 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a GIN MINIMA c fun RD TAME 3 AR LA a Lit FE J BHAT 20 2 5 mm DIY Ca BY EE DD 2 ESFY ZL b ROSA Ee EU o ALP LZ Wo FIPS FRE 0 5 0 10 0 LAF y FORCE 0 1mm 3 HET ARAN VII dS H 4 ALT NOE 1 BH nie IRAT FI 2 ZO KE ED 20 2 5mm DIN 2 EY a MA Zo 11 If the operation panel is an LCD type Adjusting the center line 1 Run maintenance mode 034 Select ADJ LSU OUT TIMING and press the Start key 2nd level cassette Select LSU T1 3nd level cassette Select LSU T2 And level cassette Select LSU T3 Press the Interrupt key to print a test pattern and check the printed image Reference value Within x 2 0 mm copy example a image If the gap between the center of the paper dotted line and the copy example line Si le panneau de commande est du type LCD R glage de la ligne centrale
248. le 1 1 Awiare il modo manutenzione 034 Selezionare ADJ RCL ON TIMING e premere il tasto di avvio Cassetto del 2 livello Selezionare RCL T1 Cassetto del 3 livello Selezionare RCL T2 Cassetto del 4 livello Selezionare RCL T3 Premere il tasto di interruzione per stampare i modelli di prova e controllare l immagine stampata Valore di riferimento Entro 20 2 5 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a Se lo scostamento tra il bordo della carta e la linea dell esempio di copia 1 maggiore rispetto al valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione REHIA LCD ZUR mt 1 HAT HEB 034 XEFE ADJ RCL ON TIMING 4 FFFLA BE ARE RCL TI A RCL T2 SIR RCL T3 Paone TEME AM RRE SA gt 20 X 2 5 mm WA Ca R ZA d KK PRS EAN ZR CIO Aa AA UA FN RE BHE NTUUVISLOD 24 70158 Sime 7 318 1 AVF RY AEH F U034 cia ADJ RCL ON TIMING BER LA 7 boe ET HE y b 2 BEA RCL TI RRT Atty b 3 BEA RCL T2 RTS HEY b 4 BEA RCL T3 SHIRTS FD AMAR ALT ZX RASE HV eA UC ER MER EME 20 2 5mm LAAN at 4 77 a iB MO Festa e ALY TORR 1 FNAC OE 3 COSS ZI 2 For the image in copy example b Increase the value For the image in copy example c Decrease the value Setting range 5 0 10 0 Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0 1 mm 3 Output the test pattern again 4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 until the line 1 in the copy example is within the reference value lt Re
249. le a e la linea 2 della copia di esempio Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione Valore di riferimento Per copia simplex Entro 2 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 2 0 mm NE ES HU a E 1 AWE RZ 2 BEER Un FEA MES DARA lt A gt PATATE 2 0mm LIN ARIA 2 Omm A DP 491377 ns a DR Lal 77 VOR 2 D TPN ERT A TAEAO EO TIE ZBIR lt EYE gt HOYA 2 0mm LAP Ti OLA 2 Omm LAP If the operation panel is a 7 segment type 1 S 1 S 1 Set the mode to Maintenance Mode U071 use the Exposure key to select exp 1 and then adjust the upper and lower limits by magnifying the image Press the Interrupt key and check the image in the proof copy For copy example j Decrease the setting value For copy example k Increase the setting valueue Amount of change per step 0 2 mm le panneau de commande est du type 7 segments Passez en mode de maintenance U071 s lectionnez exp 1 l aide de la touche d exposition puis ajuster les bords sup rieur et inf rieur en agrandissant l image Appuyez sur la touche d interruption et v rifiez l image l aide d une copie de test Pour l exemple de copie j Diminuez la valeur de r glage Pour l exemple de copie k Augmentez la valeur de r glage Quantit de changeme
250. le de copie 2 est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Si el tablero de controles es de tipo 7 segmentos Ajuste de la l nea central 1 Active el modo de mantenimiento 034 Presione la tecla de modo de calidad de imagen hasta que se enciendan Text y Photo grupo 2 Casete de 2 nivel Presione la tecla de exposici n hasta que se encienda exp3 modo 3 Casete de 3 nivel Presione la tecla de exposici n hasta que se encienda exp4 modo 4 Casete de 4 nivel Presione la tecla de exposici n hasta que se encienda exp5 modo 5 Presione la tecla de interrupci n para imprimir un patr n de prueba y compruebe la imagen impresa Valor de referencia Dentro de 2 0 mm imagen de copia de muestra a Si la separaci n entre el centro del papel l nea de puntos y la l nea de la copia de muestra 2 es mayor que el valor de referencia realizar el siguiente ajuste Wenn es sich um eine 7 Segment Bedienungstafel handelt Einstellen der Mittellinie 1 1 F hren Sie den Wartungsmodus 034 aus Dr cken Sie die Bildqualit tsmodustaste bis Text und Photo aufleuchten Gruppe 2 Kassette 2 Stufe Dr cken Sie die Belichtungstaste bis exp3 aufleuchtet Modus 3 Kassette 3 Stufe Dr cken Sie die Belichtungstaste bis exp4 aufleuchtet Modus 4 Kassette 4 Stufe Dr cken Sie die Belichtungstaste bis exp5 aufleuchtet Modus 5 Dr cken Sie die Unterbrechungstaste um ein Testmuster auszudrucken
251. lor de referencia Dentro de 20 2 5 mm imagen de copia de muestra a F r das Bild im Kopienmuster b Den Wert erh hen F r das Bild im Kopienmuster c Den Wert verringern Einstellbereich 5 0 10 0 Durch Andern des Werts um eins wird die Vorderkante um 0 1 mm verschoben Machen Sie eine erneute Probekopie Die Schritte 2 und 3 wiederholen bis die Linie 1 im Kopienmuster innerhalb des Bezugswerts liegt lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 20 2 5 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Per l immagine nell esempio di copia b aumentare il valore Per l immagine nell esempio di copia c ridurre il valore Gamma di impostazione 5 0 10 0 Cambiando il valore di una unit si sposta il bordo di entrata di 0 1 mm Eseguire di nuovo i modelli di prova Ripetere i passi da 2 a 3 finch la linea 1 nell esempio di copia non sia entro il valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento Entro 20 2 5 mm immagine dell esempio di copia a c GIN Jib VERE S BoE WH 5 0 410 0 1 Hu maie 0 1mm AHT iA HH EE o EEHNEDIE 2 4 3 EA 1 IIb ARE E FEL A lt B gt 20 2 5 mm UA Ca R EZ HA ae Ty Cc E BUERG 5 0 10 0 LAF gt FOR EH 0 1mm BETA bZV BJERI RS AEP 7 10 1 23km B I RS EC FIR 2 RO FLYER 20 2 5mm LAN EY a iffe Zo If the operation pa
252. lutch YC7 17 on the main engine PWB Registration clutch YC7 18 on the main engine PWB Duplex feed clutch YC7 12 on the main engine PWB 2KL 2KK Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 5 The MP solenoid does not operate Broken solenoid coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the solenoid Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective cassette PWB Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the cassette PWB goes low If not replace the cassette PWB MP solenoid YC8 2 on the cassette PWB Defective main engine PWB Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the main engine PWB goes low If not replace the main engine PWB MP solenoid YC7 16 on the main engine PWB 6 The cleaning lamp does not turn on Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective cleaning lamp Check for continuity If none replace the cleaning lamp Defective main engine PWB If YC3 B6 and YC3 B7 on the main engine PWB is always low replace the main engine PWB 7 The exposure lamp does not turn on or off Poor contact in the con nector te
253. m count appears If the jam count is a 4 digit value the first digit and the last 3 digits are displayed alternately Press the stop clear key The jam code appears again Exposure Exposure adjustment keys adjustment keys J10 Stop Start key Stop Start key clear key Exposure clear key adjustment keys 10 100 Figure 1 3 21 Clearing all jam counts 1 Display CLE using the exposure adjustment keys Jam counts cannot be cleared individually 2 Press the start key The counts are cleared Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the service call counts Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types Purpose To check the service call code status by types Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing con sumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Display the service call code to check the count using the exposure adjustment keys 3 Press the start key The service call count appears If the service call count is a 4 digit value the first digit and the last 3 digits are displayed alternately Press the stop clear key The service call code appears again Exposure Exposure adjustment keys adjustment keys 010 Stop Start key Stop Start key clear key Exposure clear key adjustment keys 10 gt 100 Figure 1 3 22 Clearing counts by service call codes 1
254. medio de tres tornillos M3 x 8 B y un tornillo M3 x 12 C Derecha dos tornillos M3 x 8 B Izquierda un tornillo M3 x 8 B Atr s un tornillo M3 x 12 C 10 Jede Kassette mit jeweils drei M3 x 8 Schrauben B und einer M3 x 12 Schraube C sichern Rechts Zwei M3 x 8 Schrauben B Links Eine M3 x 8 Schraube B Hinten Eine M3 x 12 Schraube C 10 Fissare ciascuno dei cassettoni usando tre viti M3 x 8 B e una vite M3 x 12 C Lato destro due viti M3 x 8 B Lato sinistro una vite M3 x 8 B Lato posteriore una vite M3 x 12 C 10 EH 3 M3 X 8 WAS BD A 1 M3 X 12 HAY CO ERA HE 2 M3 X 8 WBZ B Zell 1 M3 X 8 Wee B JE 1 M3 X 12 3322 C 10 HI y FE lA M3 X 8 B 3 A EOEA M3 X 12 C 1 ATH T 2 All M3 x 8 B 4 2k FE EA M3 x 8 B 1 BM M3 X 12 0 1 11 11 11 11 11 11 Re attach the back cover 7 to each cassette using the screw 5 and pin 6 Reposez le capot arri re 7 de chaque cassette l aide de la vis 5 et de la goupille 6 Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior 7 de cada casete por medio del tornillo 5 y el pasador 6 Die hintere Abdeckung 7 wieder mittels Schraube 5 und Stift 6 an jeder Kassette anbringen Ricollocare il coperchio posteriore 7 a ciascun cassettone usando la vite 5 e il perno 6 EHI 5 AMES C60 bre NR Mo ARTI PORIN T E EA 5 1 4d
255. mento Per copia simplex Entro 3 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 4 0 mm RAT BA EE ED s RARER 1 6 ADWARE 2 AEREA o Cif gt AAT 3 Omm LIA AT 4 Omm DI PA grz trat Xhp27X5 AEH YP ORR 2 SIMBA ICR ET FIL 6 EHO ET lt HEXE gt FEDRA 3 0mm DAP HM OBE 4 Omm LAP 3mm 4mm X 100 lt 1 5 Checking the magnification Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment Reference value Within 1 5 96 V rification de l agrandissement V rifiez l cart entre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Valeur de r f rence 1 5 max Verificaci n del cambio de tamafio Verifique la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra Si la superaci n supera el valor de referencia haga el siguiente ajuste Valor de referencia Dentro de 1 5 96 Uberpr fen der Vergr erung Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters pr fen berschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren lt Bezugswert gt Innerhalb 1 5 96 Controllo del
256. mm 10 Fo bh 7 Eh DS 3mm 4mm 3mm 4mm 4 Refit the cover 6 removed in step 2 5 Carry out the tasks in steps 7 and 8 on page 4 Briefly remove the original mat B from the DP main unit and then re attach the original mat B by following the steps Remettez en place le capot 6 retir auparavant l tape 2 Proc dez aux op rations des tapes et 8 de la page 4 Enlevez bri vement le tapis d original B de l unit principale DP A et r installez le tapis d original B en proc dant de la mani re suivante Vuelva a colocar la cubierta 6 desmontada en el paso 2 Realice las tareas descritas en los pasos 7 y 8 de la p gina 4 Quite brevemente la plancha de original B de la unidad principal DP A y a continuaci n vuelva a colocar la plancha de original B de acuerdo al siguiente procedimiento Die in Schritt 2 entfernte Abdeckung 6 wieder anbringen Die Arbeiten der Schritte 7 und 8 auf Seite 4 ausf hren Die Originalmatte B kurz aus der DP Haupteinheit A herausnehmen und dann die Originalmatte B wieder mit folgenden Schritten anbringen Reinserire il coperchio 6 rimosso nel passo 2 Effettuare i lavori riportati nei punti 7 e 8 a pagina 4 Rimuovere temporaneamente il coprioriginale B dall unit principale del DP A e quindi ricollocare il coprioriginale B seguendo i passi AIR 2 Jk MAITEA 6 PSA
257. mory Interface Duplex unit Paper weight nene Paper type Paper size Power source Exposure by cleaning lamp Heat roller Heat source Halogen heaters Abnormally high temperature protection devices thermostats Standard 32 MB Maximum 160 MB USB interface connector 1 USB Hi speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 600 x 600 dpi Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Humidity 15 to 8096 RH Altitude 2500 m 8 202 ft maximum Brightness 1500 lux maximum 568 W x 546 D x 502 H mm main body only 22 3 8 W x 21 1 2 D x 19 3 4 H main body only 33 kg 72 8 lbs 838 mm W x 546 D mm using MP tray 33 W x 21 1 2 D using MP tray 120 V AC 60 Hz 9 7 A 220 to 240 V AC 50 Hz 5 1 A Document processor paper feeder duplex unit key counter printer kit and expansion memory Internal type 64 105 g m2 Plain Recycled A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R ABR Folio Ledger Legal Letter LetterR StatementR Oficio II 8K 16K Electrically connected to the machine Dimensions eer 363 W x 54 D x 181 H mm 14 5 16 W x 2 1 8 D x 7 1 8 H Weight iced lalla 0 5 kg or less 1 1 Ibs or less NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice 1 1 2 Parts names 1 Body Nod aun gt Original cover option Output tray Operation panel Cassette Paper width
258. mount 2 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the interrupt key Completion Press the stop clear key when main charger output stops while a selection item is displayed The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 34 Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U101 Setting the other high voltages Description Changes the developing bias clock the transfer and separation charging output timing Purpose To check the developing bias clock the transfer and separation charging output timing Do not change the preset value Method Press the start key Setting 1 Select the group to be set or checked using the image mode selection key 2 Select the item to be set using the exposure adjustment keys Image mode Exposure I Setting Initial LEDs indicator Description range setting O T 4 Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit Developing bias clock frequency copier 2 to 255 27 O Gi Photo Exp 2 lit Developing bias clock duty copier 1 to 99 45 ET Text Exp 3 lit Exp 4 lit Exp 5 lit Transfer control voltage large size 0 to 255 Developing bias clock frequency printer 2 to 255 22 Developing bias clock duty printer 1 to 99 45 Exp 1 flashing Transfer control voltage small size 0 to 255 Exp
259. n 2056 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation 1364 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on 5907 ms 55 Misfeed in feedshift section second paper feeder The job eject switch JBESW does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on 2056 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation 1364 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on 5907 ms 1 4 5 2KL 2KK Section Description Conditions Specified time Feedshift section 56 Misfeed in feedshift section third paper feeder The job eject switch JBESW does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on 2056 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation 1364 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2766 ms The feedshift switch FSSW do
260. n 1 5 1 T Precautioris x ehe A Eid iris E 1 5 1 DO e a nt 1 5 1 SMN A A 1 5 1 2KL 2KK 1 5 2 1 5 3 1 5 4 1 5 5 1 5 6 1 5 7 1 5 8 4 How to tell a genuine Kyocera Mita toner container 1 5 2 Paper feed Sections tii aaa aaa 1 5 3 1 Detaching and refitting the separation pulley nmm 1 5 3 2 Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley i 1 5 6 3 Detaching and refitting the paper CONVEYING UNit e 1 5 9 4 Detaching and refitting the MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pad 1 5 11 5 Detaching and refitting the left registration roller 1 5 14 6 Detaching and refitting the right registration roller rn nsennnnnssssnnrsnsrnnrnsnnne 1 5 15 Optical SeCtlOD aiii 1 5 17 1 Detaching and refitting the exposure lampe 1 5 17 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner wires mme 1 5 19 2 1 Detaching the scanner wires sens 1 5 19 2 2 Fitting the scanner wires iii 1 5 22 3 Detaching and refitting the ISU reference 1 5 26 4 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit 1 5 28 5 Adjusting the longitudinal squareness reference 1 5 33 Drum Section E MM 1 5 34 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unit sise 1 5 34 2 Detaching and refitting the drum separation claws sse em 1 5 35 3 Detaching and
261. n duplex and simplex copy Purpose To be set according to frequency of use to the more frequently used mode Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select on or oFF using the zoom keys Display Description on Duplex copy oFF Simplex copy Initial setting Simplex copy 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the low power mode Description Changes the control for low power mode Purpose According to user request selects which has priority the recovery time from low power or energy saver Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the zoom keys Display Description 0 ENERGY STAR 1 GEEA Initial setting ENERGY STAR If GEEA is set the Auto off mode setting is fixed to ON and cannot be changed The maximum time for entering the low power mode and the off mode becomes 120 minutes 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the value for maintenance due indication Description Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the ma
262. n the developing unit 1 4 32 2KL 2KK Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 8 Abnormal noise is heard Check if the pulleys rollers and gears operate smoothly Grease the bearings and gears Check if the following clutches and solenoid are installed correctly paper feed clutch registration clutch and MP solenoid Correct 1 4 33 2KL 2KK This page is intentionally left blank 1 4 34 2KL 2KK 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly 1 Precautions Before starting disassembly turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet When handling PWBs printed wiring boards do not touch parts with bare hands The PWBs are susceptible to static charge Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge Use only the specified parts to replace the fuser unit thermostat Never substitute electric wires as the machine may be seriously damaged When removing the hook of the connector be sure to release the hook Take care not to get the cables caught To reassemble the parts use the original screws If the types and the sizes of screws are not known refer to the PARTS LIST 2 Drum Note the following when handling or storing the drum When removing the drum unit never expose the drum surface to strong direct light Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 20 C 4 F and
263. nG is displayed and operation stops Determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manu ally by running the corresponding maintenance items Completion Press the stop clear key after auto adjustment is complete The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed If the stop clear key is pressed during auto adjustment adjustment stops and no settings are changed 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U093 Setting the exposure density gradient Description Changes the exposure density gradient in the manual density mode depending on respective image quality modes Purpose To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment for respec tive image quality modes Also used to make copy images darker or lighter Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the image mode to be adjusted using the image mode selection key Image mode LEDs Description O ET il Text amp Photo Density in text mode O Photo ET Text O T 4 Text amp Photo Density in text and photo mode Photo O ET Text O T 45 Text amp Photo Density in photo mode GalPhoto ET Text 9 Off On Setting 1 Selectthe item to be set using the exposure adjustment keys 2 Adjust the setting using the zoom keys Exposure Description Setting Initial
264. nd press the OK key Back ground adjustment The ground color adjusting after copying 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 13 OptimezBackgr and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the OK key Setting range 1 lightest to 5 darkest Cassette selection Select the auto paper select function based on the orig inal size or priority cassette selection 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 14 Initial Paper and press the OK key 3 Select Auto or DefaultCassette and press the OK key 2KL 2KK Selecting paper types for automatic paper selection Selects the cassette that is to be automatically be given priority for use 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 15 AutoSel Paper and press the OK key 3 Select the paper type and press the OK key Selected cassette Selects the cassette that is to be automatically be given priority for use 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 16 DefaultCasset and press the OK key 3 Select Cassette1 Cassette2 Cassette3 or Cassette4 and press the OK key Auto cassette switching Sets whether the auto cassette switching function is available 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 17 AutoCassetSel and press the OK key 3 Select Disting paper or Not disting and press the OK key This will be displayed when the optional paper feeder is i
265. nd replace 2KL 2KK Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 11 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in first paper feeder Jam code 22 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Check visually and replace Broken registration switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective registration switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 1 to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 1 Check see page 1 4 28 Check if the right and left registration rollers contact each other Check visually and replace 12 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in second paper feeder Jam code 23 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Check visually and replace Broken cassette feed Switch 1 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective cassette feed Switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn cassette feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch is not li
266. ndissant l image Appuyez sur la touche d interruption et v rifiez l image l aide d une copie de test Pour l exemple de copie I Augmentez la valeur de r glage Pour l exemple de copie m Diminuez la valeur de r glage Quantit de changement par pas 0 15 mm Si el tablero de controles es del tipo de 7 segmentos 1 EnEntre en el modo de mantenimiento e ingrese en el item de mantenimiento U072 utilice la tecla de exposici n para seleccionar exp 1 y a continuaci n ajuste los l mites superior e inferior cambiando de tamafio la imagen Presione la tecla de interrupci n y compruebe la imagen en la copia de prueba Para la copia de muestra I Aumente el valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra m Reduzca el valor de configuraci n Cantidad de cambio por paso 0 15 mm Wenn es sich um eine 7 Segment Bedienungstafel handelt 1 Den Modus auf Wartungsmodus U072 setzen mit der Belichtungstaste exp 1 wahlen und dann die obere und untere Grenze durch Vergr ern des Bilds einstellen Die Unterbrechungstaste dr cken und das Bild an der Probekopie berpr fen F r Kopienmuster I Den Einstellwert erh hen F r Kopienmuster m Den Einstellwert erniedrigen Anderungsbetrag pro Stufe 0 15 mm Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello a 7 segmenti 1 Entrare in modalit manutenzione U072 usare il tasto di esposizione per selezionare exp 1 e quindi regolare i limiti superiore e inferiore tramite l ingrandime
267. nel is a 7 segment type Adjusting the center line 1 1 Run maintenance mode 034 Press the image quality mode key until Text and Photo are lit group 2 2nd level cassette Press the exposure key until exp3 is lit mode 3 3rd level cassette Press the exposure key until exp4 is lit mode 4 4th level cassette Press the exposure key until exp5 is lit mode 5 Press the Interrupt key to print a test pattern and check the printed image Reference value Within 2 0 mm copy example a image If the gap between the center of the paper dotted line and the copy example line 2 is larger than the reference value perform the following adjustment Si le panneau de commande est du type 7 segments R glage de la ligne centrale 1 Ex cutez le mode de maintenance 034 Appuyez sur la touche de mode de qualit d image jusqu ce que Text et Photo s allument groupe 2 Cassette de 2 me niveau Appuyez sur la touche d exposition jusqu ce que exp3 s allume mode 3 Cassette de 3 me niveau Appuyez sur la touche d exposition jusqu ce que exp4 s allume mode 4 Cassette de 4 me niveau Appuyez sur la touche d exposition jusqu ce que exp5 s allume mode 5 Appuyez sur la touche d interruption pour imprimer un motif de test et v rifiez l mage imprim e Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 2 0 mm image a d un exemple de copie Si l cart entre l axe du papier ligne pointill e et le trait de l exemp
268. ng detection sensor transmission data LE Setting detection sensor threshold value Setting original size judgment time Method to display the data for the sensor 1 Place an original on the contact glass and turn the original detection switch on The exposure lamp turns on and the width of the original is detected The scanner data taken at the nine points from 1 at the machine rear to 9 at the machine front is displayed The data is displayed within the range of 000 to 255 000 indicating white original present and 255 indicating black no original Change the point to display the detection data using the exposure adjustment keys For the correspon dence between the detection point and the exposure indicators see Figure 1 3 16 123 456 789 Exposure indicator exp 1 lit exp 2 lit exp 3 lit exp 4 lit exp 5 lit exp 1 flashing exp 2 flashing exp 3 flashing 0 AN Oa A OQ NM exp 4 flashing Figure 1 3 16 3 Press the stop clear key The selected item appears 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U099 Method to set or check the original size detection threshold cont 1 Place an original on the contact glass and turn the original detection switch on The original size detec tion starts and detection data is displayed 2 Change the detection item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure Description Setting Initial indicator
269. ng the DP switches U245 Checking messages Mode setting U250 Setting the maintenance cycle 150000 1 2 U251 Checking clearing the maintenance count 071 2 U252 Setting the destination Japan U253 Switching between double and single counts A3 1 2 U254 Turning auto start function on off On t U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting After ejection 1 2 U265 Setting the destination specifications 0 U277 Setting auto application change time 30 1 2 U286 Setting the oputional language 071 2 U332 Setting the size conversion factor 1 0712 U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function U342 Setting the ejection restriction On t Initial setting for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 3 2KL 2KK Section oe Content of maintenance item pale Mode setting U343 Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Simplex copy U344 Setting the low power mode ENERGY STAR inch 1 2 GEEA metric U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication 012 Image U402 Adjusting margins of image printing 3 0 3 5 4 5 1 processing U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact 2 0 3 0 2 0 2 0 glass U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 2 0 3 0 2 0 2 0 U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory ima
270. ngle du bord avant V rifiez l cart entre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 3 0 mm max Copie recto verso 4 0 mm max Verificaci n del ngulo del borde superior Verifique la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra Si la superaci n supera el valor de referencia haga el siguiente ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm Uberprifen des Winkels der Vorderkante Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters pr fen berschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren lt Bezugswert gt F r Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm F r Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Controllo dell angolo del bordo principale Controllare la differenza tra la linea 1 dell originale a e la linea 2 della copia di esempio Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione Valore di riferimento Per copia simplex Entro 3 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 4 0 mm NE E MARE a Be 1 AMMEN RAG 2 f EE RARE HE ELI DARA lt A gt UAL 3 Omm LAW 4 Omm LA PY TTT fia a oii 1 Laes UTVOR 2 OP HEMT 5 3 Yu EIER HOME 3 0mm EA
271. nie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters pr fen berschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren lt Bezugswert gt F r Simplexkopie Innerhalb 2 0 mm F r Duplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mml Controllo della linea centrale Controllare la differenza tra la linea 1 dell originale a e la linea 2 della copia di esempio Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione Valore di riferimento Per copia simplex Entro 2 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 3 0 mm TA toc ARTE a Be 1 FAMED HE 2 BIAS dn Revi HAM YATES CET FATTI 2 Omm LAW MUMS 3 Omm M DPtVI 51VAE I a OEVIF74 7 1 Lar styr NADEVI FZA 2 odmT ctis AT VIE ODE NEAR AER HOYA 2 Omm LAP MANGA 3 Omm LAP If the operation panel is a 7 segment type 1 Set the mode to Maintenance Mode U072 use the Exposure key to select exp 1 and then adjust the upper and lower limits by magnifying the image Press the Interrupt key and check the image in the proof copy For copy example I Increase the setting value For copy example m Decrease the setting value Amount of change per step 0 15mm Si le panneau de commande est du type a 7 segments 1 Passez en mode de maintenance U072 s lectionnez exp 1 l aide de la touche d exposition puis ajuster les bords sup rieur et inf rieur en agra
272. ning on 2290 ms 23 Multiple sheets in sec ond paper feeder Cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 does not turn off within specified time of its turning on 5907 ms Cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 does not turn off within the specified time of cassette paper feed clutch 2 CPFCL2 turning on 1953 ms 24 Multiple sheets in third paper feeder Cassette feed switch 2 CFSW2 does not turn off within specified time of its turning on 5907 ms Cassette feed switch 2 CFSW2 does not turn off within the specified time of cassette paper feed clutch 3 CPFCL3 turning on 1953 ms Paper conveying section 30 Misfeed in registration transfer section A message which is not the one indicating start of sec ondary paper feed is received when the machine waits for start of secondary paper feed The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 turning on paper feed from second paper feeder 2523 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 turning on paper feed from third paper feeder 2243 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the cassette feed switch 1 CFSW1 turning off 2243 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW turning on 1589 ms
273. nlnln 01937 1031 e 11 21 01a3711a31 ELL ZLATVOAZA jueuinoo eb eb ZLGSVOASH 9S d ZOA a lala dicii anes LADUZADA WE SUOL LAZM ZAZA be bk fou EADIVAD ZA 21 81 EA3M DAZA o o oF oF 620A 6 6 6 6 8 e ej e CINOS ONOS 91 SL We 9L SI Le GNDS GNOS is APE aa 2009190091 Piel E pres em 2000790001 oas z i Z y Ken z SsaaoTraao1 eH S 9 zu S 9 saaoTraao1 wos E 8 RES AS Ssoz eaaoveaao1 oe e ov6 2 caaovezaaoi ano 2 z 2 6 03 9563074 iadowodaoi 8 4 6 01 ez 6 01 Lado 100091 qasda v v e or v 135400 Stir m SRL IDO ba a ET DD55 IO SODIO NaGOVM wdoi 9 6 11 21 gis 11 21 NAQO UM 391 amaa a 3 da rod pepe 252 5522 56568668 SHGOT AC E ve CUPI ve emi SUIOTVAE E ONASADUO 9 9 9 9 z Lv NNILONO 25 3 2255 lt 2 lt AeedaNos zit sue Pi etes ACEHONSS SOA ges a able agya S TS DEN RON BENSBGENR 9 oA AMdTII B amp ND cae aes vsoraR 52 lt y dvi ss 3Xoouo 2ou 9 Spot N z lt covom4a T3 S EON AMANI 25 M SSZESAGE e VON SES E ws 88282225 L anvi QZ v o0g90000 25 lt a 9Z2S2Z o soso ES aMda99 2 4 7 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DOCUMENT PROCESSOR Output Connector for Interconnecting Cable is non LPS Output 114 5 VA max Please use the item below Interconnecting Cable P N 303MX46010 Supplied parts A Document processor DP B Original mat C Angle adjusting plate DP se E M4 14 SC
274. nstalled Auto sizing Selects whether auto magnification selection or 10096 magnification is to be given priority when the sizes of the original and copy paper are different 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 18 PriorAutoZoom and press the OK key 3 Select On or Off and press the OK key Cassette paper size cassette 1 Sets the paper size for the cassette so that it will be automatically selected 1 Press paper selection keys for 3 s 2 Select 19 Cassette1Size and press the OK key 3 Select the paper size and press the OK key Cassette paper size cassette 2 Sets the paper size for the first paper feeder so that it will be automatically selected 1 Press paper selection keys for 3 s 2 Select 20 Cassette2Size and press the OK key 3 Select the paper size and press the OK key This will be displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Cassette paper size cassette 3 Sets the paper size for the second paper feeder so that it will be automatically selected 1 Press paper selection keys for 3 s 2 Select 21 Cassette3Size and press the OK key 3 Select the paper size and press the OK key This will be displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed 1 3 67 2KL 2KK Cassette paper size cassette 4 Sets the paper size for the third paper feeder so that it will be automatically selected 1 Press paper selection keys for 3 s 2 Select 22 Cassette4Size and press t
275. nt par pas 0 2 mm el tablero de controles es del tipo de 7 segmentos EnEntre en el modo de mantenimiento e ingrese en el item de mantenimiento U071 utilice la tecla de exposici n para seleccionar exp 1 y a continuaci n ajuste los l mites superior e inferior cambiando de tamafio la imagen Presione la tecla de interrupci n y compruebe la imagen en la copia de prueba Para la copia de muestra j Reduzca el valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra k Aumente el valor de configuraci n Cantidad de cambio por paso 0 2 mm Wenn es sich um eine 7 Segment Bedienungstafel handelt 1 Den Modus auf Wartungsmodus U071 setzen mit der Belichtungstaste exp 1 w hlen und dann die obere und untere Grenze durch Vergr Bern des Bilds einstellen Die Unterbrechungstaste dr cken und das Bild an der Probekopie berpr fen F r Kopienmuster j Den Einstellwert erniedrigen F r Kopienmuster k Den Einstellwert erh hen Anderungsbetrag pro Stufe 0 2 mm Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello a 7 segmenti 1 Entrare in modalit manutenzione U071 usare il tasto di esposizione per selezionare exp 1 e quindi regolare i limiti superiore e inferiore tramite l ingrandimento immagine Premere il tasto di interruzione e controllare l immagine nella copia di prova Per un esempio di copia j Diminuire il valore d impostazione Per un esempio di copia k Aumentare il valore d impostazione Variazione graduale 0 2
276. ntare l originale caricato L ingrandimento la sincronizzazione del bordo principale e la linea centrale vengono quindi automaticamente regolati 3 Se i risultati sono OK e il tipo di pannello operativo quello a 7 segmenti viene visualizzato quanto segue Voce 1 Gd Voce 2 0 Voce 3 0 Voce 4 0 Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD Vengono visualizzati i valori numerici per CONVEY SPEED LEAD EDGE ADJ e DP CENTER Se i risultati sono NG e il tipo di pannello operativo quello a 7 segmenti vengono visualizzati nG1 nG2 nG3 e Voce 1 Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD viene visualizzato DATA NG1 NG2 Per ulteriori dettagli vedere il manuale d istruzioni ES TARA MANE E gt FETO TIRE SME 8 MS 11 91 BEAN UOTE HEP RFE Wr aE Tho rd RA FA R Dmm E LES foi DP EMA LE 2 Poe zt ier CRA feuis RIE AA SEL BU ae REI A AA E L 3 WRA REW ELBE VE AEA LEA WU FER CHH L Gd URB 2 0 MH 3 0 MH 4 0 du gem LCD B amp 7 CONVEY SPEED LEAD EDGE ADJ 1 DP CENTER HJAU 4 hu RUE RAE BRAVE CB ZR BR bas Gl n62 n63 HUME 1 WREE LCD B fas DATA NGI NG2 o WAU Jed E UR FEAT AE CERES AEF ME o HERAA d SABRE FAO AER KUM DERE CO THLEMT 6 8 27 11 7 18 1 AVFFPYAE FU076 EU Hi ferm H gt RL FR diu LEZ Me Lic DP AMO RAT 7 MIRE
277. nterrupt key Setthe operation conditions required Changes in the following settings can be made Paper feed locations Magnifications Number of copies continuous copying is performed when set to 250 Copy density Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver preheat key 5 To control the paper feed pulley remove all the paper in the cassettes or the cassettes With the paper present the paper feed pulley does not operate 6 Press the start key Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions 7 To stop continuous operation press the stop reset key Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 7 2KL 2KK Maintenance Description item No U019 Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each board Purpose 1 3 8 To check the part number or to decide if the ROM version is new from the last digit of the number Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be displayed using the image mode selection key and exposure adjustment keys Image mode LEDs nia la Copy quantity display O FT Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit A Part Code Main PWB O f lPhoto Exp 2 lit Change history of the main PWB T Text Exp 3 lit Number of the main ROM Exp 4 lit Number of the main ROM sub O ET 43 Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit E Part Code Engine PWB O
278. nto immagine Premere il tasto di interruzione e controllare l immagine nella copia di prova Per un esempio di copia I Aumentare il valore dell impostazione Per un esempio di copia m Diminuire il valore dell impostazione Variazione graduale 0 15 mm 0 arr WEH U072 ARP ETL RM TR PE IEEE FE exp 1 REKKER RE E PIRA FRA E HE FECERIT MENE 1 mp dew fh WEE m WI PARTIE 128 THEE 2H 0 15mm IRES RILAT seg 44 PFOA 1 RYTTERE RU072 Et b LARS expl Z BER LR ET EO EF WHEAT 5 ANA ARAU TA pallio CHAMBRE TS AE Pw O ORA SENA EU A AEPD m OWE KEI FIPS DATOS EO 15mm 19 2mm 3mm 2mm 3mm 3 If the operation panel is an LCD type 1 Set the mode to Maintenance Mode U072 select 1sided and use image magnification and paper cassette level selection to adjust the upper and lower limits Then press the Interrupt key and check the image in the proof copy For copy example I Increase the setting value For copy example m Decrease the setting value Amount of change per step 0 15 mm Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD 1 Passez en mode de maintenance U072 s lectionnez 1sided puis ajustez les bords sup rieur et inf rieur l aide des fonctions d agrandissement de l image et de s lection du niveau de la cassette papier Appuyez sur la touche d interruption et v rifiez l image l aide d une copie de test Pour l exemple de
279. o 034 Presione la tecla de modo de calidad de imagen hasta que se encienda Text grupo 1 Casete de 2 nivel Presione la tecla de exposici n hasta que se encienda exp3 modo 3 Casete de 3 nivel Presione la tecla de exposici n hasta que se encienda exp4 modo 4 Casete de 4 nivel Presione la tecla de exposici n hasta que se encienda exp5 modo 5 Presione la tecla de interrupci n para imprimir un patr n de prueba y compruebe la imagen impresa Valor de referencia Dentro de 20 2 5 mm imagen de copia de muestra a Si el espacio entre el borde del papel y la l nea de la copia de muestra 1 es mayor que el valor de referencia realice el siguiente ajuste Wenn es sich um eine 7 Segment Bedienungstafel handelt Einstellen des Vorderkanten Timings 1 F hren Sie den Wartungsmodus 034 aus Dr cken Sie die Bildqualit tsmodustaste bis Text aufleuchtet Gruppe 1 Kassette 2 Stufe Dr cken Sie die Belichtungstaste bis exp3 aufleuchtet Modus 3 Kassette 3 Stufe Dr cken Sie die Belichtungstaste bis exp4 aufleuchtet Modus 4 Kassette 4 Stufe Dr cken Sie die Belichtungstaste bis exp5 aufleuchtet Modus 5 Dr cken Sie die Unterbrechungstaste um ein Testmuster auszudrucken und berpr fen Sie das Druckbild lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 20 2 5 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Falls der Abstand zwischen der Papierkante und der Kopienmusterlinie 1 gr er als der Bezugswert ist ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren
280. ode 4 Press the start key The operation starts 5 To stop continuous operation press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key when the operation stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter Purpose To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the zoom keys Display Description oFF None Crd The key card is installed Cnt The key counter is installed Initial setting oFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U207 Checking the operation panel keys 1 3 42 Description Checks operation of the operation panel keys Purpose To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel Method 1 Press the start key 2 1 appears on the copy quantity display and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights 3 Asthe keys on the operation panel are pressed in order from the left to right the figure shown on the copy quantity display increases in increments of 1 If there is an LED corresponding to the key pressed the LED will light 4 When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds 5 When th
281. of image printing see page 1 3 13 Misadjusted scanner center line Run maintenance item U067 to readjust the scanner leading edge registration see page 1 3 21 Original is not placed correctly Place the original correctly 1 4 27 2KL 2KK 1 4 4 Electric problems Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 The machine does not operate when the main power switch is turned on The power cord is not plugged in properly Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet No electricity at the power outlet Measure the input voltage Broken power cord Check for continuity If none replace the cord Defective main power Switch Check for continuity across the contacts If none replace the main power switch Defective power source PWB With AC present check for 24 V DC at YC1 2 YC1 3 and YC1 4 on the power source PWB If none replace the power source PWB 2 The eject motor does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective drive transmis sion system Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any
282. onnect the power cord to the connector on the machine Insert the power plug into the wall outlet Installing toner Turn the main power switch on Toner instal lation is started The drive chain is disengaged when toner installation is completed Run maintenance mode U130 if Add Toner remains displayed even after the drive chain is disengaged Output an own status report maintenance item U000 Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key Select d L and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the mainte nance items Press the stop clear key Exit maintenance mode 1 Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key The machine exits the mainte nance mode Make test copies AB Place an original and make test copies Attaching the operation label 1 According to need attach the correspond operation label 1 2 8 2KL 2KK Attaching the cover label 1 Attach the cover labels to three screw holes in the machine Right side Two Left side One O Q Cover label 7 Cover label Figure 1 2 12 Completion of the machine installation 1 2 9 2KL 2KK 2 Setting initial copy modes Factory settings are as follows Maintenance item No
283. ontainer sensor TCS Toner container detection switch TCDSW 2KL 2KK 2 1 9 2KL 2KK HVTPWB Developing sleeve Developing bi eveloping bias CN1 9 DHVCLKC TCONDET TCDSW TONEPY TCS YC3 2 CPWB Figure 2 1 10 Developing section block diagram 2 1 10 2KL 2KK 1 Single component developing system This machine uses the single component developing system and reversal processing is performed with a charged drum and a charged magnetic toner With the single component developing system toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and charged when it passes through the magnetic toner blade The toner that has passed through the magnetic toner blade forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve When the toner layer comes to the location where the developing sleeve is the nearest to the drum toner moves between the drum and the developing sleeve by an electric field of the magnetic pole Then when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum on the portion of the drum that has been exposed to light toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between the developing bias and the drum surface and development is performed On the other hand on the portion of the drum that has not been exposed to light toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not performed When toner comes to an area where the g
284. ontrol signal Ground CCD control signal Ground CCD control signal Ground CCD clock signal Ground Ground CCD output signal CCD output signal Ground Not used 12 V DC power output to CCDPWB Connected to the opera tion PWB 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A gm eR Cy ea a A U N o O KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 KEYO LED12 LED11 LED10 LED9 LED8 LED7 LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 LEDO 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel key scan return signal 4 Operation panel key scan return signal 3 Operation panel key scan return signal 2 Operation panel key scan return signal 1 Operation panel key scan return signal 0 Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal Operation panel indicator LED drive signal
285. or 3 malfunc tions Run maintenance item UO32 and select the clutch to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch cassette paper feed clutch 1 2 or 3 Check see service manual of paper feeder Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers Check visually and replace 1 4 9 2KL 2KK Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 8 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying misfeed in vertical paper con veying section 2 Jam code 16 Broken cassette feed switch 1 or 2 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Cassette feed switch 1 2 Check if the paper feed clutch cassette paper feed clutch 1 or 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the clutch to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch cassette paper feed clutch 1 or 2 Check see service manual of paper feeder Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers Check visually and replace 9 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in MP tray Jam code 20 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Check visually and r
286. ornillador de punta plana Einstellen des DP 1 Den DP ffnen und die zwei Rasten 4 mit einem Flachschraubenzieher l sen Regolazione del DP 1 Aprire il DP e rilasciare i due fermi 4 utilizzando un giravite a punta piatta 183 DP 1 IT DP FIAR DERF 2 ABC SE D gt DP DERE 1 DP ERE HOME 402 f pire 1 TA F7AARETRRTI 12 2 Release three latches 5 at the rear of the DP using a flat head screwdriver to remove the cover 6 2 Lib rez les trois verrous 5 situ s l arri re du DP en utilisant un tournevis t te plate pour retirer le capot 6 2 Suelte los tres pestillos 5 en el lado trasero del DP utilizando un destornillador de punta plana para desmontar la cubierta 6 2 Die drei Rasten 5 auf der R ckseite des DP mit einem Flachschraubenzieher l sen um die Abdeckung 6 zu entfernen 2 Rilasciare i tre fermi 5 sul retro del DP utilizzando un giravite a punta piatta per rimuovere il coperchio 6 2 FIRE 7 SEAT DP Je flf 3 ARA 5 JRE Fi 6 2 DP amp MIDITDIAA 5 3 BPE 1 F2 Rz RETER W 6 ZEV IT 3 Adjust the height of DP Loosen the nut 7 For copy example f Loosen the adjusting screw 8 For copy example g Tighten the adjusting screw 8 gt Amount of change per scale Approx 1 mm 9 Approx 0 5 mm 10 Retighten the nut 7 R glez l
287. orrect Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 5 86 Screw Adjusting spacer Figure 1 5 87 1 5 52 1 5 8 Others 1 Detaching and refitting the eject unit Follow the procedure below to replace the eject unit Procedure 1 Remove the rear cover see page 1 5 6 2 Remove YC14 connector of the main engine PWB A Connector 3 Remove the wire of the connector from the ribs 2KL 2KK Main engine PWB 4 Remove the front left cover see page 1 5 40 5 Remove the left middle cover see page 1 5 19 Remove the eject cover see page 1 5 30 Remove the screw Slide the eject unit toward the front side and pull out the inserted part section No Inserted part Figure 1 5 88 Figure 1 5 89 1 5 53 2KL 2KK 8 Lift the eject unit pull at the rear side of the unit first and remove the unit from the machine 9 Replace the eject unit and refit all the removed parts 1 5 54 Figure 1 5 90 2 Direction of installing the principal fan motors 2KL 2KK When detaching or refitting the cooling fan motor 1 or 2 be careful of the airflow direction intake or exhaust 2 Exhaust Cooling fan motor 2 Rating label inside N Figure 1 5 91 1 5 55 2KL 2KK This page is intentionally le
288. ostatic system Supported original types Sheets books and three dimensional objects Maximum original size A3 Ledger Original feed system Fixed Paper weight Cassette 64 105 g m2 MP tray 45 160 g m2 Paper type cene Cassette Plain Rough Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 to 8 MP tray Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Paper SIZe ereere Cassette A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R ASR Folio Ledger Legal Letter LetterR StatementR Oficio II 8K 16K MP tray A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R B6R AGR Folio Ledger Legal Letter LetterR Statement Oficio Il 8K 16K A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R B6R AGR Folio Ledger Legal Letter LetterR Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Envelope 10 Comm 10 Envelope 9 Comm 9 Envelope 6 Comm 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch ISO B5 Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Executive Statement Oficio II 8K 16K 16KR ZOOM level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Auto mode Preset zoom Printing speed 18 ppm model A4 Letter 18 sheets min A4R LetterR 13 sheets min A3 Ledger 8 sheets min B4 Legal 8 sheets min B5 16 sheets min B5R 13 sheets min ABR 10 sheets min 22 ppm model A4 Letter 22
289. outlet Proc dure Avant d installer le chargeur de document veillez mettre la machine hors tension et d brancher le c ble d alimentation de la prise murale Procedimiento Antes de instalar el procesador de documentos aseg rese de desconectar el interruptor principal de la m quina y desenchufar el cable el ctrico del tomacorriente de la pared Verfahren Schalten Sie unbedingt den Betriebsschalter der Maschine aus und trennen Sie das Netzkabel von der Netzsteckdose bevor Sie den Vorlageneinzug installieren Procedura Prima di installare l alimentatore di originali assicurarsi di spegnere l interruttore principale di alimentazione della macchina e scollegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione dalla presa a muro della rete elettrica RRR LIE DP IN ACIS AL Lah PLATE OPA HAR FAI PVT ZARA BFA DP RET SAIL MARA RO EIA gt Fe OFF CU BIRT 7 TER CD BEBE Bow Installing the DP 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 Installation du DP 1 D posez les 2 vis 1 Instalaci n del DP 1 Quite los 2 tornillos 1 Installieren des DP 1 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 1 Installazione del DP 1 Rimuovere le 2 viti 1 Ze DP 1 HUF 2 ABD DPORU ftl 1 A D2REROAT 2 Install 2 pins D 2 Installez 2 goupilles D 2 Instale 2 pasadores D 2 2 Randelschrauben D eindrehen 2 Inserire 2 perni D 2 amp E2 F4
290. p 1 light P 1 3 25 U072 For copying originals from the DP Duplex copying select exp 2 light Adjusting the leading edge registra Original scan start timing U066 Test chart P 1 3 20 U066 For copying an original placed on the con tion scanning adjustment Z image adjustment tact glass 13 U071 Exp 1 light P 1 3 24 U071 For copying originals from the DP Duplex copying select exp 3 light Adjusting the leading edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 Exp 2 light Test chart P 1 3 51 U403 For copying an original placed on the con scanning adjustment image adjustment tact glass 14 U404 Exp 2 light P 1 3 52 U404 For copying originals from the DP Adjusting the trailing edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 Exp 4 light Test chart P 1 3 51 U403 For copying an original placed on the con scanning adjustment image adjustment tact glass 15 U404 Exp 4 light P 1 3 52 U404 For copying originals from the DP Adjusting the left and right margins Adjusting the original scan data U403 Exp 1 Exp 3 light Test chart P 1 3 51 U403 For copying an original placed on the con scanning adjustment image adjustment tact glass 16 U404 Exp 1 Exp 3 light P 1 3 52 U404 For copying originals from the DP When maintenance item U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically is run using the specified original P N 302FZ56990 the following adjustments are automatically made Adjusting the
291. panneau de commande est du type LCD l affichage est DATA NG12 NG2 Pour plus de d tails reportez vous au manuel de service Ajuste autom tico utilizando el original para el ajuste Antes de hacer el ajuste aseg rese de ajustar el ngulo del borde superior y el ngulo del borde inferior vea las p ginas 8 y 11 1 Entre en el modo de mantenimiento e ingrese en el item de mantenimiento U076 y corte el borde inferior del original para el ajuste Despu s col quelo en la cubierta de originales de la unidad principal DP con el lado donde F y R est n impresos hacia arriba 2 Presione la tecla de inicio para alimentar el original cargado Entonces el cambio de tama o sincronizaci n del borde superior y la l nea central se ajustan autom ticamente 3 Si el resultado es correcto y el tablero de controles es del tipo de 7 segmentos Aparecer lo siguiente tem 1 Gd tem 2 O Item 3 O Item 4 0 Si el tablero de controles es del tipo LCD Se muestran los valores num ricos para CONVEY SPEED LEAD EDGE ADJ y DP CENTER 4 Si el resultado no es correcto y el tablero de controles es del tipo de 7 segmentos se muestra nG1 nG2 nG3 e Item 1 Si el tablero de controles es del tipo LCD se muestra DATA NG1 NG2 Para m s detalles vea el manual de servicio Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals Bevor diese Einstellung durchgef hrt wird muss der Winkel der Vorder und Hinterkante eingestellt werden siehe die Seit
292. paper feeder 6 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from third paper feeder Jam code 14 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley separation pulley or for warding pulley is deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulley Broken cassette feed switch 2 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective cassette feed switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn cassette feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch is not light Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 3 malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 3 to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 3 Check see service manual of paper feeder 7 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying misfeed in vertical paper con veying section 1 Jam code 15 Broken registration switch cassette feed switch 1 or 2 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light Registration switch cassette feed switch 1 2 Check if the paper feed clutch cassette paper feed clutch 1 2
293. performed automatically If the operation panel is an LCD type Numerical values for CONVEY SPEED LEAD EDGE ADJ and DP C R are displayed 4 If the results are NG and the operation panel is a ni segment type nG1 nG2 nG3 and Item 1 are displayed If the operation panel is an LCD type DATA NG1 NG2 is displayed For details see the service manual R glage automatique en utilisant l original pour effectuer le r glage Avant d effectuer ce r glage veiller r gler l angle du bord avant et l angle du bord arri re se reporter aux pages 8 et 11 1 Passez en mode de maintenance U076 et coupez le bord queue de l original de r glage Placez le ensuite sur le plateau de l original de l unit principal DP le c t avec les lettres F et R imprim es regardant vers le haut 2 Appuyez sur la touche de d marrage pour charger l original Le r glage de l agrandissement de la synchronisation du bord t te et de l axe s effectue automatiquement 3 Si les r sultats obtenus sont satisfaisants et si le panneau de commande est du type 7 segments l affichage doit tre le suivant Point 1 Gd Point 2 0 Point 3 0 Point 4 0 Si le panneau de commande est du type LCD l affichage est celui des valeurs num riques de CONVEY SPEED LEAD EDGE ADJ et DP CENTER 4 Si les r sultats obtenus sont d fectueux et si le panneau de commande est du type 7 segments l affichage doit tre le suivant nG1 nG2 nG3 et Point 1 Si le
294. ple de copie Si l cart entre l axe du papier ligne pointill e et le trait de l exemple de copie 2 est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Si el tablero de controles es de tipo LCD Ajuste de la sincronizaci n del borde superior 1 Active el modo de mantenimiento 034 Seleccione ADJ RCL ON TIMING y presione la tecla de inicio Seleccione RCL DUP Presionar la tecla de interrupci n para imprimir el patr n de prueba en modo d plex y controlar la imagen Valor de referencia Dentro de 20 2 5 mm imagen de copia de muestra a Si la separaci n supera el valor de referencia realizar el siguiente ajuste Wenn es sich um eine LCD Bedienungstafel handelt Einstellen des Vorderkanten Timings 1 1 F hren Sie den Wartungsmodus 034 aus Wahlen Sie ADJ RCL ON TIMING und dr cken Sie die Starttaste Wahlen Sie RCL DUP Dr cken Sie die Unterbrechungstaste um das Testmuster im Duplexmodus auszugeben und berpr fen Sie das Bild lt Bezugswert gt Binnen 20 2 5 mm Kopienmuster a Bild Uberschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello LCD Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo principale 1 1 Awiare il modo manutenzione 034 Selezionare ADJ RCL ON TIMING e premere il tasto di avvio Selezionare RCL DUP Premere il tasto di interruzione per eseguire i modelli di prova nel modo duplex e controllare l
295. plex Einheit eee B M3 x 08 Schraube C Kabelf hrung sees Parti di fornitura A Unit Duplex eeren Dampfungsmaterial vollst ndig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite Schalten Sie unbedingt den Hauptschalter der Haupteinheit des Kopierers oder MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker von der Netzsteckdose ab bevor Sie mit der Installation der Duplex Einheit beginnen Procedura Assicurarsi di spegnere l interruttore principale del corpo principale della copiatrice o dell MFP e di disconnettere il cordone di alimentazione dalla presa a muro prima di dare inizio alla B Vite M3 X 08 nee 2 procedura d installazione dell Unit Duplex C Guida Cavi 1 ARIES LAPT Bea Ada ZORIDUR T ZRA DER PAR EL LBM AS A MES MIE HAT R PARRA ARE A UE ITHE B M3 C PRF AA A AA RFI E DUES i v PAM EU A EX T ERE ci Tz X MFP Z Y EE ARO AA ZA Y E F OFF ICL AKO EMT I S EROTI A MELAS Posi ei 1 Werp zn5 ZL B EAMIX08 titi ias 2 C ERA Fico 1 Teo cse Pwr Open the left cover 1 Remove the stop ring 2 and the strap 3 from the rear side Remove the stop ring 4 and strap 5 from the front side Open the left cover 1 until it is put horizontally Ouvrez le couvercle gauche 1
296. possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l originale vedere pagina 21 lt lt ARMA gt UDARA Tr 2 BRGUE TT DAE UA RARE SOR fri rong BALE M Chas fH gt I 3 Omm DAS ALTRI 4 Omm LAW MEV IA ORE SS ILE CREE EE gt E 3 Omm DIP XU 4 Omm LA PY MUHA LE 15 K lt PRY DE 1 526 DA A unm 5817 i lt AU gt LAT 2 Omm LAA ALTRI 2 Omm LAA MUD 19 Dr lt ERE gt I 2 0mm DUI AU 3 Omm LY EA BARES TDR E IATA AE ro ERIT JE A ET AE 21H lt lt ERNER gt gt DT FeO ME CHE 17 5 LM 0 CHE AAT DPV AR IE LUMEN T RU St m Fl EE 8A Z lt EM gt HE 3 0mm WA mE 4 Omm LA lin Fl OD ME RE 11 gt cras pm 3 Omm LAA HE 4 Omm LAA SERB 00 153 UB 1 5 D ES LLIEPDE C 17 4 9 XB BE 2 Omm UA mm 2 Omm ELA UELA 24LMRR IR S KB A 2 Omm AP AT 3 Omm LUPA SE AAA EE od x I EE 7 7 ED EEN IRA ESE RAS EEES 21 4 9 4 3mm 4mm 3mm 4mm Checking the angle of leading edge Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment Reference value For simplex copying Within 3 0 mm For duplex copying Within 4 0 mm V rification de l a
297. quantity correction copy quantity Exp 1 flashing Main charging copy quantity correction correction amount Method for main charger output 1 Press the start key The selected operation starts 2 Tostop operation press the stop clear key Setting the grid control voltage 1 Change the setting using the zoom keys Description Setting range Initial setting Grid control voltage 0 to 255 107 Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher and decreasing it makes the potential lower 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting the main charging copy quantity correction 1 Change the setting using the zoom keys Display Setting Setting range Initial setting Exp 4 lit Copy interval 1 to 255 minute 60 Exp 5 lit Copy quantity 1 to 255 10 sheets 50 Exp 1 flashing Correction amount 0 to 50 bit 10 Copy interval Sets the time interval from the previous copying If the time from the previous copying exceeds this preset value the copy quantity counter will be reset Copy quantity Sets the copy quantity from which copy quantity correction starts When the copy quan tity counter reaches this preset value correction will start Correction amount Sets the correction amount for copy quantity correction Set the values in the range from 5 to 120 minutes for copy interval from 10 to 2 000 sheets for copy quantity and from 5 to 50 bits for correction a
298. re on the rail And check the scanner wire winds correctly Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB and check for correct operation Exposure lamp problem Non lighting of the exposure lamp is detected at the beginning of copying Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC16 on the main engine PWB and the connector on the inverter PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp Incorrect shading position Adjust the position of the contact glass shading plate If the problem still occurs replace the home position switch Defective PWB Replace the main engine PWB or inverter PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 18 AGC problem After AGC correct input is not obtained at CCD Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC27 on the main engine PWB and the connector on the CCD PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp Defective PWB Replace the main engine PWB or CCD PWB and check for correct operation Contents 2KL 2KK Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Polygon motor synchronization prob lem The polygon motor does not reach the stable speed
299. rear side of the machine 3 Remove the stop ring and bush Scamner wire drum gear Figure 1 5 39 1 5 22 6 Remove the stop ring and bush from the front of the machine Remove the scanner wire drum shaft from the scanner unit Insert the locating ball on each of the scan ner wires into the hole in the respective scanner wire drum and wind the scanner wire three turns inward and four turns out ward With the locating ball as the reference point wind the shorter end of each of the wires outward Secure the scanner wires using the scanner wire stoppers 2KL 2KK Scanner wire drum shaft aa Stop ring Figure 1 5 40 Scanner wire stopper Scanner wire stopper Three turns inward Three turns inward Scanner wire drum Four turns outward Four turns outward Locating ball Figure 1 5 41 1 5 23 2KL 2KK 8 Refit the scanner wire drum shaft to the scanner unit 9 Insert the two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to fix the mirror 2 frame in posi tion Frame securing tool Mirror 2 frame Figure 1 5 42 10 Loop the outer ends of the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame winding from below to aboVve eret aa aa 1 11 Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside the scanner unit 2 12 Loop the inner ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the
300. ress the start key CLE appears 2 Press the start key The fuser problem data is initialized Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 40 Checking the fuser count Description Displays the fuser count Purpose To check the fuser count Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Setting range Initial setting Exp 1 First 3 digits 000 to 999 000 Exp 2 Last 3 digits 000 to 999 000 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U198 Setting the fuser phase control Description Sets the use of fuser phase control to reduce electrical noise generated by the machine Purpose Normally no change is necessary If electrical noise generated by the machine causes flickering of the lights around the machine select fuser phase control to reduces the noise Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select either on or oFF using the zoom keys Display Description on Fuser phase control present oFF Fuser phase control absent Initial setting oFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the fuser temperature Description Displays
301. riginal on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Change the setting value using the zoom keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 13 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U072 U404 P 1 3 52 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 25 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U073 Checking scanner operation Description Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions Purpose To check scanner operation Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be changed using the exposure adjustment keys 3 Change the setting using the zoom keys Exposure indicator Operating conditions Setting range Exp 1 Exp 2 Magnification Paper size 25 to 40096 See below Exp 3 On and off of the exposure lamp on or off Paper size for each setting Paper size A5R Folio 11 x 17 11 x 15 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Setting 8 A4 42 9 B5 47 24 11 x 8 1 2 52 36 A3 53 39 B4 55 40 A4R 56 41 B5R 58 Press the start key The setting is set Press the interrupt key Press the s
302. rinting system turn the copier s power switch OFF and unplug the copier from the power supply Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh sive et ou les mat riaux de rembourrage des pi ces fournies Avant d installer le syst me d impression mettre le copieur hors tension l interrupteur principal et le d brancher de la prise secteur Aseg rese de despegar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas Antes de instalar el sistema de impresi n apague la fotocopiadora a OFF y desenchufe la fotocopiadora del suministro el ctrico Installing the printer board 1 Remove two screws 1 and remove the cover 2 Installation de la carte d imprimante 1 Oter les deux vis 1 et retirer le couvercle 2 Instalaci n de la tarjeta de impresora 1 Quite los dos tornillos 1 y desmonte la cubierta 2 y Anpan le 8 Insert the printer board A all the way into the slot and secure it with two screws 1 that have been removed in step 1 Ins rer la carte d imprimante A fond dans la fente et la fixer l aide de deux vis 1 qui avaient t retir es auparavant l tape 1 Inserte la tarjeta de impresora A completamente en la ranura y asegure con los tornillos 1 quitados en el paso 1 INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG FUR Printing System Z GUIDA ALL INSTALLAZIONE PEL Printing System Z Lieferumfang Standard A Drucke
303. rkarte Option B USB Schnittstelle IB 110 Dotazione standard A Scheda stampante Opzione B Interfaccia USB IB 110 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dampfungsmaterial vollst ndig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Bevor Sie das Drucksystem installieren schalten Sie den Netzschalter des Kopierers aus und trennen Sie den Kopierer vom Stromnetz Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite Prima di eseguire il montaggio del sistema di stampa spegnere l interruttore principale e sfilare la spina della copiatrice dalla presa Installieren der Druckerkarte 1 Die zwei Schrauben 1 herausdrehen und die Abdeckung 2 abnehmen Montaggio della scheda stampante 1 Rimuovere le due viti 1 per togliere il pannello 2 Die Druckerkarte A bis zum Anschlag in den Steckplatz einschieben und mit den in Schritt 1 entfernten zwei Schrauben 1 befestigen Inserire la scheda stampante A fino in fondo nello slot e fissarla con le due viti 1 che sono state rimosse nel passo 1 fel RA IX Printing System OO RFH aa B USB 24 IB 110 DR APTE RIPARI TERRAZO ARTIST OFF da pL UT E WEE FAR ATA FT EH 1 SHIP 2 BERET 1 RIG P nb 2 RATED A dL SU JH BL B 2 MORET 1 In DA Printing System X RE FIRE Fam A ZUV
304. rminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective exposure lamp Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with YC2 1 and YC2 4 on the inverter PCB go low If not replace the exposure lamp Defective inverter PWB Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with YC 1 3 on the inverter PWB go low If not replace the inverter PWB If the exposure lamp does not turn off with YC1 3 on the inverter PWB high replace the inverter PWB Defective main engine PWB Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC16 4 on the main engine PWB goes low If not replace the main engine PWB If YC16 4 on the main engine PWB is always low replace the main engine PWB 8 Main charging is not performed Broken main charger wire Replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 36 Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire and grid The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective high voltage PWB Check if main charging takes place when CN1 7 on the high volt age PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Defective main engine PWB
305. roken fuser ther mistor wire Measure the resistance If it is oo Q replace the fixing thermistor Fuser thermistor installed incor rectly Check and reinstall if necessary Fuser thermostat triggered Check for continuity If none replace the fuser thermostat Fuser heater installed incor rectly Check and reinstall if necessary Broken fuser heater wire Check for continuity If none replace the fuser heater Zero cross signal error Interrupt of the zero cross signal does not occur more than 1 s Poor contact in the connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective power source PWB Check if the zero crossing signal is output from YC2 2 on the power source PWB If not replace the power source PWB Defective main engine PWB Replace the main engine PWB if C6400 is detected while YC2 2 on the power source PWB outputs the zero crossing signal Broken external thermistor wire The thermistor output value is 0 5 V or less Poor contact in the connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective humidity sensor Replace the cassette PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 20 Short circuited external thermistor wire The thermistor output value i
306. rs listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field High voltage PWB VR401 APC PWB VR1 1 6 3 Remarks on main engine PWB replacement When replacing the main engine PWB remove the EEPROM YC37 and EEPROM YC38 from the PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new PWB EEPROM EEPROM YC38 Main engine PWB EEPROM Figure 1 6 2 1 6 2 2KL 2KK 2 1 1 Paper feed section The paper feed section conveys paper from the cassette or MP tray to the left and right registration rollers at which point secondary feed takes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing Cassette can hold up to 300 80 g m2 sheets of paper Paper is fed from the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pul ley and paper feed pulley The separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time via the torque limiter The MP tray can hold up to 100 80 g m sheets of paper Paper is fed from the MP tray by the rotation of the MP paper feed pulley Figure 2 1 1 Paper feed section 1 Forwarding pulley 7 Left registration roller 2 Paper feed pulley 8 Right registration roller 3 Separation pulley 9 Registration switch RSW 4 Cassette base 10 Paper switch PSW 5 MP paper feed pulley 11 MP paper switch MPPSW 6 MP separation pad 12 MP paper size width switch MPPWSW 2 1 1
307. rschl ssen an ihm haftet Montaggio del coprioriginale 7 Collocare il copioriginali B sulla lastra di esposizione con il lato provvisto di nastro velcro autoadesivo rivolto verso l alto Allineare l angolo di 90 gradi del coprioriginale B con l angolo interno sinistro del pannello di controllo originale 8 Chiudere lentamente il DP A in modo che il coprioriginale B vi si possa fissare mediante il nastro velcro ze mis VA Je JE RR B WE MERKAR E HEURE B pk 907 AMPIE JUS ERR LE Ze VI 8 fft HUC F DP A fU SR B AE DP AME FAT Y ORY HIH 7 IZ v b B eV YY I7F 7BATWI IE ELT SRN FAECES REX y h B 14 90 CR cU 18 BiaigmiRO ZA 128 PEATE 8 DP RK A amp OK UE FAL EY v b B 4 DP EMEA 0 AIT Do Connecting the signal cable 9 Connect the connector 6 of the signal cable to the machine Do not twist the signal cable Connexion du c ble de signal 9 Branchez le connecteur 6 du c ble de signal sur la machine Attention ne pas tordre le c ble de signal Conexi n del cable de se al 9 Conecte el conector 6 del cable de se al en la m quina No tuerza el cable de se al AnschlieBen des Signalkabels 9 Den Stecker 6 des Signalkabels an die Maschine anschlieRen Das Signalkabel nicht verdrehen Collegamento del cavo del segnale 9 Collegare il connettore 6 del cavo del segnale alla macchina Non attorcigliare il cavo del segnale FR S tx 9
308. s 4 5 V or more Poor contact in the connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective humidity sensor Replace the cassette PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 3 Image formation problems 1 No image appears entirely white See page 1 4 22 6 A black line appears longitudi nally See page 1 4 24 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently mis aligned with the original See page 1 4 25 16 Fusing is poor N See page 1 4 26 2 No image appears 3 lmage is too light entirely black See page 1 4 22 See page 1 4 23 7 A black line 8 One side of the appears laterally copy image is darker than the other See page 1 4 24 See page 1 4 24 12 The leading edge 13 Paper creases of the image is sporadically mis aligned with the original E See page 1 4 25 See page 1 4 25 17 Image is out of 18 lmage center focus does not align with the original center See page 1 4 26 See page 1 4 27 4 Background is visible See page 1 4 23 9 Black dots appear on the image See page 1 4 24 14 Offset occurs See page 1 4 26 2KL 2KK 5 A white line
309. s each switch If there is no continuity when the switch is on replace it 16 Others 1 Wiring is broken shorted or makes poor contact Check for continuity If none repair 1 4 31 2KL 2KK 1 4 5 Mechanical problems Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 1 No primary paper feed Check ifthe surfaces of the following rollers or pulleys are dirty with paper powder forwarding pulley paper feed pulley separa tion pulley registration roller MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pad Clean with isopropyl alcohol Check if the upper lower forwarding pulleys forwarding pulley paper feed pulley or sepa ration pulley is deformed Replace the pulley if it is deformed see page 1 5 3 Check if the MP paper feed pulley or MP sep aration pad is deformed Replace the pulley if it is deformed see page 1 5 11 Electrical problem with the following clutches and solenoid paper feed clutch registration clutch and MP solenoid See page 1 4 28 2 No secondary paper feed Check if the surfaces of the right and left reg istration rollers are dirty with paper powder Clean with isopropyl alcohol Electrical problem with the registration clutch See page 1 4 28 3 Skewed paper feed Width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly Check the width guide visually and correct or replace if necessary Deformed width guide in
310. s of the main engine PWB Main engine PWB Figure 1 5 50 1 5 29 2KL 2KK 6 Remove four pins and remove the scanner unit Scanner unit Figure 1 5 51 7 Remove the screw and remove the eject cover Eject cover Screw Figure 1 5 52 1 5 30 8 Remove the screw and remove the inner rear cover 9 Release two hooks and both and then remove the eject tray 2KL 2KK Inner rear cover Gres Figure 1 5 53 Eject tray Z lt Eject tray Figure 1 5 54 1 5 31 2KL 2KK 10 Remove four screws and two connectors N Connector and remove the laser scanner unit LA 11 Replace the laser scanner unit and refit all SS a the removed parts N Laser scanner unit Connector Figure 1 5 55 1 5 32 2KL 2KK 5 Adjusting the longitudinal squareness reference Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed lateral square ness not obtained Caution Adjust the deflection in the paper at the registration roller first see page 1 3 16 Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image and if it is not obtained perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment Before making the following adjustment output a VTC PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for the adjustment Procedure Retighten the two screws and refit the contact glass Place the original
311. scanner magnification U065 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration U066 Adjusting the scanner center line U067 When maintenance item U076 Adjusting the DP automatically is run using the specified original P N 302AC68243 the following adjustments are automatically made Adjusting the DP magnification U070 Adjusting the DP scanning timing U071 Adjusting the DP center line U072 Image quality Item Specifications 100 magnification Enlargement reduction Lateral squareness Leading edge registration Skewed paper feed Left right difference Curling Machine 10 8 Using DP 1 5 Machine 1 0 Using DP 1 5 Machine 1 5 mm 375 mm Using DP 3 0 mm 375 mm Cassette 2 5 mm MP tray 2 5 mm Duplex mode 2 5 mm Cassette 1 5 mm or less MP tray 1 5 mm or less Duplex mode 2 0 mm or less Cassette 2 0 mm or less MP tray 2 0 mm or less Duplex mode 3 0 mm or less Simplex mode 10 0 mm or less Duplex mode 10 0 mm or less 2 4 6 2KL 2KK Wiring diagram
312. scun casettone 19 X Bl X PLE VEIL EE 20 S E ADL i 3 MALE 20 X BE A sce BEDS ALI SE CE BAER BA f 3 NEZILE 19 KED EZR 3 TAT 7 23 2 v 20 REO TU S 20 4 X Ev POCA 04323 73 v E 3 MPA E gt KIAHE oU 23 gt _ Checking the operation Connect the power plug of the machine to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on V rification du fonctionnement Ins rer la fiche d alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension Verificaci n del funcionamiento Conecte el enchufe el ctrico de la m quina en un tomacorriente de la pared y conecte el interruptor principal berpr fen des Betriebs Den Netzstecker der Maschine in die Steckdose stecken und den Betriebsschalter einschalten Verifica di funzionamento Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione della macchina alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e accendere l interruttore principale di alimentazione Ti E MIU TELS ALE FE ARE FT PE HR SERERE PERA ENT 7 Tver No LGA BAA YALA FE NITTI 20 2 5mm EE If the operation panel is a 7 segment type Adjusting the leading edge timing 1 Run maintenance mode 034 Press the image quality mode key until Text is lit group 1 2nd level cassette Press the exposure key
313. section Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire and grid Leaking separation electrode 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the other Copy example Causes Clean the separation electrode Check procedures corrective measures Dirty main charger wire Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 36 Defective exposure lamp 9 Black dots appear on the image Copy example Causes Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly If not replace the exposure lamp see page 1 5 17 Check procedures corrective measures Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Dirty or flawed drum Clean the drum or if it is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 34 Deformed or worn cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 34 Dirty drum separation claws Clean the drum separation claws Dirty the heat roller separation claws 1 4 24 Clean the heat roller separation claws 10 Image is blurred Copy example Causes 2KL 2KK Check procedures corrective measures Scanner moves erratically Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner rails If any remove it Deformed press roller Replace the press roller see page 1 5 42 Paper conveying section drive prob lem Check th
314. selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed Description Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors Purpose Used to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct Also speed adjust ment for each paper source can be performed in group 2 Method Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the group using the image mode selection key 3 Select the item to be set using the exposure adjustment keys Image mode Exposure Setting Initial LEDs indicator Desenptidn range setting O Text amp Photo Exp 1 li Drive motor speed adjustment 5 0 to 5 0 0 3 O Photo Exp 2 li Polygon motor speed adjustment 5 0 to 4 0 0 7 Text Exp 3 li Eject motor speed adjustment 5 0 to 5 0 0 5 Exp 4 li Drum motor speed adjustment 5 0 to 5 0 Exp 5 lit Eject motor speed adjustment 2 5 0 to 5 0 Exp 1 flashing Eject motor speed adjustment 3 5 0 to 5 0 Exp 2 flashing Eject motor speed adjustment 4 0 0 to 5 0 O i i Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit Motor speed adjustment for paper 5 0 to 5 0 O Photo Exp 2 lit feed from MP tray ET Text Exp 3 lit Motor speed adjustment for paper 5 0 to 5 0 feed from optional paper feeder Motor speed adjustment 5 0 to 5 0 in duplex mode Off 9 On Adjustment 1 Press the interrupt key 2 Press
315. sempio di copia I Aumentare il valore dell impostazione Per un esempio di copia m Diminuire il valore dell impostazione Variazione graduale 0 15 mm eel eds LCD B WEN U072 Ak isk XETE 1saided HARE RUA RARA XE FER Ate HE fw dU E EDES AR WEHE 1 mI denk WEE m IN BAIR BEA LAMBA AO 15mm ESRI LOD 4 FOE 1 RYPE AE RU072 Et PL Isided ZER LEI amp HIRE WRZE V ETRE AT AAT ALA pa E IL CAMERA xT HD APY AW 1 OBA RES ET SESH YW m DRA RENE FU LAF yA ORES 0 15mm ON ON 20 FAHU Make a proof copy again Repeat steps 1 to 2 until line 2 of copy example shows the following the reference values lt Reference value gt For simplex copying Within 2 0 mm For duplex copying Within 3 0 mm Effectuez nouveau une copie de test R p tez les tapes 1 2 jusqu ce que la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de r f rence suivantes Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 2 0 mm max Copie recto verso 3 0 mm max Haga otra copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 2 hasta que la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 2 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 3 0 mm Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen Die Schritte 1 bis 2 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist lt Bezugswert gt F r
316. st of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be output using the exposure adjustment keys Display Output list d L List of the current settings of the maintenance modes J L List of the paper jam occurrences C L List of the service call occurrences 3 Press the start key A list is output When A4 Letter paper is available a report of this size is output If not specify the paper feed location Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Exiting the maintenance mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode Purpose To exit the maintenance mode Method Press the start key The normal copy mode is entered Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings Purpose To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport position in which the frame can be fixed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select on using the zoom keys 3 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport Completion The power switch turns off 1 3 5 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U004 Checking the machine number Description Displays the machine number Purpose To check
317. status of sensor related to toner Purpose To check if the sensor operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn sensor on and off manually to check the status When the on status of a sensor is detected that sensor is displayed in reverse Original size indicator Sensor A4 Letter R Toner container sensor TCS Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 37 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U157 Checking clearing the developing drive time Description Displays the developing drive time for checking clearing or changing a figure Purpose To check the developing drive time after replacing the developer unit Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Setting range Initial setting Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 3 First 3 digits Last 3 digits Clearing the drive time 000 to 999 000 to 999 000 000 Clearing 1 Light exp 3 2 Press the start key The drive time is cleared Setting 1 Change the drive time using the numeric or zoom keys 2 Press the start key The drive time is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 38 Checking the developing count Description Displays the developing count Purpose
318. t Figure 1 5 66 3 Remove the screw and two connectors and then remove the fuser unit Connectors Fuser unit Figure 1 5 67 1 5 40 2KL 2KK 4 Replace the fuser unit and refit all the Notch position removed parts After connecting the connector be sure to hitch the fuser thermistor wire to both the notch position and the hook of the fuser unit Fuser thermistor wire Figure 1 5 68 1 5 41 2KL 2KK 2 Detaching and refitting the press roller Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 40 2 Remove two screws and open the fuser unit 3 Separate the right and left fuser unit 4 Remove the screw and release two hooks and then remove the press roller guide from the left fuser unit 1 5 42 Screw Screw Fuser unit Left fuser unit Figure 1 5 69 Press roller guide Left fuser unit Screw Figure 1 5 70 2KL 2KK 5 Remove the press roller from left fuser unit Press roller Cautions Remove the press roller carefully not to scratch its surface When removing it be careful not to drop and lose the bush 6 Replace the press roller and refit all the removed parts Left fuser unit Figure 1 5 71 1 5 43 2KL 2KK 3 Detaching and refitting the fuser heater Follow the procedure b
319. t On or Off and press the OK key Auto clear time Sets the auto clear time 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 52 AutoClearTime and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the OK key Setting range 10 to 270 sec Low power mode transition time Sets the auto preheat time 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 53 LowPower Time and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the OK key 1 min 5 min 15 min 30 min 45 min 60 min 90 min 120 min 180 min 240 min Sleep mode transition time Sets the auto shutoff time 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 54 AutoSleep Time and press the OK key 3 Select the setting and press the OK key 1 min 5 min 15 min 30 min 45 min 60 min 90 min 120 min 180 min 240 min Alarm The alarm can be set to sound when errors occur 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 55 Alarm and press the OK key 3 Select On or Off and press the OK key Digital dot coverage report Prints out a report that shows the number of copies made and the blackness ratio for each paper size 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 56 CoverageRepo and press the OK key Check to make sure that A4 Letter size paper is loaded in the cassette 3 Select YES and press the OK key Report is printed out 1 3 69 2KL 2KK This page is intentionally left blank 1 3 70
320. t 3 digits of Statement size copy count Exp 4 lit Clearing the count CLE Exp 1 lit Exp 2 lit Exp 3 lit Exp 4 lit ot display the other size First 3 digits of other size copy count Last 3 digits of other size copy count Clearing the count CLE ud Gal Text amp Photo Oi Photo d OCT Text TIR Text amp Photo Exp 1 lit Clearing all counts CLE fi amp ilPhoto D CT Text Off On Flashing Clearing copy counts by paper size 1 Select the paper size to clear the count 2 Display CLE using the exposure adjustment keys 3 Press the start key The count is cleared Clearing copy counts for all paper size 1 Select group 13 2 Press the start key The counts are cleared Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the accounting counts Description Checks the accounting counts Purpose To check the accounting counts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item for which the count is to be checked using the image mode selection key 3 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Image mode LED Exposure group No indicator Copy quantity display count value 1 O T il Text amp Photo Exp 1 First 3 digits of copy count O Photo Exp 2 Last 3 digits of copy count ET Text Exp 1 First 3 digits of printer count O i Te
321. t side window seen through the right side window Figure 1 5 1 The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse Incision B Cut AKYOCERa KYOCERA Figure 1 5 2 1 5 2 2KL 2KK 1 5 2 Paper feed section 1 Detaching and refitting the separation pulley Follow the procedure below to replace the separation pulley Procedure 1 Open the front cover and left cover 2 Pull out the cassette Cassette Figure 1 5 3 3 Remove the screw and remove the front left lower cover Front left lower cover Figure 1 5 4 1 5 3 2KL 2KK 4 Remove the screw and remove the lower paper feed unit 5 Release two hooks and remove the separa tion pulley unit from the lower paper feed unit 1 5 4 Mr Screw Lower paper feed unit Figure 1 5 5 Separation pulley unit Separation pulley unit Figure 1 5 6 2KL 2KK Remove the separation pulley shaft from the separation pulley unit Remove the separation pulley from the sep aration pulley shaft Replace the separation pulley and refit all the removed parts Separation pulley shaft Nu y 7 Separation pulley Figure 1 5 7 1 5 5 2KL 2KK 2 Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley Follow the procedure below to replace the forwarding pulley and
322. tart key Scanning starts under the selected conditions To stop operation press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key when scanning stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Paper size Setting 1 3 26 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Description Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DP Purpose Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the platen and when scanning an original from the DP Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the zoom keys Description Setting range Initial setting 0 to 8 1 DP input light luminosity Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the interrupt key Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U076 Adjusting the DP automatically Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the DP scanning section Adjusting the DP magnification U070 Adjusting the DP scanning timing U071 Adjusting the DP c
323. tenimiento e ingrese en el item de mantenimiento U070 utilice la tecla de exposici n para seleccionar exp 1 y a continuaci n ajuste los l mites superior e inferior cambiando de tamafio la imagen Presione la tecla de interrupci n y compruebe la imagen en la copia de prueba Para la copia de muestra h Aumente el valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra i Reduzca el valor de configuraci n Cantidad de cambio por paso 0 2 mm Wenn es sich um eine 7 Segment Bedienungstafel handelt 1 Den Modus auf Wartungsmodus U070 setzen mit der Belichtungstaste exp 1 w hlen und dann die obere und untere Grenze durch Vergr Bern des Bilds einstellen Die Unterbrechungstaste dr cken und das Bild an der Probekopie berpr fen F r Kopienmuster h Den Einstellwert erh hen F r Kopienmuster i Den Einstellwert erniedrigen Anderungsbetrag pro Stufe 0 2 mm Se il tipo di pannello operativo quello a 7 segmenti 1 Entrare in modalit manutenzione U070 usare il tasto di esposizione per selezionare exp 1 e quindi regolare i limiti superiore e inferiore tramite l ingrandimento immagine Premere il tasto di interruzione e controllare l immagine nella copia di prova Per un esempio di copia h Aumentare il valore dell impostazione Per un esempio di copia i Diminuire il valore dell impostazione Variazione graduale 0 2 mm ee Be ib B WEA VOTO EX ETE FRE Hil HEE PE exp 1 t Tif A UA EZ EDI P E o M
324. ter counts up as copies are made 2KL 2KK Key counter mounting plate 2C960100 Aperture 4 pin connector key counter cover key counter Square hole 7 Figure 1 2 20 Aperture 4 pin connector 4 pin connector ES SN Key counter mounting plate M4 x 30 screw Key counter cover Figure 1 2 21 1 2 15 2KL 2KK 1 2 4 Installing the cassette heater option Installing the cassette heater requires the following component Cassette heater P N 302KK94470 for 220 to 240 V specifications only Cassette heater P N 302KK94460 for 120 V specifications One 1 M3 x 8 S tight screw P N 7BB700308H Procedure 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the screw and release three hooks and then remove the front right cover 3 Pull out the cassette Front right cover Front right cover Hook Figure 1 2 22 1 2 16 4 Pass the cassette heater cable through the edging and fit the cassette heater to the machine 5 Attach the cassette heater using the M3 x 8 S tight screw 6 Pass the cassette heater cable through the clamp Connect the connector of the cas sette heater cable to the connector of the machine 7 Refit all the removed parts 2KL 2KK Cassette heater cable Cassette heater Figure 1 2 23 Connector Cassette heater cable M3 x 8 S tight screw Figure 1 2 24 1 2 17 2KL 2KK This page is intentionally left blank 1 2 18 2KL
325. ter wire P Wire guide a7 Figure 1 2 17 1 2 13 2KL 2KK 9 Insert two bands of the key counter wire to the machine 10 Connect the 4 pin connector of the key counter wire to the YC12 on the main engine PWB 11 Pull the other 4 pin connector out from the aperture of the right middle cover 12 Refit the rear cover 1 2 14 Figure 1 2 18 4 pin connector Key counter wi 4 pin DL l LL connector Main engine PWB Figure 1 2 19 13 Pass the 4 pin connector of the key counter signal cable through the aperture in the key counter mounting plate 14 Hook the square hole on the key counter cover onto the key counter mounting plate 15 Connect the 4 pin connector of the key counter signal cable to the 4 pin connector of the key counter wire 16 Insert the hook of the key counter mounting plate in the aperture of the right middle cover 17 Fit the key counter cover and the key counter mounting plate using the M4 x 30 Screw 18 Insert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly 19 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 20 Run maintenance item U204 and select Key counter 21 Exit the maintenance mode 22 Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the message display when the key counter is pulled out 23 Check that the coun
326. the fuser temperature the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity Purpose To check the fuser temperature the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity Method 1 Press the start key 2 Display each temperature using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Exp 1 Fuser temperature C Exp 2 Ambient temperature C Exp 3 Absolute humidity 96 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Turning all LEDs on Description Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light Method Press the start key All the LEDs on the operation panel light Press the stop clear key or wait for 10 s The LEDs turns off and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 41 2KL 2KK Maintenance Dascription item No P U203 Checking DP separately Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP Purpose To check the DP operation Method 1 Press the start key 2 Place an original on the DP if running this simulation with paper 3 Select the item to be operated using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Display Motor Exp 1 d P With paper Exp 2 d n Without paper continuous operation Exp 3 dp2 With paper duplex mode Exp 4 dn2 Without paper duplex m
327. the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the power switch is turned on 1 3 9 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U030 Checking motor operation Description Drives each motor Purpose To check the operation of each motor Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the motor to be operated using the exposure adjustment keys Display Motor A Drive motor DM is turned ON 2F Drum motor DRM is turned ON F1 Cassette drive motor 1 CDM1 is turned ON option F2 Cassette drive motor 2 CDM2 is turned ON option F3 Cassette drive motor 3 CDM3 is turned ON option EJ1 Eject motor EM forward rotation is turned ON EJ2 Eject motor EM reverse rotation is turned ON 3 Press the start key The selected motor operates 4 To stop operation press the stop reset key Completion Press the stop clear key after operation stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 10 Checking switches for paper conveying Description Displays the on off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path Purpose To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status When the on status of a switch is detected the original size indicator corresponding to the operated switch lights Original size indicator Switch A3R Ledger Eject switch ESW A4R Le
328. the start key to output a VTC pattern A Correct values for an A3 Ledger output are A 300 1 0 mm B 270 1 0 mm Figure 1 3 6 3 Change the setting value using the zoom keys A Drive motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction and decreasing it makes the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction B Polygon motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and decreasing it makes the image longer in the main scanning direction 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 17 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties Description Adjusts the image scanning density Purpose Used when the entire image appears too dark or light Method Press the start key Setting 1 Pressthe start key 2 Change the setting using the zoom keys Description Setting range Initial setting Image scanning density 0 to 23 12 Increasing the setting makes the density lower and decreasing it makes the density higher 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the interrupt key
329. the zoom keys For output example 1 decrease the value For output example 2 increase the value Center line of printing 1 0 mm 000 Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 2 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U067 U072 P 1 3 21 P 1 3 25 1 3 13 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U034 Adjustment trailing edge margin adjustment cont 1 Select group 3 using the image mode selection key Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Trailing edge margin adjustment 4 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 1 mm Press the interrupt key Press the start key to output a test pattern Change the setting value using the zoom keys For output example increase the value Trailing edge margin Correct image Output example Figure 1 3 3 5 Press the start key The value is set Adjustment leading edge registration adjustment for printer 1 Select group 4 using the image mode selection key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure Description Setting Change in indicator range value per step Exp 1 lit Paper feed from cassette 5 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm Exp 2 lit Paper feed from MP tray 5 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm Exp 3 lit Paper feed from
330. tion U908 Checking the total count Description Display the total count value Purpose To check the total count value Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Copy quantity display count value Exp 1 First 3 digits of the total count Exp 2 Last 3 digits of the total count Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Clearing the black ratio data Description Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 Letter sheets Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select on using the zoom keys Display Operation Canceling the clearing on Executing the clearing 3 Press the start key The accumulated black ratio data is cleared Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 57 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U911 Checking clearing copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays or clears the paper feed count value by paper size Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the paper size group No for which the count is to be checked or cleared using the image mode selection key 3
331. tment keys for 3 s 2 Select 28 Casst3MedType and press the OK key 3 Select the paper type and press the OK key This will be displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed 1 3 68 Selecting media type cassette 4 Sets the paper type to the third paper feeder 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 29 Casst4MedType and press the OK key 3 Select the paper type and press the OK key This will be displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Specifying the paper weight and 2 sided copying to custom paper Sets the paper weights and 2 sided copying to the cus tom 1 to 8 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 30 CustmMedType1 to 37 CustmMedType8 and press the OK key 3 Select the paper weight and press the OK key 4 Select On or Off and press the OK key Auto detect originals Predetermines what paper size is selected for printing when copying an original document of non standard sizes 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 38 Hagaki AGRDet and press the OK key 3 Select Hagaki or A6 R and press the OK key Auto detect originals Predetermines what paper size is selected for printing when copying an original document of non standard sizes 1 Press both of the density adjustment keys for 3 s 2 Select 39 B4R Folio Det and press the OK key 3 Select B4 R or Folio R and press the OK key Auto detect originals W
332. unit in machines using lasers Leaking laser light may ter o y fielen Q Handle the charger sections with care They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly sise A AACAUTION Wear safe clothing If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections A Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine Keep away from chains and belts A Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot A Check that the fixing unit thermistor heat and press rollers are clean Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures sise o Do not remove the ozone filter if any from the copier except for routine replacement O Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high voltage components when removing them always hold the plug itself ss N Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped If necessary protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item none emen N Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks O Remove toner completely from electronic components rnnr nenne A Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged
333. until exp3 is lit mode 3 3nd level cassette Press the exposure key until exp4 is lit mode 4 4rd level cassette Press the exposure key until exp5 is lit mode 5 Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern in duplex mode and check the image Reference value Within 20 2 5 copy example a image If the gap between the edge of the paper and the copy example line 1 is larger than the reference value perform the following adjustment Si le panneau de commande est du type 7 segments R glage de la synchronisation du bord avant 1 Ex cutez le mode de maintenance 034 Appuyez sur la touche de mode de qualit d image jusqu ce que Text s allume groupe 1 Cassette de 2 me niveau Appuyez sur la touche d exposition jusqu ce que exp3 s allume mode 3 Cassette de 3 me niveau Appuyez sur la touche d exposition jusqu ce que exp4 s allume mode 4 Cassette de 4 me niveau Appuyez sur la touche d exposition jusqu ce que exp5 s allume mode 5 Appuyez sur la touche d interruption pour imprimer un motif de test et v rifiez l image imprim e Valeur de r f rence Dans les limites de 20 2 5 mm image a d un exemple de copie Si l cart entre le bord du papier et le trait sur l exemple de copie 1 est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence proc dez au r glage suivant Si el tablero de controles es de tipo 7 segmentos Ajuste de la sincronizaci n del borde superior 1 Active el modo de mantenimient
334. ut using the exposure adjustment keys Display PG pattern to be output Purpose 0 Leading edge registration adjustment Center line adjustment Margin adjustment Lateral squareness adjustment Magnification adjustment Checking the fuser performance fuser pressure 3 Press the interrupt key 4 Press the start key A VTC PG pattern is output Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2KL 2KK 1 3 2 Management mode In addition to a maintenance function for service the machine is equipped with a management function which can be oper ated by users mainly by the administrator In this management mode settings such as default settings can be changed 1 Using the management mode Executing a department management item Executing a default setting item Press both of the density Press both of the density adjustment keys and logout key adjustment keys paper selection for 3 s key 2 sided key margin key border erase key or combine key for 3 s Select an item using the zoom Select an item using the zoom keys keys Press the OK key Press the OK key Execute the job accounting Execute the default page 1 3 66 setting item page 1 3 66 Select 00 and Select 00 and press the OK key press the OK key End 1 3
335. w kyoceramita europe com Email infoGkyoceramita europe com KYOCERA MITA NEDERLAND B V Beechavenue 25 1119RA Schiphol Rijk The Netherlands Phone 31 20 58 77 200 KYOCERA MITA UK LTD 8 Beacontree Plaza Gillette Way Reading Berks RG2 OBS U K Phone 44 1189 311 500 KYOCERA MITA ITALIA S p A Via G Verdi 89 91 20063 Cernusco s N Milano Italy Phone 39 02 92179 1 S A KYOCERA MITA BELGIUM N V Hermesstraat 84 1930 Zaventem Belgium Phone 32 2 720 9270 KYOCERA MITA FRANCE S A Parc Les Algorithmes Saint Aubin 91194 GIF SUR YVETTE France Phone 33 1 6985 2600 KYOCERA MITA ESPANA S A Edificio Kyocera Avda de Manacor No 2 28290 Las Matas Madrid Spain Phone 34 91 631 8392 KYOCERA MITA FINLAND OY Kirvesmiehenkatu 4 00880 Helsinki Finland Phone 358 9 4780 5200 KYOCERA MITA SCHWEIZ Hohlstrasse 614 8048 Z rich Switzerland Phone 41 1 908 4949 KYOCERA MITA DEUTSCHLAND GMBH Otto Hahn Str 12 D 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 918 0 KYOCERA MITA GMBH AUSTRIA Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 1230 Wien Austria Phone 43 1 86338 210 KYOCERA MITA SVENSKA AB Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista Sweden Phone 46 8 546 55000 02009 KYOCERA MITA Corporation c KYOCERA is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation KYOCERA MITA NORGE Postboks 150 Oppsal NO 0619 Oslo Olaf Helsetsvei 6 NO 0694 Oslo Norway Phone 47 22 62 73 00 KYOCERA MITA DANMARK A S Ejby Industrivej 1
336. xt amp Ph ET 45 Text amp Photo Exp 2 Last 3 digits of printer count GalPhoto fT Text Off 9 On Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 59 2KL 2KK Maintenance item No Description U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only Description Resets all of the counts back to 0 Purpose To start the counters with value O when installing the machine Supplement The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less Method 1 Press the start key If the counters have been already cleared or either of the total counter or the scan ner counter exceeds 1 000 this mode cannot be run and nG is displayed 2 Select on using the zoom keys Display Operation Canceling the clearing on Executing the clearing 3 Press the start key The accounting counter is cleared Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the machine life count Description Displays the machine life counts for checking a figure Purpose To check machine status Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys Exposure indicator Description Setting range Initial setting Exp 1 First 3 digits 000 to 999 000 Exp 2 Last 3 di
337. y Image mode LEDs Description O T C Text amp Photo Sets the type of operation panel O Photo ET Text O T Text amp Photo Sets the type of LCD device type Photo O T Text Off 9 On Setting operation panel type 1 Change the setting using the zoom keys Display Description 0 Off 1 Operation panel for Taiwan Initial setting O 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting LCD device type 1 Change the setting using the zoom keys Display Description 0 General LCD 1 Kanji display LCD Initial setting O 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2KL 2KK Description U969 Checking of toner area code Description Displays the toner area code Purpose To check the toner area code Method 1 Press the start key The toner area code is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays or clears the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light Purpose To check duration of use of the exposure lamp Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after replace ment Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using
338. y fuser heaters M and S FH M S Pressure is applied by the fuser unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted fused and fixed onto the paper The heat roller is heated by fuser heaters M and S FH M S inside it its surface temperature is detected by the fuser ther mistor FTH and is regulated by the fuser heaters turning on and off If the fuser section becomes abnormally hot fuser thermostat FTS operates shutting the power to the fuser heaters off When the fuser process is completed the paper is separated from the heat roller by its separation claws and is conveyed to eject and switchback section 3 1 4 Figure 2 1 14 Fuser section 1 Left fuser unit 6 Fuser heater M FH M 2 Right fuser unit 7 Fuser heater S FH S 3 Press roller 8 Fuser thermistor FTH 4 Heat roller 9 Fuser thermostat 1 FTS1 5 Heat roller separation claws 10 Fuser thermostat 2 FTS2 2 1 13 2KL 2KK YC3 B9 Le THERMA cT MEE No ind FTS1 Heat roller FTS2 SH MH LIVE yc18 1 B HREM yc18 3 E SHREM Figure 2 1 15 Fuser section block diagram 2 1 14 2KL 2KK 2 1 7 Eject and switchback sections The eject and switchback sections eject paper on which fuser has ended with the eject roller that is rotated by forward rotation of the eject motor In duplex copying paper is turned over by
339. za nn e iens 1 1 1 1 1 2 Parts names iaia iii eli RI rio 1 1 3 T Body ai ii celibato i cl di a dillo ii Al i il i dll e 1 1 3 2 Operation panel fi inter tit 1 1 4 1 123 Machine Cross Sec ii ia 1 1 5 1 2 Installation 1 2 1 Installation envio Med aiii A 1 2 1 1 2 2 Unpacking and installation seen 1 2 2 1 Installation Procedure A ri 1 2 2 2 Setting initial copy MOROS ivi ei iaia 1 2 10 1 2 3 Installing the key counter Option sise 1 2 11 1 2 4 Installing the cassette heater option ss 1 2 16 1 3 Maintenance Mode 123 1 Maintenance mode o ope ertt er UE ERRAT E ERE 1 3 1 1 Executing a maintenance iteM erected niente dena ante dotada 1 3 1 2 Maintenance mode item list sienne 1 3 2 3 Contents of maintenance mode items sn 1 3 5 1 3 2 Management mode tii erepta etus 1 3 65 1 Using the management mode i 1 3 65 2 Job accounting 2 2 edit eere cet ie eee e tecta ee dete AO ie teet edd 1 3 66 3 Defa lt settirig rise 1rd A LI RO 1 3 66 1 4 Troubleshooting 1 4 1 Paper misfeed detection nine recette aaa aaa 1 4 1 1 Paper misfeed indication is dada 1 4 1 2 Paper misfeed detection conditions sis 1 4 2 3 Paper misfeeds lt c o daa 1 4 8 1 4 2 Self diagnosls iii imet tie e edebat tia 1 4 15 1 Self diagnostic UNC bat A Re 1 4 15 2 Self diagnostic Codes eee team aan 1 4 16 1 4 3 Image formation probl

CS 180 CS 220 - HPI Technologies

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents